null null

DEFINITY®
Enterprise Communications Server
Release 8.2
System Description
555-233-200
Comcode 108678673
Issue 1
April 2000
Copyright  2000, Lucent Technologies
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Lucent Centers of Excellence
Notice
--Central/Eastern Europe
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in
this book was complete and accurate at the time of
printing. However, information is subject to change.
This document was prepared by the Lucent
Technologies Product Publications, Denver, CO
--Central/Latin America/Caribbean +1 303 804 3778
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your
telecommunications system by an unauthorized party,
for example, persons other than your company’s
employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working
on your company’s behalf. Note that there may be a
risk of toll fraud associated with your
telecommunications system and, if toll fraud occurs, it
can result in substantial additional charges for your
telecommunications services. You and your system
manager are responsible for the security of your
system, such as programming and configuring your
equipment to prevent unauthorized use. The system
manager is also responsible for reading all installation,
instruction, and system administration documents
provided with this product in order to fully understand
the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the
steps that can be taken to reduce that risk. Lucent
Technologies does not warrant that this product is
immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of
common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities
accessed through or connected to it. Lucent
Technologies will not be responsible for any charges
that result from such unauthorized use.
If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud
and require assistance, contact the Toll Fraud
Intervention Hotline at +1 800 643 2353 or contact your
local Lucent representative.
--Asia/Pacific
+65 872 8686
--Western Europe/Middle East
/South Africa
+44 1252 77 4800
+361 645 4334
--Australia
61-2-9352-9090
--North America
+1 800 248 1111
Standards Compliance
The equipment described in this book complies with the
following standards, as applicable:
Australia AS3548 FCC Part 15
(AS/NZ3548)
and Part 68
ITU-T
(Formerly
CCITT)
CSA C222
Number 225
ANSI
EN55022
IEC 950
ISO-9000
CISPR22
EN50081
IPNS
TS001
DEFINITY®
EN50082
National
ISDN-1
National
ISDN-2
DPNSS
ETSI
UL 1459
UL 1950I
ECMA
IEC 825
Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the
following, as applicable:
Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment,
EN55022 (CISPR22), 1993
EN50082-1, European Generic Immunity Standard
FCC Part 15
Australia AS3548
The DEFINITY ECS conforms to Class A (industrial)
equipment. Voice terminals conform to Class A equipment per
the following standards.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2
Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000-4-3
How to get help
Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000-4-4
If you need additional help, the following services are
available. You may need to purchase an extended
service agreement to use some of these services.
Contact your Lucent representative for more
information.
DEFINITY Helpline
+1 800 225 7585
(for help with feature administration and system
applications)
Lucent Technologies National Customer Care Center
Support Line
+1 800 242 2121
(for help with maintenance and repair)
Lucent Technologies Toll Fraud Intervention
Lightning effects IEC 1000-4-5
Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000-4-6
Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000-4-8
Low frequency mains disturbance
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this
equipment to be operated in a manner that does not
provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in
violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns
answer-supervision signals to the public switched
network when
+1 800 643 2353
•
answered by the called station,
Lucent Technologies Corporate Security
•
answered by the attendant, or
+1 800 822 9009
•
routed to a recorded announcement that can be
administered by the CPE user.
This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on
all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched
telephone network. Permissible exceptions are:
•
A call is unanswered.
•
A busy tone is received.
•
A reorder tone is received.
Lucent Technologies attests that this registered
equipment is capable of providing users access to
interstate providers of operator services through the use
of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call
aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation
of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules.
On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, the FCC registration number
and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be
provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices
which may be connected to the telephone line.
Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in
devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In
most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not
exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that
may be connected to a line, as determined by the total
RENs, contact the local telephone company.
REN is not required for some types of analog or digital
facilities.
Means of Connection
Connection of this equipment to the telephone network
is shown in the following table.
Manufacturer’s FIC Code
Port Identifier
SOC/REN/
A.S. Code
Network
Jacks
Off/On premises OL13C
station
9.0F
RJ2GX,
RJ21X,
RJ11C
DID trunk
02RV2-T
0.0B
CO trunk
02GS2
0.3A
RJ21X
CO trunk
02LS2
0.3A
RJ21X
Tie trunk
TL31M
9.0F
RJ2GX
Basic Rate
Interface
02IS5
6.0F, 6.0Y
RJ49C
1.544 digital
interface
04DU9-BN,
1KN, 1SN
6.0F
RJ48C,
RJ48M
120A2 channel 04DU9-DN
service unit
6.0Y
RJ48C
RJ2GX,
RJ21X
If the terminal equipment (DEFINITY® System) causes
harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance
of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the
customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you
believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its
facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this
happens, the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make necessary modifications
to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair
or warranty information, please contact the Technical
Service Center at 1-800-242-2121 or contact your local
Lucent representative. If the equipment is causing harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company may
request that you disconnect the equipment until the
problem is resolved.
It is recommended that repairs be performed by Lucent
Technologies certified technicians.
The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone
service provided by the telephone company. Connection
to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the
state public utility commission, public service
commission or corporation commission for information.
This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is
hearing aid compatible.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for
radio noise emission set out in the radio interference
regulation of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
Le Présent Appareil Nomérique n’émet pas de bruits
radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux
appareils manicures de la class A préscrites dans le
reglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le
ministére des Communications du Canada.
European Union Declaration of Conformity
Lucent Technologies Business Communications
Systems declares that the DEFINITY equipment
specified in this book bearing the “CE” (Conformité
Europeénne) mark conforms to the European Union
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives. The CE mark
indicates conformance to the European Union
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (89/336/EEC)
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), Telecommunication
Terminal Equipment (TTE) Directive (91/263/EEC). The
CE mark indicates conformance to i-CTR3 Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and i-CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
as applicable, and with CTR12. The CE mark is applied
to the following products:
Global AC-powered multicarrier cabinet (MCC) with 20
Hz, 25 Hz and 50 Hz ring generator
DC-powered multicarrier cabinet (MCC) with 20 Hz, 25
Hz and 50 Hz ring generator
AC-powered single-carrier cabinet (SCC) with 20 Hz, 25
Hz and 50 Hz ring generator
AC-powered compact single-carrier cabinet (CSCC)
with 20 Hz and 25 Hz ring generator
AC-powered compact modular cabinet (CMC) with 20
Hz, 25 Hz and 50 Hz ring generator
Enhanced DC-power system
ETS standards referenced by iCTR3 and CTR4
iCTR3
iCTR4
CTR3
L1:
ETS300012
ETS300011
ETS300012 ETS300011
CTR4
L2:
ETS300153
ETS300156 ETS300125 ETS300125
L3:
ETS300104
ETS300104 ETS300102 ETS300102
Safety: ETS300047
ETS300046 ETS300047 ETS300046
LASER Product
The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER
device if single-mode fiber-optic cable is connected to a
remote expansion port network (EPN). The LASER
device operates within the following parameters:
Maximum power output: –5 dBm
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Mode field diameter: 8.8 microns
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
IEC 825 1993
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for
more laser product information.
How to order more copies
Call:
Lucent Technologies Publications Center
US Voice +1 888 582 3688
US FAX
+1 800 566 9568
Canada Voice +317 322 6619
Europe, Middle East, Africa +317 322 6416
Asia, China, Pacific Region, Caribbean,
Latin America Voice +317 322 6411
Non-US Fax 1 317 322 6699
Write: Lucent Technologies Publications Center
2855 N. Franklin Road, Indianapolius, IN 46219
USA
Order: Document No. 555-233-200
Comcode 108678673, Issue 1, April 2000
We can place you on a standing order list so that you will
automatically receive updated versions of this book. For
more informaiton on standing orders, or to be put on a
list to receive future issues of this book, please contact
the Lucent Technologies Publications Center.
Comments
To comment on this book, return the card at the front of
the book.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Contents
v
Contents
Contents
v
About This Book
ix
■
Purpose
ix
■
Intended Audience
ix
■
Standards Compliance
ix
■
Systems Supported
x
1 — Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
1
■
The ProductName
1
■
System Components
3
■
System Configurations
6
■
Architecture
11
■
DEFINITY ECS Hardware
11
■
Comparing System Versions
16
■
Integrating Adjunct, Peripheral, and
Third-Party Products
16
■
Duplication
18
■
Administration
19
■
Connecting with TCP/IP Networks
19
■
Connecting with ATM Port Networks
(Category A only)
20
■
IP Solutions (Category A only)
22
■
International Requirements
26
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Contents
vi
2 — Site Requirements
27
■
Floor Area
27
■
Floor Load Requirements
30
■
Floor-Plan Guidelines
31
■
Environmental Considerations
41
■
Cabinet Power Requirements
47
■
Cabinet Cooling Fans
68
■
System Protection
69
3 — Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
73
■
Cabinets
73
■
Carriers in MCCs
79
■
Single-Carrier Cabinets
92
■
Carriers in SCCs
96
■
Minimum Cabinet Configurations
106
■
Direct Connect Cabinet Configurations
110
■
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
112
■
Cabling to On- and Off-Premises Systems
120
■
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
120
■
DEFINITY Adjuncts
183
4 — Technical Specifications
193
■
Representative Number of Lines/Trunks
193
■
Call Performance
194
■
Additional Hardware to Use Features
195
■
Allocation of Buttons
229
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Contents
vii
■
Cabling Distances
234
■
Initialization and Recovery
240
■
Call Progress Tones
240
A — Wireless Business Solutions
249
■
Overview
249
■
FreeWorks™ Wireless Telecommunications
249
B — System Capacity Limits
255
■
Overview
255
■
System Capacity Limits
255
C — National Type-Approval Labels
■
Overview
Index
291
291
293
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Contents
viii
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
About This Book
Purpose
ix
About This Book
Purpose
This book gives you the broad overview of the components of the DEFINITY® Enterprise
Communications Server (ECS) that you need when you are planning an installation,
ordering equipment, or learning about the system and its parts. It is not intended to
replace or modify instructions provided in other, task-specific documentation, such as
installation, administration, or maintenance documents.
This book is also used for the Prologix, DEFINITY BCS, and Guest Works products. It
contains references to Category A, which refers to ECS and Prologix, and Category B,
which refers to DEFINITY BCS, DEFINITY One, and Guest Works.
Intended Audience
This book is for customers, Lucent Technologies marketing and sales representatives,
field technicians, and educators who teach basic DEFINITY information to field
technicians and customers.
Standards Compliance
The equipment in this document complies with the following standards (as applicable):
■
ITU-T (Formerly CCITT)
■
ECMA
■
ETSI
■
IPNS
■
DPNSS
■
National ISDN-1
■
National ISDN-2
■
ISO-9000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
About This Book
Systems Supported
■
ANSI
■
FCC Part 15 and Part 68
■
EN55022
■
EN50081
■
EN50082
■
UNI 3.1
■
CISPR22
■
Australia AS3548 (AS/NZ3548)
■
Australia AS3260
■
IEC 825
■
IEC 950
■
UL 1459
■
UL 1950
■
CSA C222 Number 225
■
TS001
■
ILMI 3.1
Systems Supported
This book covers the system updates from R7 to R8.2. The primary interest of this book is
the R8 system. Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 7
System Description Pocket Reference and the DEFINITY Communications System
Generic 3 System Description and Specifications for previous versions.
x
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
The ProductName
1 —Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
This document provides a general overview of the DEFINITY ECS R8.2.
The ProductName
The DEFINITY ECS is a digital voice communications switch that processes and routes
telephone calls and data communications from one endpoint to another. See Figure 1.
1
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
The ProductName
Attendant
console
2
Multimedia
call center
DEFINITY Wireless
Business System
Voice terminal
Data terminal
Management
terminal
Voice terminal
with data module
Data
terminal
DEFINITY
Voice
messaging
system
Host
computer
Outside private
line data
transmission
equipment
Data
terminals
Analog
facilities
Figure 1.
AUDIX
Digital
facilities
cydfdgsw LJK 071497
The System as a Digital Switch
All endpoints are external to the system. The voice and data signals going to the
endpoints enter and leave the system through port circuits. The system makes
high-speed connections between analog and digital trunks, data lines connected to host
computers, data-entry terminals, personal computers (PCs), and IP network addresses.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Components
The system converts all incoming (external source) analog signals to internal digital
signals. Incoming (internal or external source) digital signals are not converted. Inside the
system, voice is always coded digitally. Outgoing digital signals from the system are
converted to analog signals for the analog lines and trunks.
System Components
The basic system component is the Port Network (PN), consisting of port circuits
connected to internal buses that allow the circuits to communicate with each other. See
Figure 2.
Processor Port Network (PPN)
The required Processor Port Network (PPN) contains the Switch Processing Element
(SPE). The SPE is a computer that operates the system, processes calls, and controls
the PN containing the port circuits.
Expansion Port Network
An Expansion Port Network (EPN) (optional) contains additional ports that increase the
number of connections to trunks and lines.
Center Stage Switch (CSS)
A Center Stage Switch (CSS) (optional for 3 PNs or less) in the DEFINITY ECS R8r is the
central interface between the PPN and the EPNs. The CSS consists of 1, 2, or 3 switch
nodes (SN). One SN can expand the system from 1 EPN to up to 15 EPNs. Two SNs can
expand the system to up to 29 EPNs. Three SNs can expand the system to up to 43
EPNs.
NOTE:
The number of EPNs that can be connected with 2 or 3 SNs may be less than the
numbers given, depending on the internal SN-to-SN traffic.
3
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Components
ATM Switch (Category A only)
The Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) switch is a replacement option for the CSS or
the direct-connect switch. Several Lucent ATM switch types can provide DEFINITY ECS
port network connectivity. Non-Lucent ATM switches that comply with the ATM standards
set by the European Union can also provide DEFINITY ECS port network connectivity.
Main System Configuration
Figure 2 shows the following 6 main system configurations:
1. Basic system consisting of a Processor Port Network (PPN) only.
2. Direct-connect system with 3 PNs (1 PPN and 1 or 2 EPNs) connected directly
together.
3. Center Stage Switch (CSS)-connected system with up to 15 EPNs interconnected
by 1 SN to the PPN.
4. CSS-connected system with up to 29 EPNs connected by 2 SNs to the PPN, and
up to 43 EPNs connected by 3 SNs to the PPN.
5. ATM switch-connected system with up to 43 EPNs.
6. Multiple ATM switches over a wide area with up to 43 EPNs.
4
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Components
5
1
PPN
2
To terminals
or trunks
PPN
Basic system
EPN
EPN
Directly-connected system
(PPN and up to 2 EPNs)
3
4
PPN
PPN
CSS
CSS
EPN
SN
SN
SN
EPN
EPN
EPNs
EPNs
EPNs
CSS-connected system
(PPN, CSS, and up to 15 EPNs)
CSS-connected system
(PPN, CSS, and up to 43 EPNs)
5
6
PPN
PPN
ATM Switch
ATM Switch
EPNs
EPNs
(up to 43)
ATM-connected system
(PPN, ATM, and up to
43 EPNs)
fcdfmsc2 LJK 022200
Figure 2.
ATM Switch
ATM Switch
EPNs
EPNs
ATM-connected system
(PPN, multiple ATMs, and up to
43 EPNs)
Main System Configurations
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Configurations
6
System Configurations
Figure 3 shows a direct-connect system with an SPE in the PPN. Buses route voice and
data calls between external trunks and lines.
PPN
SPE
Processor bus
Processor
Network Control/
Packet Interface
Memory
Packet
bus
Terminal
TDM
bus
Ports
External trunks,
lines, and IP
addresses
Ports
Expansion I/O
Expansion I/O
Fiber optic cable
EPN
Expansion I/O
EPN
Expansion I/O
Expansion I/O
Packet
bus
TDM bus
Figure 3.
Packet
bus
TDM bus
Maintenance
Ports
Terminal
External
trunks, lines,
and IP
addresses
cydfcss3 LJK 022299
Expansion I/O
Maintenance
Terminal
Ports
External
External
trunks, lines, trunks, lines,
and IP
and IP
addresses addresses
Components of a Direct-Connect System
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Configurations
7
Figure 4 shows a system with the added CSS to route voice and data calls between
external trunks and lines.
PPN
SPE
Processor bus
Processor
Memory
I/O
I/O
Packet
bus
Terminal
TDM
bus
Ports
Ports
External
trunks
and lines
Expansion I/O
Fiber optic cable
EPN
EPN
CSS
EPN
EPN
T1 or E1
Typical
EPN
Expansion I/O
Packet bus
(Port network)
TDM bus
Maintenance
Ports
Ports
cydfcnf1 RPY 020998
Terminal
Figure 4.
External trunks and lines
Components of a CSS-Connected System
NOTE:
The components of an ATM-connected system are similar to those shown
in Figure 4. However, in an ATM-connected system, the CSS is replaced
with an ATM switch or switches and each Expansion I/O is replaced with a
TN2305 or TN2306 circuit pack.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Configurations
Switch Processing Element (SPE)
When a device, such as a telephone, goes off-hook or signals call initiation, the SPE
receives a signal from the port circuit connected to the device. The digits of the called
number are collected and the switch is set up to make a connection between the calling
and called devices.
The SPE consists of the following control circuits connected by a processor bus:
■
Processor: All R8 systems use a Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC)
processor. The TN790 processor circuit pack is used in R8si systems. The TN798
is used in R8csi systems. The UN332C is used in R8r systems.
■
Memory: R8csi and R8si systems use 16 Mbytes of flash Read Only Memory
(ROM) and 16 Mbytes of Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) resident on
the processor circuit pack. R8r systems require 3 TN1650B memory circuit packs
to provide a total of 96 Mbytes of DRAM.
■
Storage: In all R8 systems except R8r, translations are stored in nonvolatile
memory on a PCMCIA memory card. In R8r systems, the disk drive is a nonvolatile
system bootstrap and translation storage device. A R8r system can use an optic
drive as backup storage.
■
Input/output (I/O) circuits: These act as interfaces between the SPE and the time
division multiplexing bus and packet bus.
■
Maintenance interface: connects the system to an administration terminal and
monitors power failure, clock signals and temperature sensors.
Port Network (PN)
The Port Network (PN) consists of the following components:
■
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) bus: Has 484 time slots, 23 B channels and 1 D
channel available per bus. Runs internally throughout each PN and terminates on
each end. Consists of two 8-bit parallel buses: bus A and bus B. These buses carry
switched digitized voice and data signals and control signals among all port circuits
and between port circuits and the SPE. The port circuits place digitized voice and
data signals on a TDM bus. Bus A and bus B are normally active simultaneously.
8
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Configurations
■
Packet bus: Runs internally throughout each PN and terminates on each end. It is
an 18-bit parallel bus that carries logical links and control messages from the SPE,
through port circuits, to endpoints such as terminals and adjuncts.
The packet bus carries logical links for both on-switch and off-switch control
between some specific port circuits in the system; for example, D-channels, X.25,
and remote management terminals. Typically, the csi model does not support the
packet bus. Any MAPD or ISDN application rides the TDM bus. However, in R7
and later csi systems with C-LAN, the applications use the packet bus provided by
the C-LAN board.
■
Port circuits: form analog/digital interfaces between the PN and external trunks and
devices providing links between these devices and the TDM bus and packet bus.
Incoming analog signals are converted to pulse-code modulated (PCM) digital
signals and placed on the TDM bus by port circuits. Port circuits convert outgoing
signals from PCM to analog for external analog devices. All port circuits connect to
the TDM bus. Only specific ports connect to the packet bus.
■
Interface circuits: Located in the PPN and in each EPN. These are types of port
circuits that terminate fiber optic cables connecting TDM buses and the packet bus
from the PPN cabinet to the TDM buses and packet bus of each EPN cabinet. The
fiber-optic cable also connects the CSS to the PPN and the EPNs. These interface
and cabling terminations provide a transmission path between the port circuits in
different PNs.
In ATM-PNC, the ATM Interface connects each PN to the ATM switch. An
Expansion Interface (EI) circuit pack also terminates each end of a cable
connecting the PPN to an EPN, each end of a cable connecting an EPN to another
EPN, and the PN end of a cable connected between a PN carrier and an SN
carrier.
A Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit pack terminates the SN carrier end of a cable
connected between an SN carrier and a PN.
■
DS1 converter: Converts from a fiber interface to a DS1 interface between PNs for
DS1 remoting.
■
Service circuits: Connect to an external terminal to monitor, maintain, and
troubleshoot the system. Also provide tone production and detection as well as call
classification, modem pooling, recorded announcements, and speech synthesis.
9
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
System Configurations
Issue 1
April 2000
10
Center Stage Switch (CSS)
Figure 5 shows the CSS linking the PPN to EPNs by the SNI circuit packs in a SN carrier.
A SN reduces the amount of interconnect cabling between the PPN and the EPNs by
acting as a hub to distribute cabling.
A system using a CSS can connect from 3 to 43 PNs. The CSS can consist of up to 3 SN
carriers. The CSS can also consist of 2, 4, or 6 SN carriers (duplicated SNs) in a
critical-reliability system.
Each SN contains from 1 to 16 SNI circuit packs. Each interface can connect to a PN or
another SN using fiber-optic cable. One interface always connects to the PPN and 1
connects to each EPN.
PPN
Switch Node
(1 to 16 SNIs)
SNI
SNI
SNI
SNI
SNI
EPN
EPN
EPN
EPN
cent_ppn_0 RBP 070296
Figure 5.
CSS with Switch Nodes (SNs)
In a high reliability system (with duplicated processor), 2 SNI circuit packs connect to the
PPN, allowing up to 15 PNs to connect to 1 SN, up to 20 PNs to connect to 2 SNs, and up
to 25 PNs to connect to 3 SNs, depending on the exact configuration chosen.
ATM Port Network Connectivity
(Category A only)
Several Lucent ATM switch types can provide port network connectivity for a DEFINITY
ECS. Non-Lucent ATM switches that comply with the ATM standards set by the ITU can
also provide DEFINITY ECS port network connectivity. In this configuration, TN2305
multi-mode or TN2306 single-mode ATM circuit packs are installed on the port networks
and connected to the ATM switch with the multi- or single-mode fiber specified for the
ATM switch.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Architecture
11
Architecture
The system consists of 2 main components:
■
The Oryx/Pecos real-time, multiprocessing operating system. Oryx/Pecos supports
the SPE.
■
Applications layer, consisting of 3 major subsystems:
—
Call processing: starts up and completes calls and manages voice and data in
the system.
—
Maintenance: detects faults, recovers operations, and performs tests in the
system.
—
System management: controls the internal processes necessary to install,
administer, and maintain the system.
Logical interconnection between system components refers to the 2 kinds of logical links
into the SPE:
■
System links for internal system control
■
Application links used by external applications such as adjuncts
DEFINITY ECS Hardware
DEFINITY ECS hardware is covered in detail later in this volume. The following provides
only a general overview of type of equipment used in DEFINITY ECS implementations.
Carriers
Carriers hold circuit packs and connect them to power, the TDM bus, and the packet bus.
There are 5 types:
■
Control carrier (PPN cabinet only)
■
Optional Duplicated Control Carrier (PPN cabinet only)
■
Optional port carrier (PPN and/or EPN cabinets)
■
Optional expansion control carrier (EPN cabinets only)
■
Optional Switch Node Carrier (PPN and/or EPN cabinets)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
DEFINITY ECS Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
12
Cabinets
The system cabinets house the carriers and all other components, including the power
supply. A cabinet contains at least 1 carrier in an enclosed shelf with vertical slots to hold
circuit packs. The circuit packs fit into connectors that attach to the rear of the slots.
There are 3 cabinet types:
Compact Modular Cabinets (csi)
The Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC) is only used as a PPN and is available as standard
reliability only (no duplication). It mounts on a wall (preferred) or sits on the floor (with a
floor panel). See Figure 6, ‘‘Compact Modular Cabinet, Floor Mount (Top) and Wall Mount
(Bottom)’’ on page 13.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
DEFINITY ECS Hardware
13
scdfflor KLC 061397
scdfovri KLC 061397
Figure 6.
Compact Modular Cabinet, Floor Mount (Top) and Wall Mount (Bottom)
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
DEFINITY ECS Hardware
14
The CMC carrier contains universal port slots. The processor circuit pack resides in slot 1
and the tone-clock circuit pack resides in slot 2 of the A cabinet. The AUX connector on
the side of the carrier provides power for 1 attendant console and 1 emergency transfer
panel.
Single-Carrier Cabinets (si, r)
Up to 4 Single-Carrier Cabinets (SCC) can be stacked to form a single PN. DEFINITY
ECS si supports a stack of up to 3 cabinets. See Figure 7, "Typical Single-Carrier
Cabinet".
Single-Carrier Cabinets come in any of 4 configurations:
■
A basic control cabinet that contains a TN790B processor, tone clock, and a power
converter (si model only)
■
An expansion control cabinet that contains additional port circuit packs, interfaces
to the PPN, a maintenance interface and a power converter
■
A duplicated control cabinet that contains the same equipment as the basic control
cabinet (an SCC cannot be used for duplication on an r model)
■
A port cabinet that contains port circuit packs and a power converter
Power
converter
Air circulation
vents
Circuit packs
scdf001 KLC 060597
Figure 7.
Typical Single-Carrier Cabinet
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
DEFINITY ECS Hardware
15
Multi-Carrier Cabinets (si, r)
A Multi-Carrier Cabinet (MCC) is a 70 in. (178 cm) cabinet that has up to 5 carriers (see
Figure 8, "Typical Multi-Carrier Cabinet"). The 3 types of Multi-Carrier Cabinets are as
follows:
■
PPN cabinet contains the ports, SPE, an interface to an EPN cabinet, and/or a
CSS.
■
EPN cabinet contains additional ports, interfaces to the PPN and other EPN
cabinets, the maintenance interface, and optional interfaces to other EPN cabinets
and/or a switch node (in an SN in a CSS-connected system).
■
Auxiliary cabinet contains equipment used for optional, system-related hardware,
such as rack-mount equipment.
Figure 8.
Typical Multi-Carrier Cabinet
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Comparing System Versions
16
Comparing System Versions
To compare the differences between the system version and the carrier version, see
Table 1 and Table 2.
Table 1. System Versions
System
PPN
Maximum EPNs
Connection Method
Release 8csi
1
0
Does not apply
Release 8si
1
2
Direct (fiber only)
Release 8r
1
43
Direct, CSS or ATM
Table 2.
Carriers
Carrier Type
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Basic control
PPN
PPN
PPN
Duplicated control
Does not apply
PPN
PPN
Port
PPN
PPN and EPN
PPN and EPN
Expansion control
Does not apply
EPN
EPN
Continued on next page
Integrating Adjunct, Peripheral, and
Third-Party Products
The ProductName can work with a wide range of external equipment, applications, and
peripherals. It provides extensive support for third-party equipment and applications,
such as external ringing equipment and music-on-hold systems. The CallVisor
Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (Category A only) gives independent application
developers access to DEFINITY ECS features and routing information from within their
own applications.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Integrating Adjunct, Peripheral, and Third-Party Products
17
Supported Terminals
■
300-series attendant consoles (301A, 302A, 302B, 302C)
■
500-, 2500-, 6200-, 7100-, 8100-, 9100-series analog voice terminals (some 7100
series sets may not be available)
■
602/603/606 CallMaster sets. The 603 and 606 terminals display the full 8-bit
OPTREX character set of graphical characters, including Eurofonts, and the
Japanese katakana character alphabet. (some 602 and 603 CallMaster sets may
not be available)
■
The 6400-series 2-wire DCP voice terminals connect to a digital line circuit pack
and allow the use of both I-Channels for voice. The number of displayed characters
is 27 for calls involving a single ID. If more than one party’s ID displays, the ID
truncates to 15 characters.
These terminals also display the full 8-bit OPTREX character set of graphical
characters, including Eurofonts, and the Japanese katakana character alphabet.
■
7300-series hybrid (some sets may not be available)
■
7400-series DCP voice terminal (some sets may not available)
■
The 8400-series DCP voice terminal connects to a digital line circuit pack and uses
one I-channel for voice (the 8411 uses both I-channels). The number of displayed
characters for calls involving a single ID is 27. If more than one party’s ID displays,
the ID truncates to 15 characters.
This terminal also displays the full 8-bit OPTREX character set of graphical
characters, including Eurofonts, and the Japanese katakana character alphabet.
■
The 7500 series and 8500-series ISDN-BRI sets extend the existing ISDN-BRI to
allow connection of terminals designed to a variety of BRI specifications.
■
9000-series cordless sets (TransTalk 9000)
■
The 9400-series DCP terminals 9403B, 9410D, and 9434D display the full 8-bit
OPTREX character set of graphical characters, including Eurofonts, and the
Japanese katakana character alphabet. The number of non-United States
displayed characters is 27 for calls involving a single ID. If more than one party’s ID
displays, the ID truncates to 15 characters.
■
9601 DEFINITY Wireless Business System terminal
NOTE:
Other terminals are available. Contact your Lucent Technologies representative
for more information.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Duplication
18
IP SoftPhones
IP SoftPhones extend the level of DEFINITY services. They turn a PC or a laptop into an
advanced telephone. You can place calls, take calls and handle multiple calls on your PC.
There are 4 types of telephones available. They are:
Telecommuter application -- a multifunction station that runs on a PC plus a
conventional telephone. Call control is done on the SoftPhone and the voice path
is on the DCP set. This IP SoftPhone is intended to be used by home workers who
require PSTN quality audio. The MedPro board is not used in this application.
Road-warrior application -- a multifunction station that is based entirely on the PC.
It is used when there is only a single telephone line available to access the IP
network and the DEFINITY. This IP SoftPhone is intended to use by your traveling
associates. The MedPro board is used for the road-warrior application.
CentreVu IP Agent -- This SoftPhone is the telecommuter application that has been
configured to use the CentreVu IP Agent user interface software. It is used as a
Call Center agent station.
Native H.323 -- This is an IP-connected SoftPhone running off-the-shelf H.323
software. It operates as a single-line phone with limited features, which are
activated by Feature Access Codes.
Duplication
Duplication is a strategy to create fully redundant systems. Duplication minimizes single
failure points that can interrupt call processing. Three system duplication options are
available:
■
Standard reliability--this is the only reliability configuration option available for
DEFINITY ECS csi model. Will not duplicate Tone-Clock(s), the Control Carrier or
any inter-PN connectivity.
■
High reliability--duplicates the hardware that is associated with the SPE. The
Control Carrier is duplicated, which provides duplicate SPEs and Tone-Clocks.
Inter-PN connectivity and EPN Tone-Clocks are not duplicated. The strategy is to
duplicate items that are associated with the SPE so that a single fault will not cause
the loss of the SPE. High reliability is available with DEFINITY si and r models.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Administration
19
■
Critical reliability--is available with DEFINITY si and r models and requires the full
duplication of the SPE, inter-PN connectivity and the Tone-Clocks (Category A
only).
■
ATM Network Duplication--requires full duplication of the inter-PN connectivity and
the Tone-Clocks (Category A only).
As duplication increases, the maximum number of port carriers and port circuit packs per
cabinet decreases. The information regarding the needed hardware can be found in
Chapter 3.
Administration
A management terminal connects to the system for administrative purposes. Enter
commands at the terminal to display administration screens (forms). The forms list data
and allow you to add, change, and remove system and voice-terminal features. For
system administration information, consult the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications
Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide.
Connecting with TCP/IP Networks
LAN Gateway
With the optional J58890MA-1List 2 LAN Gateway circuit-pack assembly installed,
DEFINITY ECS works with PC/LAN-based communications applications that support the
CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI) (Category A only).
C-LAN
TCP/IP Connectivity is provided over Ethernet or Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to
adjuncts such as CMS Call Center and INTUITY AUDIX and for DCS connectivity. The
C-LAN circuit pack (TN799) provides a "bridge" from the TDM bus to the packet bus on
DEFINITY ECS csi.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Connecting with ATM Port Networks (Category A only)
Issue 1
April 2000
20
Network Control/Packet Interface
Communicates control channel messages between the processor circuit pack and the
distributed network of port circuit packs on the TDM bus. The NetPkt circuit pack (TN794)
provides 8 asynchronous data channels that process and route information directly from
the processor circuit pack to customer-connected equipment.
PassageWay Integrated
Voice/Data-Workstation Applications
PassageWay applications make the features of the DEFINITY ECS telephone system
available from the Windows desktop. With PassageWay and the DEFINITY LAN gateway
implemented, a Call Center application could, for instance, let Agents access all
job-related resources—the order-processing database, company World Wide Web site,
phone system, voicemail system, and fax machine—from a single interface on the PC.
Connecting with ATM Port Networks
(Category A only)
ATM-PNC (Category A only)
ATM Port Network Connectivity (ATM-PNC) provides an alternative to either the direct
connect or Center Stage Switch configurations for connecting the Processor Port
Network (PPN) to one or more Expansion Port Networks (EPNs). ATM-PNC replaces the
Center Stage Switch in a DEFINITY R8r network with an Asynchronous Transfer Mode
(ATM) switch. ATM-PNC is available with all three DEFINITY ECS reliability options—
standard, high, and critical.
ATM-PNC integrates delivery of voice, video, and data via ATM over a common large
bandwidth LAN, providing reduced infrastructure cost and improved network
manageability. ATM-PNC uses standards-based open interfaces that can be provisioned
with either new or existing DEFINITY ECS systems and is ATM-ready for future
expansion.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
Connecting with ATM Port Networks (Category A only)
21
ATM-CES (Category A only)
ATM-CES (Circuit-Emulation Service) lets the DEFINITY ECS emulate an ISDN-PRI
trunk on an ATM facility. These virtual trunks can serve as integrated access, tandem, or
tie trunks. ATM-CES trunk emulation maximizes port network capacities by consolidating
trunking. For example, the CES interface can define up to ten virtual circuits for tie-line
connectivity, consolidating onto one circuit card network connectivity that usually requires
multiple circuit packs.
ATM WAN (Category A only)
ATM Wide Area Network (ATM WAN) extends the Port Network Connectivity (PNC)
beyond a single ATM switch. This allows you to use either a private ATM network, public
WAN, or a combination of both. Several networked ATM devices can be used as
effectively as a single ATM switch for inter-port network connectivity. ATM WAN is
supported by the "Multiple Location" feature, where port network cabinets can be
administered as separate locations; however, it is not required. You can use multiple ATM
switches without multiple locations administered.
EPN
PNC
ATM
backbone
switch
ATM
Enterprise
switch
PNC
CES
Wide
area ATM
network
ATM
Enterprise
switch
PPN
CES
PPN
Network management
platform
cydfatm2 KLC 102299
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
IP Solutions (Category A only)
22
IP Solutions (Category A only)
DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions brings together the flexibility of IP networks with the richness
of voice communication. It allows investment protection and optimization in IP, ATM, and
PSTN networks. Full applications, features, and management capabilities are carried into
the IP environment. Remote workers have full access to communication system features
from their PCs. Figure 1 shows the trunk and line connections available with IP Solutions.
NOTE:
Voice quality can and will vary based on LAN conditions, which are extraneous to
IP Solutions.
DEFINITY R8
Telecommuter application
TN802B
MedPro
Mode
Voice Terminal
PSTN
DEFINITY IP Softphone
or CentreVu IP Agent
DEFINITY R8
H.323
Trunk
TN802B
MedPro
Mode
DS1
C-LAN
LAN/WAN
TN802B
IP Trunk
Mode
DEFINITY R7
IP Trunk
LAN/WAN
C-LAN
TN802B
MedPro
Mode
C-LAN
TN802B
IP Trunk
Mode
DEFINITY IP Softphone
with H.323 voice application
cydfipsl EWS 022800
Figure 9.
IP Solutions
Road-warrior application
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
IP Solutions (Category A only)
23
As shown in Figure 1, DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions supports IP connectivity for two types
of trunks and three types of IP Softphones.
DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions is implemented using the TN802/TN802B IP Interface
assembly, which is a Windows NT server that resides on the IP-Interface circuit pack
inside the DEFINITY ECS. The TN802B IP Interface, introduced in Release 8, operates in
either the IP Trunk mode (for IP trunk connections) or in the MedPro mode (for H.323
trunk connections and H.323 voice processing for IP softphones). The TN802
IP-Interface, introduced in Release 7, operates only in the IP Trunk mode. The TN802B
defaults to IP Trunk mode and is backward compatible with Release 7. The MedPro
mode requires the new TN799B C-LAN circuit pack.
With Release 7 software, or with Release 8 software configured as Release 7 (that is, R8
used as a bugfix for R7), the TN802B can be used only in the IP Trunk mode. With
Release 8 software, the TN802B can be used in either mode but each TN802B can
operate in just one of the two modes at a time; that is, all trunks supported by the same
TN802B must all be operating in the same mode. DEFINITY ECS supports multiple
TN802Bs operating in a mixture of the two modes or a combination of TN802s (operating
in the IP Trunk mode) and TN802Bs (operating in either mode).
The IP Trunk and MedPro modes are not interoperable; that is, the TN802B in MedPro
mode cannot communicate with another TN802B in IP Trunk mode or with a TN802.
Trunks
DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions supports two trunk configurations:
■
H.323 Trunk
■
IP Trunk
H.323 Trunk
MedPro mode supports the H.323 version 2 protocol and interoperates with H.323
version 2 endpoints, including stations, trunks, and gateways. The TN802B IP Interface in
Medpro mode enables H.323 trunk service using IP connectivity between two DEFINITY
ECS systems. H.323 trunk groups can be configured as DEFINITY-specific tie trunks
supporting ISDN trunk features such as DCS+ and QSIG, or as generic tie trunks
permitting interconnection with other vendors’ H.323 v2-compliant switches, or as
direct-inward-dial (DID) type of “public” trunks providing access to the switch for
unregistered users. TheTN802B in MedPro mode requires the TN799B for signaling.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
IP Solutions (Category A only)
24
IP Trunk
In Release 8, the IP Trunk mode will typically be chosen for interoperability with existing
TN802 (as opposed to the TN802B) IP Interface circuit packs.
The IP Trunk mode allows trunk groups to be defined as DS1 tie lines between DEFINITY
ECS systems over a virtual private network (VPN). Each IP Interface circuit pack in IP
Trunk mode provides a basic twelve-port package that can be expanded up to a total of
30 ports.
The benefits of IP Trunk include a reduction in long distance voice and fax expenses,
facilitating global communications, providing a full-function network with data and voice
convergence and optimizing networks by using the available network resources.
Each TN802 or TN802B in IP Trunk mode requires a connection to a modem and an
incoming line for Lucent remote access. The TN802 (but not the TN802B in IP Trunk
mode) also requires direct access to the NT server on the TN802 hard disk using
pcANYWHERE, version 8 or later. A TN802B in the IP Trunk mode does not require the
TN799B.
IP Softphones
DEFINITY IP Softphones operate on a PC equipped with Microsoft Windows 95/98/NT
and with TCP/IP connectivity to DEFINITY ECS.
DEFINITY IP Solutions supports three IP Softphone configurations:
■
Road-warrior application (voice over IP)
■
Telecommuter application (dual-connection)
■
CentreVu IP Agent (dual-connection)
■
Native H.323
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
IP Solutions (Category A only)
25
Road-warrior application
The road-warrior application of the DEFINITY IP Softphone enables travellers to use the
full DEFINITY ECS feature set from temporary remote locations anywhere in the world
such as a hotel room. The road-warrior application consists of two software applications
running on a PC that is connected to DEFINITY ECS over an IP network. The single
network connection between the PC and DEFINITY ECS carries two channels, one for
the signaling path and one for the voice path. DEFINITY IP Softphone software handles
the call signaling and an H.323 V2-compliant audio application, such as Microsoft
NetMeeting, handles the voice communications. The user places and receives calls via
the IP Softphone interface on the PC and uses a headset connected to the PC (or the
PC’s microphone and speakers) to speak and listen.
With the road-warrior application, NetMeeting has been configured to run in the
background and use only the audio portion of the applications. The data collaboration
feature of NetMeeting can be used as a stand-alone application but it is disabled during
an IP Softphone session.
On DEFINITY ECS, the road-warrior application of the IP Softphone requires the TN799B
(C-LAN) for signaling and the TN802B IP Interface circuit pack assembly running in
MedPro mode for voice processing. Each VOIP Softphone requires the administration of
two stations — an H.323 station and one of the types of DCP station.
Telecommuter application
The telecommuter application of the DEFINITY IP Softphone enables telecommuters to
use the full DEFINITY ECS feature set from home. It consists of a PC and a telephone
with separate connections to DEFINITY ECS. The PC is connected to DEFINITY ECS
over an IP network to provide the signaling path. The PC runs the DEFINITY IP
Softphone software to provide the user interface for call control. A standard telephone is
connected to DEFINITY ECS over the public switched telephone network (PSTN) to
provide a high-quality voice path. The user places and receives calls via the IP Softphone
interface on the PC and uses the telephone handset to speak and listen.
On DEFINITY ECS, the telecommuter application of the IP Softphone requires the
TN799B (C-LAN) for signaling. The TN802B IP Interface is not used for the telecommuter
application. Each instance of the telecommuter application requires the administration of
two stations — an IP Softphone station and one of the types of DCP station.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview of DEFINITY ECS R8
International Requirements
26
CentreVu IP Agent
The DEFINITY CentreVu IP Agent is a variation of the telecommuter application. The
CentreVu IP Agent emulates a Lucent CallMaster set and provides use of the call end
capabilities required for Call Center operations from a remote location, such as the
agent’s home.
Native H.323
This is an IP-connected softphone running off-the-shelf H.323 software. It operates as a
single-line phone with limited features, which are activated by Feature Access Codes.
International Requirements
The DEFINITY system complies with the regulations of many countries and supports a
wide range of languages, including user-defined languages. These are a few examples of
the country-specific features that are available:
■
Terminal-display language
■
Tone plans and customizable tones (within selected tone plan)
■
Transmission, conference-loss, and tone-loss plans
■
Ringing
■
12- or 16-kHz periodic pulse metering (PPM)
■
A-Law or µ-Law companding
■
ISDN and non-ISDN, bit-oriented digital protocols
■
Analog, line and trunk port impedances
■
Gain and loss characteristics
■
1.544-Mbps T1 and CEPT 2.048-Mbps E1 protocols
■
DS1 port administration (DS1 framing, signaling, line coding, and companding on
CEPT trunks).
The switch has many other non-USA features.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor Area
27
2 —Site Requirements
This section describes the wall and floor area, and loading specifications for various
DEFINITY ECS cabinets.
Floor Area
For maintenance access, floor plans typically allocate space around the front, ends, and
rear of the cabinets. Floor area requirements vary between cabinets. Dimensions and
clearances for all cabinet configurations are listed in Table 3.
Table 3.
Cabinet Dimensions and Clearances
Cabinet Type
Height
Width
Depth
Clearance
Compact Modular
1-cabinet
25.5 in.
(64.8 cm)
24.5 in.
(62.2 cm)
12 in.
(30.5cm)
51 in.
(129.6 cm)
24.5 in.
(62.2 cm)
12 in.
(30.5 cm)
76.5 in.
(194.4 cm)
24.5 in.
(62.2 cm)
12 in.
(30.5 cm)
Left, Right, and
Front 12 in.
(30.5 cm)
2-cabinets
3-cabinets
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Floor Area
Table 3.
28
Cabinet Dimensions and Clearances — Continued
Cabinet Type
Height
Width
Depth
Clearance
20 in.
(51 cm)
27 in.
(69 cm)
22 in.
(56 cm)
38 in. (97 cm)
between cabinet
and wall
2-cabinets
39 in.
(99 cm)
27 in.
(69 cm)
22 in.
(56 cm)
3-cabinets
58 in.
(1.5 m)
27 in.
(69 cm)
22 in.
(56 cm)
4-cabinets
77 in.
(2 m)
27 in.
(69 cm)
22 in.
(56 cm)
Multi-Carrier1
70 in.
(1.8 m)
32 in.
(81 cm)
28 in.
(71 cm)
Cable slack manager2 7 in.
(18 cm)
32 in.
(81 cm)
38 in.
(97 cm)
DC power cabinet3
27 in.
(69 cm)
22 in.
(56 cm)
Single-Carrier
1-cabinet
20 in.
(51 cm)
Rear 38 in.
(97 cm)
Front 36 in.
(91 cm)
38 in. (97 cm)
Front and Rear
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Floor Area
Table 3.
29
Cabinet Dimensions and Clearances — Continued
Cabinet Type
Height
Width
Depth
Large battery cabinet
100 Amp
Clearance
38 in. (97 cm)
Front and Rear
27 in.
(69 cm)
55 in.
(140 cm)
21 in.
(53 cm)
42 in.
(107 cm)
55 in.
(140 cm)
21 in.
(53 cm)
42 in.
(107 cm)
55 in.
(140 cm)
21 in.
(53 cm)
57 in.
(145 cm)
55 in.
(140 cm)
21 in.
(53 cm)
200 Amp
300 Amp
400 Amp
Continued on next page
1.
Includes the auxiliary cabinet, the global AC cabinet, and the global DC cabinet.
2.
Used with Multi-Carrier and Single-Carrier cabinets.
3.
Requires a floor area of 8 square feet (0.74 square m). Also requires 38 in. (97 cm)
between cabinet and wall.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor Load Requirements
30
Floor Load Requirements
The equipment room floor must meet the commercial floor loading code of at least 50 lbs.
per square foot (242 kg per square meter). Floor plans typically allocate space around the
front, ends, and rear (if necessary) of the cabinets, for maintenance access. Additional
equipment room floor support may be required if the floor load is greater than 50 lbs. per
square foot (242 kg per square meter). See the table below.
Table 4.
Cabinet Weights and Floor Loadings
Type
Weight
Compact
Modular
50 lb. (22.7 kg)
Floor Loading
Remarks
Single-Carrier
125 lb. (56 kg)
Multi-Carrier
200-800 lb. (90-363 kg) 130 lb./sq. ft. (624.2 kg/m2) Includes
Auxiliary, Global
AC and Global
DC cabinets
100-Amp
battery
400 lb. (181 kg) max.
180 lb./sq. ft. (871.2 kg/m2)
200-Amp
battery
815lb. (370 kg) max.
328 lb./sq. ft. (1587.5
kg/m2)
300-Amp
battery
1480 lb. (671 kg) max.
476 lb./sq. ft. (2303.8
kg/m2)
400-Amp
battery
1580 lb. (717 kg) max.
625 lb./sq. ft. (3025 kg/m2)
Typically wall
mounted—one
cabinet can be
floor-mounted.
31 lb./sq. ft. (148.9 kg/m2)
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
31
Floor-Plan Guidelines
DEFINITY ECS floor plans vary with the size and shape of the equipment room and the
extent of future growth. Future growth includes a new or upgraded system, adjuncts and
peripherals, and the cross-connect field. See ‘‘Cross-Connect Field’’ on page 41.
For floor standing cabinets, reserve the area behind a cabinet for the cross-connect field
and the cable slack manager. For wall mounted cabinets, reserve the area beside the
cabinets for the cross-connect field. Figure 10 through Figure 15 show typical floor plans.
All dimensions are shown in inches. Refer to Table 11 for power requirements.
Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC)
Configuration Guidelines
The cross-connect field is either to the rear or right of the cabinet. To allow service
access, the table for the management terminal and optional printer is away from the
equipment area. See Figure 10 and ‘‘Table Area’’ on page 40 for requirements. In an
installation where no cross-connect field is present, an cross-connect field can be
installed in the CMC right panel.
The following steps are pre-installation guidelines:
1. Locate the power outlets outside the cross-connect field area. The outlets must not
be controlled by a wall switch or be shared with other equipment.
2. Locate the trunk/auxiliary field inside the cross-connect field, if desired.
3. Ground the system. See ‘‘Approved Grounds’’ on page 62.
4. Each cabinet requires either: NEMA 5-15R receptacle
(or equivalent) for United States installations or local IEC 320
cord set (or equivalent) for non-United States installations.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
32
Cross-connect field
Compact
modular
cabinet
12”
12”
25.5”
Electrical
outlets
12”
48”
Table
Optional SMT
Printer
System
management
terminal
Wall
fpdftfp4 LJK 121399
Figure 10.
Typical Compact Modular Cabinet Floor Plan
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
33
Single-Carrier Cabinet Configuration Guidelines
The cross-connect field can be directly behind the cable slack manager. To allow service
access, the table for the management terminal and optional printer is away from the
equipment area. See Figure 11 and ‘‘Table Area’’ on page 40 for requirements.
The following steps are pre-installation guidelines:
1. Locate the power outlets outside the cross-connect field area. The outlets must not
be controlled by a wall switch or be shared with other equipment.
2. Locate the trunk/auxiliary field inside the cross-connect field, if desired.
3. Ground the system. See ‘‘Approved Grounds’’ on page 62.
4. For fiber connections between PNs, use a 20-foot (6.1 m) multimode fiber optic
cable.
5. Install earthquake protection (if required). See ‘‘Earthquake Protection’’ on page
71.
6. Each cabinet requires either: NEMA 5-15R, NEMA 5-20R receptacle (or
equivalent) for United States installations or local
cord set (or equivalent) for non-United States installations.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
34
Cross-connect field
LAN
connection
22"
Processor
port
network
cabinet(s)
(front)
27"
Electrical
outlets
Cable
slack
manager
38"
32"
Table
Optional SMT
Printer
System
management
terminal
Wall
fpdfscc1 LJK 121399
Figure 11. Typical Single-Carrier Cabinet Floor Plan
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
35
Multi-Carrier Cabinet Configuration
Guidelines
The cross-connect field is directly behind the cable slack manager. To allow service
access, the table for the management terminal and optional printer is away from the
equipment area. See Figure 12 and ‘‘Table Area’’ on page 40 for requirements. The
following steps are pre-installation guidelines:
1. Locate the power outlets outside the cross-connect field area. The outlets must not
be controlled by a wall switch or be shared with other equipment.
2. For the PPN cabinets, use either a NEMA 5-50R receptacle (or equivalent) or a
NEMA L14-30R receptacle (or equivalent) power outlet or: 220 VAC, 50-60 Hz
power outlet for the Global AC Cabinet.
3. For the Auxiliary Cabinet, use a NEMA 5-20R receptacle (or equivalent).
4. Allow at least 3 feet (91.4cm) of space in front of the cabinet to permit the door to
open.
5. Ground the system. See ‘‘Approved Grounds’’ on page 62.
6. Install earthquake protection (if required). See ‘‘Earthquake Protection’’ on page
71.
7. Locate the LAN connection field inside the cross-connect field, if desired.
8. Fiber connections between PNs use a 20-foot (6.1 m) multimode fiber optic cable.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
36
Cross-connect field
LAN connection
Electrical
outlet 38"
28"
System
management
terminal
Table
Printer
Cable
slack
manager
Cable
slack
manager
(optional)
Port
network
cabinet
(front)
Auxiliary
cabinet 28"
(optional)
32"
Electrical
outlets
32"
Optional SMT
Wall
fpdfmcc1 LJK 121399
Figure 12.
Typical Multi-Carrier Cabinet Floorplan
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
37
Additional Floor Plans
The following floor plans illustrate recommendations for other possible installations. See
Figure 13, Figure 14, Figure 15, and Figure 16.
Cross-connect field
LAN connection
Electrical
outlet 38"
28"
Table
Printer
System
management
terminal
Cable
Cable
Cable
slack
slack
slack
manager manager
manager
(optional) (optional)
PPN
cabinet
(front)
32"
EPN
Auxiliary
cabinet
cabinet 28"
(optional) (optional)
32"
32"
Optional SMT
Wall
fpdftfp1 LJK 121399
Figure 13. Typical Floor Plan with EPN and Auxiliary Cabinet
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
38
Cross-connect field
LAN connection
Electrical
outlet 38"
28"
System
management
terminal
Table
Printer
Electrical
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
outlets
slack
slack
slack
slack
manager manager manager
manager
(optional) (optional) (optional)
PPN
cabinet
(front)
EPN
Auxiliary Auxiliary
cabinets cabinet
cabinet 28"
(optional) (optional) (optional)
32"
32"
32"
32"
Optional SMT
Wall
fpdftfp3 LJK 121399
Figure 14.
Typical Floor Plan with an additional EPN and Auxiliary Cabinets
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
39
Cross-connect field
LAN connection
Electrical
outlet 38"
28"
Table
System
management
terminal
Cable
Cable
Cable
slack
slack
slack
manager manager
manager
(optional) (optional)
PPN
cabinet
(front)
32"
Wall
EPN
Auxiliary
cabinet
cabinet 28"
(optional) (optional)
32"
32"
Optional SMT
Printer
55"
55"
Battery
cabinet
(optional)
Battery
cabinet
(optional)
21"
fpdftfp5 LJK 121399
Figure 15. Typical Floor Plan with Battery Cabinets
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Floor-Plan Guidelines
LAN connection
40
Cross-connect field
ATM
switch
38"
28"
System
management
terminal
Table
Printer
Cable
Cable
Cable
slack
slack
slack
manager manager
manager
(optional) (optional)
Electrical
outlet
PPN
EPN
Auxiliary
cabinet cabinet
cabinet 28"
(front) (optional) (optional)
32"
32"
32"
Optional SMT
Wall
fpdftfp6 LJK 121399
Figure 16.
Typical Floor Plan with ATM Switch (Category A only)
NOTE:
To provide power for testing equipment and peripherals, locate electrical
outlets at intervals that are in accordance with local codes. Also, ensure
that you locate the main shutoff switch near the door in accordance with
local codes.
Table Area
Reserve the table area in the equipment room for the management terminal and optional
printer, if so equipped. Terminals require approximately 3.2 square feet (0.3 square m) of
area.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Environmental Considerations
41
Cross-Connect Field
The cross-connect field equipment is located a specified distance from the DEFINITY
cabinets and must meet specific requirements. An optional cross-connect field can be
installed in the CMC right panel.
For new installations, Lucent Technologies personnel may install the cross-connect field.
For more details about the cross-connect field and other site requirements, refer to the
following documents:
■
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution
Field Design, 555-230-630
■
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Planning and Configuration,
555-230-601
NOTE:
The cross-connect field is wired to the external environment (trunks and lines
outside of the building) by telephone company personnel.
Environmental Considerations
This section details the environmental considerations for the Multi-Carrier and
Single-Carrier cabinets. For information about the DEFINITY Wireless Business System,
refer to Appendix A.
Heat Dissipation
Typical heat dissipation Compact Single-Carrier, Single-Carrier, Multi-Carrier are shown
in Table 5.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Environmental Considerations
Table 5.
42
Typical Heat Dissipation for Various Cabinet Configurations
Number in
Stack
With
Terminals? BTUs/Hour
Gram-Cals./
Hour
Watts
Compact
Modular
1
No
202
810 kg
234
Yes
378
1500 kg
439
Single-Carrier
1
Yes
438
1700 kg
499
4 (max.)
Yes
1436
5700 kg
1672
1
No
1058
4200 kg
1232
Yes
1662
6600 kg
1935
Cabinet type
Multi-Carrier
Continued on next page
Altitude and Air Pressure
At altitudes above 5,000 feet (1,525 meters), the maximum short-term temperature limit
reduces by 1o Fahrenheit for each 1,000 feet (305 meters) of elevation above 5,000 feet
(1,525 meters). For example: at sea level, the maximum short-term temperature limit is
120o F (49o Celsius). At 10,000 feet (3,050 meters), the maximum short-term temperature
limit is 115o F (46o C).
The normal operating air pressure range is: 9.4 to 15.2 psi (lbs. per sq. in.) (648 to 1,048
millibars).
Temperature and Humidity
Install the equipment in a well-ventilated area. Maximum equipment performance is
achieved at an ambient room temperature between 40 and 120o F (4o and 49o C) for
short term operation (not more than 72 consecutive hours or 15 days in a year) and up to
110o F (43o C) for continuous operation.
The relative humidity range is 10 to 95% at up to 84o F (29o C). Above this, maximum
relative humidity decreases from 95% down to 32% at 120o F (49o C). Installations
outside these limits may reduce system life or affect operation. The recommended
temperature and humidity range is 65o to 85o F (18o to 29o C) at 20 to 60% relative
humidity. See Table 6.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Environmental Considerations
Table 6.
43
Temperature and Relative Humidity
Room Temperature
(Degrees Fahrenheit)
Room Temperature
(Degrees Celsius)
Relative Humidity (%)
40 to 84
4.4 to 28.8
10 to 95
86
30.0
10 to 89
88
31.1
10 to 83
90
32.2
10 to 78
92
33.3
10 to 73
94
34.4
10 to 69
96
35.6
10 to 65
98
36.7
10 to 61
100
37.8
10 to 58
102
38.9
10 to 54
104
40.0
10 to 51
106
41.1
10 to 48
108
42.2
10 to 45
110
43.3
10 to 43
112
44.4
10 to 40
114
45.6
10 to 38
116
46.7
10 to 36
118
47.8
10 to 34
120
48.9
10 to 32
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Environmental Considerations
44
Air Purity
The Compact Modular Cabinet, Single-Carrier and Multi-Carrier Cabinets contain an air
filter to reduce particulates flowing through the equipment. Do not install the cabinet
where the air may be contaminated by excessive dust, lint, carbon particles, paper fiber
contaminants, or metallic contaminants. For example, do not install the cabinet near
paper handling equipment such as copiers and high-speed printers, which introduce
paper dust and print particles into the environment. Corrosive gases above the levels in
Table 7 must be avoided.
Table 7.
Allowable Concentrations for Atmospheric Contaminants
Contaminant
Average Concentration Not to Exceed
All particulate matter
185 micrograms/cubic meter
Nitrate
12 micrograms/cubic meter
Total hydrocarbons equivalent to methane
10 ppm (parts per million)
Sulphur dioxide
0.20 ppm (parts per million)
Oxides of nitrogen
0.30 ppm (parts per million)
Total oxidants equivalent to ozone
0.05 ppm (parts per million)
Hydrogen sulfide
0.10 ppm (parts per million)
Lighting
Lighting must be bright enough to allow personnel to perform their tasks. The
recommended light intensity is 50 to 70 footcandles (538 to 753 lumens/m2) to meet the
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards.
Radio Frequency Noise
Noise is introduced into the system through trunk or station cables, or both.
Electromagnetic fields near the system control equipment may cause system noise.
Place the system and cable runs in areas where high electromagnetic field strengths do
not exist. Radio transmitters (AM or FM), television stations, induction heaters, motors
with commutators of 0.25 horsepower (187 watts) or greater, and similar equipment are
leading causes of interference.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Environmental Considerations
45
Small tools with universal motors are generally not a problem when they operate on
separate power lines. Motors without commutators generally do not cause interference.
Field strengths below 1.0 volt per meter are unlikely to cause interference.
Measure weak fields with a tunable meter. Measure field strengths greater than 1.0 volt
per meter with a broadband meter.
Estimate field strengths of radio transmitters by dividing the square root of the emitted
power in kilowatts by the distance from the antenna in kilometers. This yields the
approximate field strength in volts per meter and is relatively accurate for distances
greater than about half a wavelength (150 meters for a frequency of 1000 kHz).
Acoustic Noise Generated by Cabinets
Acoustic noise levels are provided below. In all types of cabinet configurations, if the
system cabinet door is open, there is an additional 1 dBA (decibels measured
acoustically) of noise. Table 8 lists some typical noise figures for various cabinet
combinations.
Table 8.
Noise Generated by Cabinets
Cabinet Type
Operating Condition
Additional Noise Generated
Multi-Carrier
Running, low-fan speed 51 dBA
5 ft. (1.5 m)
Running, high-fan
speed
5 ft. (1.5 m)
56 dBA
At Distance
Tape drive reading data 2 dBA
5 ft. (1.5 m)
Tape drive fast-winding
1 dBA
5 ft. (1.5 m)
Single-Carrier
1 cabinet
48 dBA
5 ft. (1.5 m)
Single-Carrier
2 cabinets
2 dBA (50 dBA total)
5 ft. (1.5 m)
3 cabinets
4 dBA (52 dBA total)
5 ft. (1.5 m)
4 cabinets
5 dBA (53 dBA total)
5 ft. (1.5 m)
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Environmental Considerations
46
Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the following EMC standards (as applicable):
■
Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference Characteristics of
Information Technology Equipment, EN55022 (CISPR22), 1993
■
EN50082-1, European Generic Immunity Standard
■
FCC Part 15
■
Australia AS3548
NOTE:
The DEFINITY system conforms to Class A (industrial) equipment. Voice
terminals meet Class B requirements.
■
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2
■
Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000-4-3
■
Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000-4-4
■
Lightning effects IEC 1000-4-5
■
Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000-4-6
■
Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000-4-8
■
Low frequency mains disturbance IEC 1000-4-11
European Union Standards
Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that the DEFINITY
equipment specified in this document bearing the “CE” mark conforms to the European
Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives.
The “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark indicates conformance to the European Union
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (89/336/EEC), Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC), and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment (TTE) Directive (91/263/EEC)
and with i-CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and i-CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) as
applicable.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
47
The “CE” mark is applied to the following products:
■
Global AC-powered Multicarrier Cabinet (MCC) with 25-Hz and 50-Hz ring
generator
■
DC-powered Multicarrier Cabinet (MCC) with 25-Hz ring generator
■
AC-powered Enhanced Single-Carrier Cabinet (ESCC) with 25-Hz ring generator
■
AC-powered Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet (CSCC) with 25-Hz ring generator
■
AC-powered Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC) with 25-Hz and 50-Hz ring
generator (for France)
■
Enhanced DC Power System
Cabinet Power Requirements
This section describes cabinet AC- and DC-power source requirements.
AC Power
Power feeders from a dedicated AC-power source (usually located outside the building)
connect to an AC-load center. These feeders do not power other equipment. The AC-load
center distributes the power to receptacles. The power cord from the AC-power
distribution unit in each multicarrier cabinet and AC-power supply in each single-carrier
cabinet plugs into a receptacle.
60 Hz Power Sources in R8 Systems
Each of the following power sources can supply 60-Hz power to the AC load in R7 and
later systems:
■
Single-phase, 4-wire, 120/240 VAC. See Figure 17.
■
Three-phase, 5-wire, 208 VAC. See Figure 18.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
48
Phase A
120
240
Neutral
To equipment room
AC load center
Ground
120
Phase B
Figure 17.
widf1phs LJK 072298
Single-Phase, 120/240 VAC, 60 Hz Source
Phase A
120
208
Neutral
208
120
120
To equipment room
AC load center
Phase B
Ground
Phase C
Figure 18.
Three-Phase, 120/208 VAC, 60 Hz Source
widf3phs LJK 071597
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
49
50 Hz Power Sources in R8 Systems
Either of the following power sources can supply 50-Hz power to the AC- load in R7 and
later systems:
■
International 5-wire, Y, 220/380 VAC. See Figure 19.
■
International Delta, 3-wire, 220 or 240 VAC. See Figure 20.
NOTE:
The type of power for a Multi-Carrier Cabinet is shown on the cabinet’s rear door,
a Single-Carrier Cabinet is shown on the cabinet’s rear cover, and a Compact
Modular Cabinet is shown on the right door.
Phase A
380 V
220 V
Phase B
220 V
380 V
Neutral
380 V
To equipment room
AC load center
Ground
220 V
Phase C
widf4wir LJK 071497
Figure 19. International, Three Phase, 220/380 VAC, 50-Hz Source
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
50
Phase A
220 V
220/240 V
Phase B
To equipment
room AC load
center
220 V
Phase C
widf3wir LJK 071497
Figure 20.
International Delta, 220 or 240 VAC, 50-Hz Source
Table 9 lists the AC-power sources that can supply power to an AC- load in a cabinet. A
NEMA receptacle (or equivalent) connects to the wires from the unit. The AC power cord
from the power input of each unit plugs into a receptacle.
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for the list number of each power
source application.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
Table 9.
51
Cabinet AC Power Sources
Cabinet Style and Power
Distribution Unit
Power Sources
Power Input Receptacles
Single phase 120 VAC
with neutral
120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15R
Single phase 240 VAC
with neutral
240 VAC, 50 Hz IEC 320
Multi-Carrier Cabinet
AC power distribution
(J58890CE-1 and
J58890CE-2)
Single phase 120 VAC
with neutral
120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA
5-50R
Single phase 240 VAC
with neutral, or single
phase of 3-phase, 208
VAC with neutral
208/240 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA
L14-30R
Multi-Carrier Cabinet
AC Power distribution
(J58890CH-1)
Single phase 176-264
VAC
200-240 Volts, 50-60 Hz NEMA
L6-30R. Installations outside the
United States require a
receptacle suitable for use in the
country of installation.
Single-Carrier Cabinet
AC power supply
(1217A)
Single phase 120 VAC
with neutral
120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 5-20R or
5-15R
Single phase of 220 VAC
or
Single phase of 240 VAC
220/240 VAC at country-specific
receptacle
Compact Modular
Cabinet AC power
supply
(650A)
Japan installs use country
specific receptacles for 100 and
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
52
DC Power
DC-powered cabinets containing a J58890CF power distribution unit require a -42.5 to
-56 VDC source at up to 75 A. Refer to "Multi-Carrier Cabinet Power system" on page 43.
Refer to ‘‘Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Systems’’ on page 65 for DC-power information.
For DEFINITY Wireless Business System power requirements, refer to Appendix A.
AC and DC Load Center Circuit Breakers
The circuit breaker sizes for all AC- and DC-powered cabinets are listed in Table 10 and
Table 11.
Table 10.
Circuit Breakers for AC-Powered Cabinets
Cabinet Type
Circuit Breaker Size
Compact Modular Cabinet (120 VAC) 60 Hz
15 A
Compact Modular Cabinet (240 VAC) 50 Hz
10 A
Multi-Carrier Cabinet (120 VAC) 60 Hz
50 A
Multi-Carrier Cabinet (208 VAC) 60 Hz
30 A
Multi-Carrier Cabinet (240 VAC) 60 Hz
30 A
Multi-Carrier Cabinet (200-240 VAC) 50-60 Hz
30 A
Single-Carrier Cabinet (120 VAC)
15 or 20 A
Auxiliary cabinet (120 VAC)
20 A
.
Table 11.
Circuit Breakers for DC-Powered Cabinets
Cabinet Type (–48 VDC)
Circuit Breaker Size
Multi-Carrier Cabinet
75 A
Single-Carrier Cabinet
25 A
Auxiliary cabinet
20 A
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
53
Multi-Carrier Cabinet Power System
These power systems consist of an AC- or DC-power distribution unit in the bottom of
each cabinet and cabling to distribute output voltages to power unit circuit packs in the
carriers. These power systems also consist of power-converter circuit packs in the
carriers supplying DC- power to the circuit pack slots. Chapter 3 describes the
AC-version 631DA1 and 631DB1 power units and the DC-version 644A, 645B, and 649A
power converters.
Table 12 lists the input and output voltages of power unit circuit packs in the carriers of
Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
Table 12.
Power Units in Multi-Carrier Cabinets
Model
Inputs
Outputs
120 VAC 144VDC -48 VDC
+5 VDC
60 A
–5 VDC
6A
–48 VDC
8A
AC 631DA1
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
AC 631DB1
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
DC 644A
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
DC 645B
no
no
yes
no
yes
yes
DC 649A
no
no
yes
yes
yes
10 A
AC and DC Power Distribution
A typical AC-power distribution unit for a Multi-Carrier Cabinet contains the circuit
breakers, ring generator, optional batteries, and optional battery charger. The power
distribution cables carry 120 VAC during normal operation and 144 VDC from optional
batteries if AC power fails. Another cable connects 120 VAC to the battery charger.
DC-powered cabinets require a -42.5 to -56 VDC source at up to 75 A.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
54
AC Power Distribution
Figure 21 shows an AC Power Distribution Unit and Battery Charger (J58890CE-2 List 15
or later). This unit sits at the bottom of some Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
Circuit
breakers
631DB
power unit
Ring
generator
Ring generator
fuse
psdfacpd RPY 053097
Figure 21.
AC Power Distribution Unit (J58890CE-2) (Front)
The AC-Power Distribution Unit contains the following additional components not shown
in the figure:
■
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter
■
AC input fuse
■
5 circuit breakers (1 for each carrier)
■
20-amp fuses
■
Signal connector
■
-48 VDC fan power
The optional battery charger (List 11) sits at the bottom of some multicarrier cabinets. See
Figure 22.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
55
Battery
charger
Batteries
psdfbatt RPY 053097
Figure 22. Battery Charger (Optional Part of J58890CE-2) (Front)
The battery charger is used only without an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). The
charger contains:
■
Three 48-VDC batteries for backup power to the cabinet
■
A DC-power relay to switch the batteries into the power circuit if a main power
failure is detected
Circuit Breaker
The circuit breaker protects the AC input power to the cabinet and serves as the main AC
input disconnect switch. The circuit breaker has 2 poles for 120 VAC or 3 poles for
208/240 VAC. If a problem develops, the circuit breaker automatically trips (opens) and
removes the AC power input.
48-VDC Batteries
The 3 series-connected 48-VDC batteries produce a nominal 144 VDC, fused at 20 A.
The batteries trickle-charge from the battery charger.
Battery Charger
When AC power restores after an outage, the battery charger converts a 120 VAC input
to a DC voltage that recharges the batteries (usually within 24 hours).
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
56
DC Power Relay
This relay disconnects the batteries from a system when using AC power. The relay also
disconnects the batteries if power fails for more than 10 minutes in a standard reliability
system, 5 minutes in high and critical reliability systems, and 10 minutes in an expansion
port network (EPN). This protects the batteries from over-discharging.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filters
The EMI filters suppress noise voltage on the AC input line to the unit.
Ring Generator
The ring generator converts the -48 VDC input to a 67 VAC to 100 VAC, 20 Hz or 25 Hz
ringing voltage. The analog line circuit packs use this AC voltage output to ring voice
terminals. The AC outputs route from the ring generator to port carriers, expansion
control carriers, and control carriers.
Fuses
20-Amp fuses protect the power on each cable going from the AC- Power Distribution
Unit to power converters in the carriers.
Figure 23 shows AC power distribution in some Multi-Carrier Cabinets. The DC-power
distribution cables are on both sides of the cabinet. These cables supply power to each of
the carriers. The optional battery charger is at the right side of the Power Distribution Unit.
"D" position
carrier
"E" Position
Carrier
Power
3
distribution
unit
Battery
charger
(optional)
lcdfacpd RPY 053097
Figure 23.
AC Power Distribution in Multi-Carrier Cabinets
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
57
Power Backup
If AC power fails, three 48-VDC batteries power the system for 10 seconds in a PPN
cabinet, for 15 seconds in an EPN cabinet, and for 10 minutes in the control carrier in a
standard reliability system. The batteries also supply system power for 5 minutes in the
control carrier in high and critical reliability systems, and for 10 minutes in the expansion
control carrier in the A position of an EPN cabinet (R7r and later only).
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
An external, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) provides a longer backup time than
holdover batteries (holdover times vary from less than 10 minutes to up to 8 hours) and
can replace the batteries and battery charger. The unit connects from the AC-power
source to a cabinet’s AC-power cord. If AC power fails, the unit supplies its own AC
power to the cabinet.
AC Power Distribution Unit (J58890CH-1)
Figure 24 shows a typical AC Power Distribution Unit used in some Multi-Carrier
Cabinets. The unit sits at the bottom of the cabinet.
Ring generator
fuse
Circuit
breakers
Battery
interface unit
Ring
generator
Rectifier
modules
psdfacp1 RPY 053097
Figure 24. AC Power Distribution Unit (J58890CH-1) (Front)
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
58
Power Backup
There are 2 types of battery assemblies used for power backup: small and large. The
small batteries are typically located at the center rear of a Multi-Carrier Cabinet. The large
batteries are typically located inside the battery cabinet.
Small Batteries
The small battery is an 8 AH (Amp-hour) battery fused for short circuit protection and is
charged by the J58890CH-1. The batteries also contain a thermal sensor that changes
the charging voltage depending on battery temperature. See Figure 25.
The small batteries provide short-term battery holdover. If AC power fails, 48 VDC
batteries power the system for 10 seconds in a PPN cabinet, for 15 seconds in an EPN
cabinet, and for 10 minutes in the control carrier in a standard reliability system. The
batteries also provide system power for 5 minutes in the control carrier in high and critical
reliability systems, and for 10 minutes in the expansion control carrier in the A position of
an EPN cabinet (R7r and later only).
Battery
connector
psdfbatw RPY 061797
Figure 25.
Small Battery Assembly
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
Issue 1
April 2000
59
Large Batteries
The large batteries can supply holdover times of 2 to 8 hours, depending on the number
of batteries. When using large battery holdover, 1 battery cabinet is required per system.
The 24-cell battery cabinet must have float voltage of 54.2 VDC. The 23-cell battery
cabinet must have a float voltage of 51.75 VDC. The batteries are circuit breaker
protected and are charged by the J58890CH-1.
The batteries also contain a thermal sensor that changes the charging voltage,
depending on the battery temperature. The batteries provide extended holdover. Battery
holdover and recharge times for a typical 2500-Watt load are shown in Table 13. A typical
large battery cabinet, (200 A) is shown Figure 26.
Table 13.
Battery Holdover and Recharge Times
Cabinet Type
Holdover Time
Recharge Time
100 A
2 hours
7 hours
200 A
4 hours
13 hours
300 A
6 hours
20 hours
400 A
8 hours
26 hours
Large battery
cabinets
Circuit
breaker
psdflbc1 RPY 053097
Figure 26. Typical Large Battery Cabinets
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
60
DC Power Distribution
The typical distribution system has a DC power converter and cables to provide the
power to the system circuit packs.
DC Power Distribution Unit (J58890CF-2)
Figure 27 shows a Power Distribution Unit in some DC-powered Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
The unit sits at the bottom of the cabinet and contains the ring generator, 20-amp circuit
breakers, terminal blocks, and system fan power.
DC power
distribution
unit
Circuit
breakers
Terminal
block
Ring
generator
psdfdpdu RPY 053097
Figure 27.
DC Power Distribution Unit (J58890CF-2) (Front)
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
61
Ground Isolation
Each peripheral connecting to a DEFINITY System, via the Asynchronous Electronic
Industries Association (EIA) RS-232 interface, requires either a 105C, a 105D or a 116A
Isolator Interface. The interface isolates ground between the system and external
adjuncts.
The Isolator Interface is behind a PPN control carrier or behind an EPN expansion control
carrier. The 105C, 105D, or the 116A installs at the RS-232 interface between the
peripheral equipment and the interface connector.
Figure 28 shows the power distribution in some Multi-Carrier Cabinets with short term
battery holdover (small battery). In R7r and later systems, the power distribution cables
are on the right hand side of the cabinet only. This is because the 649A DC power
converter circuit pack replaces 2 power converters at either end of each carrier. Switch
node (SN) carriers require two 649As and 2 cables.
Port carrier
1
Port or
control carrier
649A DC
power converter
circuit pack
Fan unit
649A DC power
converter circuit pack
Power
4
distribution
unit
Small battery
(Inside cabinet)
Control
carrier
Port or switch
node carrier
Port or switch
node carrier
lcdfpdu1 LJK 071497
Figure 28. Power Distribution in Multicarrier Cabinets
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
62
Figure 29 shows the DC-power distribution in some Multi-Carrier Cabinets with extended
battery backup (large batteries). In R7r and later systems, the power distribution cables
are on the right side of the cabinet only. This is because the 649A DC power converter
circuit pack replaces 2 power converters at either end of each carrier. Switch node (SN)
carriers require two 649As and two cables.
649A DC
power converter
circuit pack
Large battery
cabinets
Control
carrier
649A DC power
converter
circuit pack
Power
distribution
unit
Figure 29.
Circuit
breaker
Switch node
carrier
lcdfpdu2 LJK 110797
DC Power Distribution in Multicarrier Cabinets
DC Power Converter (649A)
The 649A converts the –48 VDC from the Power Distribution Unit to outputs of –48 VDC
at 10 A, +5 VDC at 60 A, and –5 VDC at 6 A. These outputs distribute power to circuit
pack slots in the carriers.
AC and DC Grounding
Approved Grounds
An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building
entrance protector, the entrance cable shield, or single-point ground of the system.
If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises, bond the grounds
together as specified in Section 250-81 of the National Electrical Code, or the applicable
electrical code in the country where the equipment is installed.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
63
Protective Grounds
Grounded Building Steel — The metal frame of the building where it is grounded by one
of the following: acceptable metallic water pipe, concrete encased ground, or a ground
ring.
Acceptable Water Pipe — Underground water pipe, at least 1/2 inch
(1.3 cm) in diameter, needs to be in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet (3
meters). The pipe must be electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by
bonding around insulated joints, plastic pipe, or plastic water meters), to the point where
the protector ground wire is connected.
A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the
building, a concrete encased ground, or a ground ring.
If these grounds are not available, the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of
the following types of grounds:
■
Other local metal underground systems or structures — Local underground
structures such as tanks and piping systems
■
Rod and pipe electrodes — A 5/8 inch (1.6 cm) solid rod or 3/4 inch (1.9 cm)
conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet (2.5 meters)
■
Plate electrodes — Must have a minimum of 2 square feet (0.18 square meters) of
metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil
Concrete Encased Ground — An electrode encased by at least 2 in. (5 cm) of concrete
and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct
contact with the earth. The electrode must be at least 20 feet (6 meters) of one or more
steel reinforcing bars or rods 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) in diameter, or at least 20 feet (6 meters)
of bare, solid copper, 4 AWG (26 mm2) wire.
Ground Ring — A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at
least 2.5 feet (0.8 meter) below the earth's surface. The ground ring must be at least 20
feet (6 meters) of 2AWG (35 mm2), bare, copper wire.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
64
Approved Floor Grounds
!
!
WARNING:
If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a
dedicated power equipment room, then connections to this ground should be
made by a licensed electrician.
Approved floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high-rise building suitable
for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet equipment
single-point ground terminal. Approved floor grounds may include the following:
■
Building steel
■
The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding
the floor
■
Metallic water pipes
■
Power feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor
■
A point specifically provided in the building design for grounding
NOTE:
Electrically connect all protective grounds together to form a single grounding
electrode system.
Coupled Bonding Conductor
When using Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) grounding in an AC- powered cabinet,
maintain a minimum 1 ft. (0.3 m) spacing between the CBC and other power and ground
leads.
In AC-powered systems, locate the system single-point ground terminal block on the AC
load or AC protector cabinet.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
65
Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Systems
Each Single-Carrier Cabinet has 1 AC or 1 DC power supply that distributes DC-power
and AC ringing voltage to the circuit pack slots in the cabinet.
AC Power Supply (1217A)
In an AC-powered cabinet, a single, plug-in, multi-output AC power supply is in the power
supply slot. A power cord, with a 3-prong plug on one end and an appliance connector on
the other end, connects the supply to a dedicated AC power source.
The 1217A is a global power unit for Single-Carrier Cabinets. It has a wide input voltage
operating range of 90 to 264 VAC and a 50/60 Hz autoranging input, multi-output power
supply that provides regulated DC output. The 1217A also has a selectable 20/25 Hz AC
ringer.
The inputs to the power supply can be (depending on list version):
■
120 VAC, 60-Hz, 15-Amp to 20-Amp; 3 wires in the power cord: 1 hot wire, 1
neutral wire, and 1 ground wire
■
220 VAC or 240 VAC, 50-Hz, 10-Amp; 3 wires in the power cord: 1 hot wire, 1
neutral wire, and 1 ground wire
The AC power supply produces the following DC outputs: +5 VDC, –5 VDC, –48 VDC,
+12 VDC, and a battery-charging voltage. The DC outputs distribute power on the cabinet
backplane to the circuit pack slots. Additionally, the -48 VDC output current capacity has
been increased from 6.85 amps to 8.25 amps. A 50 amp load inrush requirement has
been added to the -48 VDC output
A holdover circuit in the power supply allows a system to operate normally during AC
power interruptions. If AC input power fails, reserve batteries supply power to the memory
and processor circuit packs and fans for 2 minutes. All port circuit packs are inactive
during this time. The power supply contains a battery charger to charge the holdover
batteries.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
66
DC Power Supply (676C)
In a DC-powered Single-Carrier Cabinet, a single, plug-in multi-output DC power supply
is in the power supply slots.
The 676C DC power supply has a wide input voltage operating range of -42 to -60 VDC at
up to 22A. The 676C produces the following outputs: +5.1 VDC at 0 to 55A, -5.1 VDC at 0
to 5.5A, +12 VDC at 0 to 2A (surge to 2.8A for 350 ms), -48 VDC at 0 to 8.25A. The
outputs distribute power on the cabinet backplane to the slots for the circuit packs. The
AC ringing voltage output value and frequency depend on the country of use. The power
supply has circuit breakers and EMI filtering.
DC Power Distribution Unit (J58890CG)
The J58890CG is used with Single-Carrier Cabinets. Individual DC output connectors can
power up to 4 Single-Carrier Cabinets. Each output connector is separately fused at 25 A
(fuses are inside the unit). The input to the DC distribution unit is from the DC power
cabinet.
The J58890CG is required when the distance between the DC power cabinet and the
cabinet stack is greater than 30 feet (9 m).
Enhanced DC Rectifier Cabinet (J58890R)
The J58890R is used with Single-Carrier Cabinets. Each rectifier assembly in the DC
rectifier cabinet can supply up to 50 A of DC current. A minimum of two rectifiers install in
each DC cabinet to supply a total of 100 A. A third rectifier assembly is used as a backup
only.
Each Single-Carrier Cabinet can draw up to 15 A. Up to 3 DC cabinets can be stacked to
supply power to single-carrier cabinets stacks.
Each output connector is separately fused at 25 A (fuses are inside each DC rectifier
assembly).
NOTE:
A J58890CG DC Power Distribution Unit is required if the distance between the
DC cabinet and the cabinet stack is greater than 30 feet (9 m).
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Power Requirements
67
Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC)
AC Power Supply (650A)
In the Compact Modular Cabinet, a power cord, with a 3-prong plug on one end and an
appliance connector on the other end, connects the supply to a dedicated AC power
source. The power supply is a global power factor corrected AC/DC converter providing
multiple DC outputs and AC ring outputs. It is auto ranging 85 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, at
330 Watts, 4.5 A (100-120 VAC) or 2.3 A (200-240 VAC) at 500 VA.
The inputs to the power supply can be (depending on list version):
■
120 VAC, 50-Hz to 60-Hz, 6-Amp; 3 wires in the power cord: 1 hot wire, 1 neutral
wire, and 1 ground wire
■
220 VAC or 240 VAC, 50-Hz to 60-Hz, 3-Amp; 3 wires in the power cord: 1 hot wire,
1 neutral wire, and 1 ground wire
The AC power supply produces the following outputs: +5 VDC, –5 VDC, and –48 VDC.
The outputs distribute power on the cabinet backplane to the circuit pack slots. The AC
ringing voltage output value and frequency depend on the country of use. The 650A also
supplies power for neon message-waiting lamps (150 VDC). The power supply has EMI
filtering.
Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC)
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The UPS provides surge protection for all connected cabinets.
1. Connect the UPS to an electrical outlet capable of handling the power
requirements of all cabinets. To calculate the number of amps drawn, use the
following formulas.
a. 100-200 VAC, multiply 3.5 amps times the number of cabinets.
b. 200-240 VAC, multiply 1.8 amps times the number of cabinets.
2. Cabinet A (control carrier) is always connected to an unswitched or always on
electrical outlet on the UPS.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
Cabinet Cooling Fans
68
Cabinet Cooling Fans
Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC) Fan Unit
Two variable-speed fans are at the bottom of the cabinet. They receive +8 to +14 VDC
from the power supply. An air filter, which can be removed and cleaned or replaced, is
located above the fans. Air flows from the outside, into the bottom of the cabinet, around
the circuit packs, and out through the top of the cabinet.
If the cabinet temperature reaches 158o F (70o C), the temperature sensor in the power
supply shuts the system down and invokes the emergency transfer.
Multi-Carrier Cabinet Fans
A fan unit consisting of 6 fans, mounts near the center of the cabinet. The 3 front fans
blow up and the 3 rear fans blow down. A removable air filter is provided above and
below each fan unit. Four sensors monitor the cabinet temperature; 3 sensors are inside
the cabinet top and 1 sensor is inside the cabinet bottom. One of the top sensors affects
the speed of the front fans and the bottom sensor affects the speed of the rear fans. A
speed control and thermal alarm circuit in each fan monitors the sensors. When a sensor
indicates a change in cabinet temperature, the circuit in a fan changes that fan’s speed
accordingly.
A power cable from the Power Distribution Unit connects -48 VDC to each fan, +5 VDC to
the speed control and thermal alarm circuit in each fan, and temperature sensor signals
to the equivalent circuit in each fan. One pair of wires routes to each fan circuit. Alarm
signals also route to the equivalent circuit in each fan. One pair of wires routes to each
fan circuit.
A minor alarm is sent to the processor circuit pack in the PPN cabinet and the
maintenance circuit pack in an EPN cabinet if any fan’s speed drops below minimum. A
minor alarm occurs if a fan has stopped due to loss of -48 VDC. A major alarm is sent by
one of the cabinet top thermal sensors if the exhaust temperature reaches 149 oF (65oC).
Another cabinet top sensor senses if the exhaust temperature reaches 158 oF (70 oC). If
so, the system shuts down and the Emergency Transfer is invoked.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
System Protection
69
Single-Carrier Cabinet Fan Unit
Four constant-speed fans at the top rear of the cabinet receive -48 VDC from the
backplane. An air filter is located below the fan unit. Air flows down through the filter over
the circuit packs. The filter is removable and is cleaned or replaced when necessary.
If the cabinet temperature reaches 158o F (70o C), the temperature sensor in the power
supply causes the system to shut down and invokes the Emergency Transfer.
System Protection
Protections are established to keep the DEFINITY System active and on line. The
following 4 types of system protection are provided:
■
Overvoltage
■
Sneak current
■
Lightning
■
Earthquake
Overvoltage Protection
Protection from hazardous voltages and currents is required for all off-premises
(out-of-building) trunks, lines, and terminal installations. Both over-voltage protection
(lightning, power induction, and so forth) and sneak current protection are required. The
following devices protect the system from overvoltages:
■
Analog trunks use the 507B Sneak Protector. Over-voltage protection is normally
provided by the local telephone company.
■
Analog voice and 2-wire DCP terminals can use 1 of the following (or equivalent)
types of combined overvoltage and sneak current protection:
—
Carbon block with heat coil for UL code 4B1C
—
Gas tube with heat coil for UL code 4B1E-W
—
Solid state with heat coil for UL code 4C1S
■
DCP and ISDN-BRI terminals use the solid state 4C3S-75 with heat coil protector,
or equivalent.
■
DS1/E1/T1 circuits require isolation from exposed facilities. A CSU (T1), LIU (E1),
or other equipment provides this isolation.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Site Requirements
System Protection
70
Sneak Current Protection
Sneak current protection uses fuses to protect building wiring between the network
interface and trunk circuits when exposed to extraneous power. The fuses also protect
the circuit packs.
All incoming and outgoing trunks and off-premises station lines pass through the sneak
fuses. 507B Sneak fuse panels install on the system side of the network interface.
Sneak current protectors must be either UL listed/CSA certified or must comply with local
safety standards. Sneak current protectors must have a maximum rating of 350 mA and a
minimum voltage rating of 600V, or as required by local regulations.
Lightning Protection
A Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) in the cabinet ground wiring protects the system
from lightning. The CBC runs adjacent to wires in a cable and causes mutual coupling
between itself and the wires. The mutual coupling reduces the voltage difference
between ground and the DEFINITY ECS.
When using a CBC, be sure that it connects to telecommunication cable that is firmly
connected to an approved ground. In multiple-story buildings, be sure to connect the CBC
to an approved ground at each floor.
The CBC can be a 10 AWG (5.3 mm2/2.6 mm) ground wire, a continuous cable sheath
surrounding wires within a cable, or 6 unused pairs of wire within a cable, twisted and
soldered together. The CBC connects from the cabinet single-point ground bar in an
AC-powered cabinet or the ground discharge bar in a DC-powered cabinet to the terminal
bar at the cross-connect field.
When there is an Auxiliary cabinet, a 6 AWG (13.3 mm2/4.1 mm) wire connects the
system cabinet single-point ground block to the Auxiliary cabinet ground block. The
ground wire routes as closely as possible to the cables that connect the system cabinet to
the Auxiliary cabinet.
If equipment is not present in the Auxiliary cabinet, plug the power supply for this
equipment into 1 of the 2 convenience outlets on the rear of the Multi-Carrier Cabinet, to
preserve ground integrity. The convenience outlet is fused at 5 Amps. A dedicated
maintenance terminal plugs into the other convenience outlet.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
System Protection
Issue 1
April 2000
71
Earthquake Protection
For earthquake or disaster bracing, the cabinets bolt to the floor. Other areas may require
additional bracing. Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for earthquake
requirements at the location of the system installation.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Site Requirements
System Protection
Issue 1
April 2000
72
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinets
73
3 — Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
This section describes the cabinets, carriers, and circuit packs, their functions, physical
specifications, and interconnections in DEFINITY ECS R8. It also describes minimum
cabinet and carrier configurations relative to interconnection and system-duplication
options.
NOTE:
To determine required types and numbers of cabinets, carriers, circuit packs, or
adjuncts before installation, contact your Lucent Technologies representative.
Cabinets
This section describes the auxiliary, Processor Port Network (PPN), Expansion Port
Network (EPN), and AC-power cabinets.
A Multi-Carrier Cabinet (MCC) can be used as a PPN cabinet and/or an EPN cabinet.
Doors on the front and rear of the MCC protect the internal equipment and allow easy
access to the circuit packs. Each cabinet contains casters. Leveling feet keep the cabinet
from rolling. Each corner of a cabinet can bolt to the floor, if required. See Figure 30.
The DEFINITY csi model uses the Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC).
The DEFINITY si model uses the Single-Carrier Cabinet (SCC) or the MCC.
The DEFINITY r model uses the Multi-Carrier Cabinet for the PPN and uses either the
MCC or the SCC for the EPNs.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinets
74
"C" position
carrier
"B" position
carrier
"A" position
carrier
"F" position
2
fan unit
"D" position
carrier
"E" position
carrier
Power
distribution
3
unit
lcdfmc03 EWS 092898
Figure 30.
Typical MCC Layout
AUX Connector Capacity
The AUX (auxiliary) connector is on the rear of the control carrier. Up to 3 attendant
consoles or telephone adjuncts can be powered by the AUX connector in the A position in
the MCC and the SCC cabinets. Only 1 attendant console connects to the R8csi
cabinets.
Up to 3 emergency transfer panels can be powered by the AUX connector in the A
position in DEFINITY cabinets. Only 1 emergency transfer panel connects to csi cabinets.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinets
75
Auxiliary Cabinet (J58886N)
The Auxiliary Cabinet contains the hardware to install optional equipment. The cabinet
allows carrier, rack (width: 23 in.; 58.4 cm), and panel types of mounting. An Auxiliary
Cabinet contains the following:
■
Fuse panel (J58889AB) distributes –48 VDC to fused cabinet circuits
■
AC-power receptacle strip provides switched and non-switched 120 VAC
receptacles
■
DC connector block is required when the cabinet is powered by an external DC
source, or an AC to DC power supply that converts AC-power provided by the AC
power strip switched-outlet to the required DC-power
Processor Port Network Cabinet (J58890A)
A Processor Port Network (PPN) cabinet (see Figure 31) contains the following carriers:
■
Port carrier (J58890BB) — 1 to 4
■
Control carrier (J58890AH) in R7si and later — 1
■
Duplicated control carrier (J58890AJ) R7si and later — 1 in high or critical reliability
configurations
■
Processor carrier (J58890AP) inR7r and later — 1 in all systems, 2 in high
reliability and critical reliability systems
■
Switch Node (SN) (J58890SA) in R7r and later with a Center Stage Switch
(CSS) — 1 in standard and high reliability systems or 2 in critical reliability systems
■
In a R7r and later with ATM, the ATM interface card would be placed in a port
carrier.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinets
Issue 1
April 2000
76
Port carrier
Port or control
carrier
Control carrier
Fan unit
Port or switch
node carrier
Port or switch
node carrier
Power unit
(typical)
4
Power
distribution unit
lcdfpdu3 LJK 102899
Figure 31.
Typical Multi-Carrier PPN Cabinet (J58890A)
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinets
77
Expansion Port Network Cabinet (J58890A)
An Expansion Port Network (EPN) cabinet (Figure 32) contains the following carriers:
■
Port carrier (J58890BB) — 1 to 4
■
Expansion control carrier (J58890AF) — 1
■
SN Carrier (J58890SA) in CSS-connected R7r and later systems — 0, 1, or 2 when
required
1
Port carrier
Expansion
control carrier
Port or switch
node carrier
Power
4
distribution
unit
Port carrier
Port or switch
node carrier
lcdfpdu4 LJK 081999
Figure 32. Typical Multi-Carrier EPN Cabinet (J58890A)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinets
Issue 1
April 2000
78
Expansion control
carrier (A)1
Port carrier (E)
lcdfpdu5 LJK 092099
Figure 33.
Dual EPN in an R7r or Later Multi-Carrier Cabinet
The above figure is for the configuration of a minimal Dual Expansion Port Network
cabinet for the r model. The A, B, and C carriers are intended for the first port network in
the cabinet. The D and E carriers are intended for the second port network in the cabinet.
The first carrier of a second Port Network in the cabinet must reside in carrier E. The E
carrier must be used when there is only one carrier in the second EPN in the cabinet.
When a cabinet has two Port Networks, carrier E must be used and populated first and
carrier D added and populated second.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
79
Carriers in MCCs
The following types of carriers can install in MCCs:
■
J58890AH Control Carrier (si model) (J58890AH Control Carrier (si model))
located only in the R7si or later PPN cabinet. Contains SPE circuit packs to
perform call processing, maintenance, and administration. These carriers also
contain port circuit pack slots.
■
Duplicated Control Carrier (si model) (J58890AJ) (optional), in R7si or later PPN
only. Contains duplicate SPE circuit packs to perform call processing,
maintenance, and administration identical to the Control Carrier. The Duplicated
Control Carriers also contain port circuit pack slots. Only R7si/r or later support
duplication (uses the R8r Control Carriers for duplication).
■
Processor Carrier (r model) (J58890AP), only in the R7r or later PPN cabinets.
Contains SPE circuit packs to perform call processing, maintenance, and
administration. These carriers do not contain port circuit pack slots. Two J58890AP
carriers are in the PPN for high and critical reliability (duplicate processor) systems.
■
J58890BB Port Carrier (optional), located in the PPN and EPN cabinets. Contains
port, service, and tone/clock circuit packs.
■
Expansion Control Carrier (J58890AF), only in the EPN cabinets. Contains extra
port circuit packs, tone-clock, maintenance interface, and EI circuit packs.
■
Switch Node Carrier (SN) (J58890SA) (optional), in R7r or later, in the PPN cabinet
and/or EPN cabinets. Contains SNI circuit packs composing the CSS.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
80
Carrier Circuit-Pack Slots
There are 3 types of circuit pack slots in the carriers: Control, Port, and Service.
NOTE:
The purple-colored and white-colored circuit packs and slots are being replaced
by circuit packs and slots labeled with gray and white rectangles, respectively. A
label with a solid gray rectangle indicates a port slot/circuit pack. A label with an
outlined white rectangle indicates a control slot/circuit pack.
■
Port: colored purple or labeled with a gray rectangle and can accept any purple or
gray-labeled circuit pack
■
Control: colored white or labeled with an outlined white rectangle and can accept
only a circuit pack assigned to that slot
■
Service: colored purple or labeled with a gray rectangle; is a special type of circuit
pack that does not have an I/O connector
Each port slot attaches to a 50-pin (25-pair) connector on the carrier’s rear panel. A cable
attaches to each connector and routes to the cross-connect field. Each slot containing a
fiber optic interface circuit pack (EI or SNI) uses a fiber optic transceiver on the carrier’s
rear panel.
A current limiter board (CFY1B) plugs into the backplane of the control carrier located in
the A position only. The board supplies emergency transfer logic, current-limited power, 5
VDC to trip the main circuit breaker in an over-temperature condition, and the ringing
transfer relay. Terminators on the backplane terminate each end of the processor
expansion bus.
The following apparatus blank faceplates (with widths) cover unused circuit pack slots in
the carriers to maintain proper air flow:
■
Z100A1 (0.75 inches/1.9 cm)
■
Z100C (0.5 inches/1.27 cm)
■
Z100D (0.25 inches/0.64 cm)
NOTE:
Throughout this section, the power units and circuit packs shown in the front
views of the carriers are representative examples only. Actual, installed hardware
may vary from that shown.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
81
NOTE:
In the following illustrations, a balanced ring generator (BRG) is shown below the
power unit slot in certain carriers. This means the power unit slot can include a 50
Hz BRG when optioned for France.
J58890AH Control Carrier (si model)
Lucent
B
AUTO
A
S
P
E
OVERIDE
ALARMS
MIN
631DB1
or
649A
RCV
WRN
ACK
C
A
R
D
EMER TR
ON
I
N
AUTO
103577450
Lucent
T
N
7
9
2
U
S
E
B
l
a
n
k
98DR07125243
TN792
DUPL INTERFACE
OFF
Z
1
0
0
C
Figure 34.
BBI
LINK
TRMT
MAJ
Z100A1
blanks
or
631DA1
T
N
7
9
0
B
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
9
4
T
N
2
4
0
0
or
b
l
a
n
k
T
N
2
1
8
2
T
N
7
7
6
or
T
N
5
7
0
T
N
7
7
6
or
T
N
5
7
0
T
N
7
7
1
D
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
9
9
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
Z
1
0
0
D
or
b
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
ccdfr8ah LJK 121399
A representative J58890AH control carrier is shown below.
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
5
5
B
J58890AH Control Carrier (si model) (J58890AH Control Carrier (si model))
(Front)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
82
This carrier has dedicated white-colored circuit pack slots that always contain specific
control circuit packs. Dual-color slots may contain any port circuit pack or the designated
white circuit packs (such as an EI or power unit). AC or DC power units supply power to
the carrier. Table 14 describes the connectors on the rear of the control carrier.
NOTE:
The TN776 is not shipped in the R7si and later systems. It can remain in the
system if packet endpoints and the C-LAN (TN799) are not used.
.
Table 14.
Control-Carrier Connectors
Connector
Function
1 to 9 (A1 to A9)
25-pair connectors provide interfaces between port circuit
packs and the cross-connect field or fiber transceiver
AUX (Auxiliary)
Interface for alarms, attendant console power, emergency
power transfer panels, and an internal modem (for remote
maintenance)
Processor interface
(standard reliability
only)
Connects directly to the PI circuit pack. Provides a BX.25
protocol interface for communication between the circuit pack
and external DCE equipment.
Data communications
equipment
Connects the processor to CDR equipment, a system printer,
or an external modem (for remote maintenance). This
connector can be used with any reliability option.
Terminal
Connects a management terminal to the processor in
standard reliability systems. In critical reliability systems,
connects a terminal to the processor in its control carrier.
Duplication option
terminal
Used in high and critical reliability systems to connect an
administration terminal to the active processor from the
duplication interface slot position
P1
Provides position indicator of the carrier, power to fans, and
access to alarm and control circuits
P2
Provides control signals to the carrier
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
83
J58890AJ Duplicated Control Carrier
(si model)
The Duplicated Control Carrier (J58890AJ) has dedicated white circuit pack slots that
always contain specific control circuit packs. It can also be populated with port circuit
packs or dual-colored slots that may be populated with port circuit packs or designated
white circuit packs (such as an expansion Interface or power unit).
Lucent
B
AUTO
A
S
P
E
OVERIDE
ALARMS
MAJ
Z100A1
blanks
or
631DA1
MIN
WRN
ACK
EMER TR
ON
AUTO
103577450
Z
1
0
0
C
Figure 35.
Lucent
98DR07125243
TN792
DUPL INTERFACE
OFF
T
N
7
9
2
T
N
7
9
0
B
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
C
A
R
D
I
N
U
S
E
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
BBI
LINK
TRMT
631DB1
or
649A
RCV
C
A
R
D
I
N
U
S
E
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
9
4
T
N
2
4
0
0
or
b
l
a
n
k
T
N
2
1
8
2
T
N
7
7
6
or
T
N
5
7
0
T
N
7
7
6
or
T
N
5
7
0
T
N
7
7
1
D
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
9
9
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
Z
1
0
0
D
or
b
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
5
5
B
Duplicated Control Carrier (si model) (J58890AJ) (Front)
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
ccdfr8aj LJK 121399
AC or DC power units located at each end of the Duplicated Control Carrier supply power
to the carrier. See Figure 35 for a representative example. See Table 15 for the
Duplicated Control Carrier rear connector descriptions.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
NOTE:
The TN776 is not shipped in the R7si and later systems. It can remain in the
system if packet endpoints and the C-LAN (TN799) are not used.
Table 15.
J58890AJ Duplicated Control Carrier (si model) Connectors
Connector
Function
1 to 9 (B1 to B9)
25-pair connectors provide interfaces between port circuit packs and
the cross-connect field or fiber transceiver
Terminal
Connects a management terminal to the processor in its Duplicated
Control Carrier
P1
Provides position indicator of the carrier and access to alarm and
control circuits
84
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
85
J58890AP Processor Carrier (r model)
The Processor Carrier contains only dedicated slots for control circuit packs composing
the Switch Processing Element (SPE). It does not contain port circuit pack slots. See
Figure 36 for a representative example.
Z100A1
blanks
or
631DA1
631DB1
or
649A
SPE
AUTO
A
B
Z
1
0
0
C
Figure 36.
T
N
1
6
4
8
U
N
3
3
0
B
B
l
a
n
k
U
N
3
3
1
B
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
1
6
5
0
B
T
N
1
6
5
0
B
T
N
1
6
5
0
B
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
1
6
5
5
B
l
a
n
k
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
8
0
or
T
N
2
1
8
2
U
N
3
3
2
C
Processor Carrier (r model) (J58890AP) (Front)
CAUTION: DO
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
1
6
5
7
T
N
2
2
1
1
TN2211 OPTICAL DRIVE
OVERRIDE
ccdfr8ap LJK 121399
AC or DC power units located at each end of the Processor Carrier supply the power to
the carrier. The Processor Carrier always contains 3 memory circuit packs and 1 packet
interface circuit pack. See Table 16 for the Processor Carrier rear connector descriptions.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
Table 16.
86
J58890AP Processor Carrier (r model) Connectors
Connector
Function
Clock (stratum-3)
Provides an interface to a stratum-3 clock for digital frame timing.
This is not a time-of-day clock
AUX (Auxiliary)
Provides an interface for customer alarms, attendant console
power, emergency power-transfer panels, and an internal-modem
interface for remote maintenance
Terminal, active
Connects a management terminal to the system access and
maintenance (SYSAM) circuit pack in the active Processor Carrier
Terminal, standby
Used only in Duplicated Processors to connect a management
terminal to the standby processor carrier
P1
Provides position indicator of the carrier and access to alarm and
control circuits
P2
Provides control signals to the carrier
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
87
J58890BB Port Carrier
A Port Carrier contains the following circuit packs:
■
Port slot locations 1 to 20 for the port circuit packs. A dedicated slot contains an
optional tone-clock circuit pack used for Port Carriers in the B position of an EPN
cabinet in critical reliability systems. Slot 2 contains an optional EI or ATM Interface
circuit pack
■
Power unit service slots in which power unit circuit packs or maintenance circuit
packs can install
■
AC or DC power units located at each end of the carrier
See Figure 37 for a representative example. See Table 19 for the Port Carrier rear
connector descriptions.
Table 17.
J58890BB Port Carrier Connectors
Connector Function
1 to 20
Ports interfacing between circuit pack slots and the cross-connect field or
fiber transceiver
P1
Provides position indicator of the carrier and access to alarm and control
circuits
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
88
Z
1
0
0
A
1
B
L
A
N
K or
S
Z
1
0
0
C
6
3
1
D
A
1
B
L
A
N
K
6
3
1
D
B
1
or
T
N
2
1
8
2
T
N
5
7
0
B
TONE EXPN
POWER UNIT CLOCK INTFC
B
Power Unit
1
2
T
N
5
7
0
B
6
4
9
A
EXPN
INTFC
3
4
5
6
7
8
Service
Port/Service
(BRG)
Figure 37.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
POWER UNIT
SERVICE
J58890BB Port Carrier (Front)
Port
Service
ccdf0003 RPY 081297
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
89
J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier
The Expansion Control Carrier contains an EI or ATM Interface circuit pack in port slots 1
and 2. It is used in a fiber optic cabling path to another cabinet or the CSS in the same
cabinet. These slots may contain optional port circuit packs. See Figure 38 for a
representative example.
The Expansion Control Carrier also contains port slots 3 to 19 and the AC or DC power
units. The maintenance and tone-clock circuit packs are also shown. An optional neon
power unit can be in slots 18 and 19. See Table 18 for the Expansion Control Carrier rear
connector descriptions.
Z
1
0
0
A
1
B
L
A
N
K or
S
6
3
1
D
A
1
6
3
1
D
B
1
Z
1
0
0
C
B
L
A
N
K
or
T
N
7
7
5
B
T
N
2
1
8
2
A
Power Unit
MAINTENANCE TONE-
T
N
5
7
0
B
T
N
5
7
0
B
EXPN
INTFC
EXPN
INTFC
1
2
6
4
9
A
POWER UNIT
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
POW ER UNIT
CLOCK
Service
Port
ccdf0004 RPY 081297
Figure 38. Expansion Control Carrier (J58890AF) (Front)
Service
Port/Service
(BRG)
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
Table 18.
90
Expansion Control Carrier (J58890AF) Connectors
Connector
Function
1 and 2 (A1 and A2)
Provides a fiber-optic cable interface to an expansion interface
(EI) circuit pack in slot 11 or a copper cable interface for a DS1
Converter
1 to 19 (A1 to A19)
Provides interfaces between port circuit packs and the
cross-connect field
AUX
Provides interfaces for customer alarms, attendant console
power, and emergency power transfer panels
TERMINAL
Connects a management terminal to the maintenance circuit
pack in an expansion control carrier
P1
Provides position indicator of the carrier and access to alarm
and control circuits
P2
Connects ringing voltage from the ring generator to the carrier
and produces control signals
Continued on next page
1.
In systems using ATM-PNC, the fiber connectors for the OC-3/STM-1 interfaces to the
ATM switches are located on the faceplates of the TN2305/TN2306 circuit packs.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in MCCs
91
J58890SA Switch Node Carrier (SN)
The Switch Node Carrier (SN) (J58890SA) is used in R8r and later only. See Figure 39 for
a representative example. The SN can contain one or two switch node clocks, up to 16
Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit packs, 1 or 2 DS1 converter circuit packs, one EI
circuit pack, and 2 AC or DC power units.
The AC or DC power units are located at each end of the SN. The SN always contains 3
memory circuit packs and 1 packet interface circuit pack and can be used when
connecting 3 or more EPNs. See Table 19 for the SN rear connector descriptions.
6
3
1
D
A
1
or
6
4
9
A
E
Z
1
0
0
C
B
L
A
N
K
T
N
5
7
0
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
2
3
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
8
9
SWITCH NODE INTERFACE
Power Unit
6
3
1
D
A
1
z
1
0
0
A
1
EXPN INTFC
DS1 CONV
1
Service
4
5
6
7
T
N
5
7
2
SWITCH
NODE
CLOCK
10
B
L
A
N
K
TEST
11
T
N
5
7
2
T
N
5
7
3
B
Service
Port
Figure 39. Switch Node Carrier (J58890SA) (Front)
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
T
N
5
7
3
B
SWITCH NODE INTERFACE
SWITCH
NODE
CLOCK
12
T
N
5
7
3
B
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
N
1
6
5
4
DS1
CONV
21
or
6
4
9
A
POWER UNIT
Service
ccdf0005 RPY 081297
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Single-Carrier Cabinets
Table 19.
Switch Node Carrier (J58890SA) Connectors
Connector
Function
1 (E1)
EI connector for the cable between the EI circuit pack in slot 1 and
the Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit pack in slot 2 for a
duplicated PPN only. Also used for a DS1 Converter circuit pack in
slot 1.
2-9 and 13-20
(E2-E19 and
E13-E20)
SN ports that are fiber optic cabling interfaces to the SNI circuit
packs and other circuit packs connected to SN ports or circuit
packs in EPNs
21 (E21)
Interface to connect the DS1 Converter circuit pack to the
cross-connect field and an SNI circuit pack
P1
Provides the position indicator of the SN carrier and provides
access to alarm and control circuits
Single-Carrier Cabinets
This section describes the following types of Single-Carrier Cabinet (SCC):
■
Basic Control Cabinet (si model) (J58890L)
■
Duplicated Control Cabinet (J58890M)
■
Expansion Control Cabinet (J58890N)
■
Port Cabinet (J58890H)
■
Compact Modular Cabinet (csi model) (J58890T)
■
DC power distribution cabinet
Figure 40 shows a typical SCC. Each SCC has vertical slots that hold circuit packs. A
blank faceplate covers each unused slot.
NOTE:
Throughout this section, the power units shown in the front views of the carriers
are examples only.
92
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Single-Carrier Cabinets
93
Power
converter
Air circulation
vents
Circuit packs
scdf001 KLC 060597
Figure 40. Typical SCC
A maximum of 4 SCCs can stack on top of each other. The cabinet positions are labeled
A through D. The position of the basic control cabinet or expansion control cabinet is
always labeled A. Additional port cabinet positions are labeled B, C, and D, sequentially.
The Duplicated Control Cabinet is labeled B. See Figure 41.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Single-Carrier Cabinets
94
.
Port cabinet
"D" position
Port cabinet
"C" position
Cabinet
clips
Port cabinet or
duplicated control3
cabinet "B" position
Basic control cabinet or
expansion control
cabinet "A" position
lcdfscc1 RPY 053097
Figure 41.
Typical SCC Stack
Each stack of SCCs requires 1 basic- or Expansion-Control Cabinet at the bottom of the
stack. Three is the maximum number of port cabinets per stack.
Cabinet clips connect the cabinets together. At the rear of the cabinets, a ground plate
connects between cabinets for ground integrity. Chapter 2, ‘‘Site Requirements’’,
describes the power and ground requirements for SCCs.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Single-Carrier Cabinets
95
Carrier Circuit Pack Slots
There are 3 primary types of circuit pack slots in the carriers:
NOTE:
The purple-colored and white-colored circuit packs and slots are being replaced
by circuit packs and slots labeled with gray and white rectangles, respectively. A
label with a solid gray rectangle indicates a port slot/circuit pack. A label with an
outlined white rectangle indicates a control slot/circuit pack.
■
Port: colored purple or labeled with a gray rectangle and can accept any purple or
gray-labeled circuit pack
■
Control: colored white or labeled with an outlined white rectangle and can accept
only a circuit pack assigned to that slot
■
Service: colored purple or labeled with a gray rectangle; is a special type of circuit
pack that does not have an I/O connector
Each port slot in a port carrier, an expansion control carrier, and a control carrier in R7si
or later attaches to a 25-pair connector on the carrier’s rear panel. A cable attaches to
each connector and routes to the cross-connect field.
Blank faceplates cover empty carrier slots, as follows:
■
158J (4 in/9.2 cm) covers the area left of slot 1 in port cabinets
■
158P (0.75 in/1.9 cm) covers any unused slot.
■
158N (0.50 in/1.27 cm) is used with the DEFINITY LAN gateway in DEFINITY
AUDIX R3 and CallVisor ASAI installations.
■
158G (0.25 in/0.63 cm) is used with the TN755B or TN2202.
NOTE:
In the following illustrations, a balanced ring generator (BRG) is shown below the
power unit slot in certain carriers. This means the power unit slot can include a 50
Hz BRG when optioned for France.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
96
Carriers in SCCs
J58890L Basic Control Cabinet (si model)
The Basic Control Cabinet is in the PPN only. It contains ports, a control complex to
perform call processing, and an interface to an optional Duplicated Control Cabinet. It
also interfaces to the optional STRATUM 3 Clock. See Figure 42 for an example.
The Basic Control Cabinet has dedicated white circuit pack slots that house specific
control circuit packs. Also see Table 20. Dual-colored slots may contain any port circuit
pack or the designated white circuit packs (such as an expansion interface or power unit).
AC or DC power units supply power to the carrier.
Lucent
B
AUTO
A
S
P
E
OVERIDE
ALARMS
BBI
LINK
TRMT
MAJ
MIN
RCV
WRN
ACK
C
A
R
D
EMER TR
ON
I
N
AUTO
103577450
Lucent
T
N
7
9
2
U
S
E
B
l
a
n
k
98DR07125243
TN792
DUPL INTERFACE
OFF
T
N
7
9
0
B
1
5
8
P
Figure 42.
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
9
4
T
N
2
4
0
0
or
b
l
a
n
k
T
N
2
1
8
2
B
T
N
5
7
0
B
T
N
5
7
0
B
T
N
7
9
9
Basic Control Cabinet (si model) (J58890L) (Front)
T
N
7
5
5
B
ccdfr8l LJK 121399
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
Table 20.
97
Basic Control Cabinet (si model) (J58890L) Connectors
Connector
Function
1 to 16 (A1 to A16)
25-pair connectors connect port circuit packs to the
cross-connect field or a fiber transceiver.
AUX (auxiliary)
Provides interfaces for customer alarms, attendant console
power, emergency power-transfer panels, and an internal
modem (for remote maintenance)
PI (processor interface) Provides a BX.25 protocol interface for communication
between the circuit pack and external DCE equipment. This
connection is only used with the standard reliability option.
DCE
Connects the processor to CDR equipment, a system printer,
or an external modem (for remote maintenance)
TERM (terminal)
Connects an administration terminal to the processor circuit
pack in standard reliability systems. Can be used to access
the standby SPE. The TERM connector always connects to
the processor in its own carrier.
DOT (duplication option Used in high reliability and critical reliability systems to
terminal)
connect an administration terminal to the active processor via
the duplication interface slot. The DOT connector can be used
to connect to the processor in another carrier.
Continued on next page
J58890M Duplicated Control Cabinet
The Duplicated Control Cabinet is optional and is only in the PPN in R7si or later. See
Figure 43 for a representative example. This cabinet contains ports, a duplicated control
complex, and an interface to a designated expansion control cabinet.
The Duplicated Control Cabinet has dedicated white circuit pack slots for designated
control circuit packs. The port circuit pack slots can contain any port circuit packs.
An AC or DC power supply, at the right side of the cabinet, supplies power to the cabinet.
The cabinet contains a duplication interface circuit pack in slot DUPN INTFC. See Table
21 for the Duplicated Control Cabinet rear connector descriptions.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
98
Lucent
B
AUTO
A
S
P
E
OVERIDE
ALARMS
BBI
LINK
TRMT
MAJ
MIN
RCV
WRN
ACK
C
A
R
D
EMER TR
ON
I
N
AUTO
103577450
Lucent
T
N
7
9
2
U
S
E
B
l
a
n
k
98DR07125243
TN792
DUPL INTERFACE
OFF
T
N
7
9
0
B
1
5
8
P
Figure 43.
B
l
a
n
k
T
N
7
9
4
T
N
2
4
0
0
or
b
l
a
n
k
T
N
2
1
8
2
B
T
N
5
7
0
B
T
N
5
7
0
B
T
N
7
9
9
T
N
7
5
5
B
ccdfr8m LJK 121399
Duplicated Control Cabinet (J58890M) (Front)
.
Table 21.
Duplicated Control Cabinet (J58890M) Connectors
Connector
Function
01 to 16 (A01 to A16)
25-pair connectors provide interfaces between port circuit
packs and the cross-connect field or a cable-access panel (if
provided)
TERM (Terminal)
Connects an administration terminal to the processor circuit
pack in the Duplicated Control Cabinet if the duplication
interface circuit pack fails in the control carrier
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
99
J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet
The Expansion Control Cabinet contains ports, a tone-clock, an interface to a port
cabinet, and an optional maintenance interface. It is only in an EPN. See Figure 44 for a
representative example.
The Expansion control Cabinet is the first in an EPN stack of SCCs. It has optional port
circuit packs in port slots 2 to 17. The AC or DC power supply, located at the right side of
the cabinet, supplies power. See Table 22 for the Expansion Control Cabinet rear
connector descriptions.
T
N
2
1
8
2
B
T
N
7
7
5
B
T
N
5
7
0
1
A
T
N
5
7
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
B
L
A
N
K
B
L
A
N
K
16
17
676B
or
WP-91153
POW ER UNIT
CLOCK INTFC INTFC
Port
ccdf0007 RPY 081297
Figure 44.
1
5
8
P
POWER SUPPLY
MTCE TONE- EXPN EXPN
Service
15
1
5
8
P
Expansion Control Cabinet (J58890N) (Front)
Port/Service
(BRG)
Service
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
Table 22.
100
Expansion Control Cabinet (J58890N) Connectors
Connector
Function
1 (A1)
Fiber optic cable interface between an expansion interface (EI)
circuit pack in slot 11 and an EI circuit pack in another PN.
2 to 17 (A2 to A17)
Ports providing interfaces between circuit packs and the
cross-connect field or fiber transceiver
AUX (auxiliary)
Provides interface for customer alarms, attendant console power,
and emergency power transfer panels
TERM (terminal)
Connects an administration terminal to the maintenance circuit
pack
1.
In systems using ATM-PNC, the fiber connectors for the OC-3/STM-1 interfaces to the
ATM switches are located on the faceplates of the TN2305/TN2306 circuit packs.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
101
J58890H Port Cabinet
The Port Cabinet is located in the PPN and in EPNs. It contains ports and an interface to
an Expansion Control Cabinet. The Port Cabinet has optional port circuit packs in port
slots 1 to 18. In a critical-reliability system, these can include a tone-clock circuit pack in
slot 1 and expansion interface circuit packs in slots 2 and 3. A neon power unit can be
installed in slots 17 and 18. See Figure 45 for a representative example.
The AC or DC power supply, located at the right side of the cabinet, supplies power to the
cabinet. See Table 23 for the Port Cabinet rear connector descriptions.
1
5
8
J
B
L
A
N
K
T
N
2
1
8
2
B
1
B
TONECLOCK
T
N
5
7
0
T
N
5
7
0
2
EXPN
INTFC
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
B
L
A
N
K
B
L
A
N
K
17
18
676B
or
WP-91153
POWER UNIT
Port
ccdf0008 RPY 081297
Figure 45.
13
1
5
8
P
POWER SUPPLY
EXPN
INTFC
Port/Service
12
1
5
8
P
Port Cabinet (J58890H) (Front)
Port/Service
(BRG)
Service
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
Table 23.
Issue 1
April 2000
102
Port Cabinet (J58890H) Connectors
Connector
Function
2 to 3 (B2 to B3)
EI port that provides an interface for the fiber optic cable between
the EI circuit pack in slot 21 or 3 and another port network (PN)
1 to 18 (B1 to B18)
Interface ports between circuit packs and the cross-connect field
1.
In systems using ATM-PNC, the fiber connectors for the OC-3/STM-1 interfaces to the
ATM switches are located on the faceplates of the TN2305/TN2306 circuit packs.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
Issue 1
April 2000
103
J58890T Compact Modular Cabinet
(csi model)
The Compact Modular Cabinet is an economical, small-footprint alternative to a SingleCarrier Cabinet. It can mount on a wall or on the floor, and uses an AC-only power supply.
The control carrier contains 2 control slots: the processor has to be in slot 1 and the
tone-clock in slot 2. Slots 3 to 10 can contain optional port and service circuit packs. See
the figure below.
MAJ
MIN
scdfleft KLC 110497
Figure 46.
J58890T Compact Modular Cabinet (csi model) (Left Side)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
104
The connectors on the right side of the cabinet are shown in Figure 47. 1 to 10 25-pair
connectors interface between port circuit packs and the cross-connect field or a cable
access panel.
scdfrf2 KLC 061097
Figure 47.
CMC (J58890T) (Right Side)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Carriers in SCCs
105
Up to three Compact Modular Cabinets can be combined in a single installation. Port and
service circuit packs fill all ten slots in the second and third cabinets. The first cabinet (A)
installs in the middle position, the second cabinet (B) installs on the top, and the third
cabinet (C) installs on the bottom. See Figure 48.
B
A
C
Floor
indf3cmc KLC 110497
Figure 48. Typical Compact Modular Cabinet (csi model) Installation (Front)
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Minimum Cabinet Configurations
106
Minimum Cabinet Configurations
Minimum cabinet configurations in MCCs and in stacks of Single-Carrier Cabinets serve
as the foundations on which to build cabinets in direct-connect systems and Center Stage
Switch (CSS)-connected systems.
NOTE:
The CMC cannot be duplicated but may be connected to other CMC cabinets.
The following are the minimum required circuit packs:
■
Tone-clock
■
Expansion interface (EI)
■
Expansion port network (EPN) maintenance
The following criteria describe a minimum cabinet configuration:
■
Cabinet interconnection options (direct-connect and CSS-connected)
■
System duplication options (standard reliability, high reliability, and critical
reliability)
■
Traffic engineering to determine the number of port networks
Table 24, Table 25 and Table 26 list the minimum required carriers and circuit packs in
PPN and EPN cabinets or cabinet stacks.
Table 24.
Minimum Requirements for PPN Cabinet
Duplication Option
Standard reliability
Connection Option
direct or ATM
CSS
High reliability
direct or ATM
CSS
Critical reliability
direct or ATM
(Category A only)
CSS
ATM Network Duplication ATM
(Category A only)
1.
Control
Carriers
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
Switch Node
Carriers
0
0 or 11
0
0 or 11
0
0 or 21
0
Tone
Clocks
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
The1st SN is located in the PPN (normal) or EPN. The 2nd and 3rd are located in
an EPN to support up to 44 PNs.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Minimum Cabinet Configurations
Table 25.
Minimum Requirements for an EPN Cabinet
ATM or
Expansion
Interfaces
In EPN
Connection Option
Expansion
Control
Carriers
Switch
Node
Carriers
ToneClocks
direct or ATM
1
0
1
Equals
number of
PNs
CSS
1
0 or 11
1
1
direct or ATM
1
0
1
Equals
number of
PNs
CSS
1
0 or 11
1
1
Critical
reliability
(Category A
only)
direct or ATM
1
0
2
Twice
number of
PNs
CSS
1
0 or 21
2
2
ATM
Network
Duplication
(Category A
only)
ATM
1
0
2
2
Duplication
Option
Standard
reliability
High
Reliability
1.
107
The1st SN is located in the PPN (normal) or EPN. The 2nd and 3rd are located in an
EPN to support up to 44 PNs. Up to 3 EPNs can be directly-connected.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Minimum Cabinet Configurations
Table 26.
108
Minimum Requirements for a Two-PN Multi-Carrier Cabinet EPN
(R7r and later)
Duplication
Option
Connection
Option
Control
Carriers
Switch Node
Carriers
Tone-Clocks
ATM or
Expansion
Interfaces
Standard
reliability
direct or
ATM
1
0
2
4
CSS
1
0
2
2
High reliability
direct or
ATM
1
0
2
4
CSS
1
0
2
2
1
0
4
8
CSS
1
0
4
4
ATM Network
ATM
Duplication
(Category A only)
1
0
4
4
Critical reliability direct or
(Category A only) ATM
Standard Reliability Systems
The standard reliability configuration is available in all systems, but it is the only one that
is available for the DEFINITY ECS csi. It has no duplicated hardware, and includes:
■
One control carrier
■
One tone-clock circuit pack per PN
■
Port networks interconnected by single fiber pairs
Optional carriers in the MCCs are port carriers that can be added as required. In R7r or
later, an SN carrier can be added to Position E as required. Optional port carriers are
determined by traffic engineering.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Minimum Cabinet Configurations
109
High Reliability Systems
High reliability systems require:
■
Duplicate control carriers in the PPN cabinet
■
Duplicate PPN tone-clock circuit packs, one in each Control Carrier.
■
One tone-clock circuit pack per EPN
■
Port networks interconnected by single fiber pairs
—
The PPN requires duplicate connectivity to the switch node
—
The switch node requires duplicates switch node clocks. The switch node
carrier is provided in the PPN cabinet for a CSS-connected DEFINITY ECS r.
—
For ATM inter-PN connectivity, the PPN requires two links to the ATM switch
(Category A only).
Critical Reliability Systems (Category A only)
Critical reliability provides full duplication of the SPE, inter-PN connectivity, and
Tone-Clocks. These systems require:
■
Duplicate control Carriers in the PPN cabinet and EPN cabinet
■
Duplicate tone-clock circuit packs in the PPN cabinet and EPN cabinets
■
Port networks interconnected by duplicated cables
—
Direct connect systems use duplicate inter-PN connectivity for each PN (EI
and fiber)
—
Switch connect systems duplicate the CSS and duplicate PN-to-SN
connectivity (one PN fiber to each of the Switch Node Carriers in the
duplicated SN)
—
For a R7r or later ATM inter-PN connectivity the ATM links to the ATM switch
or switches are duplicated. The ATM switches may or may not be duplicated.
This depends on the ATM switch that is being used.
■
Duplicate Switch Node Carriers in the CSS
■
Packet R7 and later systems will require the Maintenance/Test circuit pack.
NOTE:
Critical reliability systems require the duplication of carriers in PPN and EPN
cabinets and cabinet stacks.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Direct Connect Cabinet Configurations
110
ATM Network Duplication (Category A only)
DEFINITY ECS R8r and later ATM Network Duplication systems will require the full
duplication of the inter-PN connectivity and the Tone-Clocks. These systems require:
■
■
Duplicate Tone-Clocks in each Expansion Port Network (EPN)
—
Both the Expansion Control Carrier and the Port Carrier are required in each
EPN, with a Tone-Clock and an ATM interface residing in each of the two
carriers. The MCC and SCC stack are compatible EPNs. The CMC EPN is not
supported.
—
If the PPN has only one SPE complex located in the A carrier of the MCC
cabinet, the recommendation is for the ATM interfaces to be placed in slot 2 of
both the B and C carriers. Another alternative would be to place the ATM
interfaces in slots 2 and 3 of the B carrier. This will result in the loss of
complete connectivity duplication (because of a common power failure group)
and the full advantage that is attainable from the ATM Network Duplication.
Duplicate inter-PN connectivity
—
The ATM links to the ATM switch will be duplicated for inter-PN connectivity
—
The ATM switch or switches may or may not be duplicated, depending on the
ATM switch that is being used.
■
A TN771 facility test pack is required in each PPN of an R8r system. In an ATM
network duplication R8r system, the TN771 is required both in the PPN and in each
EPN.
■
Direct Connect systems are not supported.
Direct Connect Cabinet Configurations
A direct connect system configuration could connect cabinets directly to each other via
fiber optic or copper pairs. There is no intervening switch or hub. A direct connect system
can contain up to 3 port networks, including 1 PPN and 2 EPNs (a port network can
consist of a Single-Carrier Cabinet, a stack of Single-Carrier Cabinets, or a single
Multi-Carrier Cabinet).
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Direct Connect Cabinet Configurations
111
Standard Reliability Systems
Table 27 lists the required EI circuit pack slots, tone-clock circuit pack slots, maintenance
circuit pack slots, and remaining port circuit pack slots in a standard reliability
direct-connect system.
Table 27.
Standard Reliability Direct Connect System
Port Networks
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneService Slots (R8r/si
Clocks Remaining Port Slots and later)
1 PPN only
0
1
89 (si model
80 (r model)
4 (depends on
traffic)
2 (1 PPN and 1 EPN) 2
2
186 (si model)
176 (r model)
8 (depends on
traffic)
3 (1 PPN and 2
EPNs)
3
281 (si model)
271 (r model)
12 (depends on
traffic)
6
High Reliability Systems
High reliability is available on R8si/r and later. Table 28 lists the required EI circuit pack,
tone-clock circuit pack slots, maintenance circuit pack slots, and remaining port circuit
pack slots in a high reliability, direct connect system. In the first cabinet, the EI circuit pack
is not required in a single PN (PPN only) system because no connection to another
cabinet is required.
Table 28.
High Reliability Direct Connect System
Port Networks
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Remaining Port
Slots
Service Slots
1 PPN only
0
2
78 (si model)
60 (r model
3 (depends on
traffic)
2 (1 PPN and 1 EPN) 2
3
175 (si model
156 (r model
7 (depends on
traffic)
3 (1 PPN and 2
EPNs)
4
270 (si model)
251 (r model)
11 (depends on
traffic)
6
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
112
Critical Reliability Systems (R8si/r and later)
(Category A only)
Critical reliability is available on R8si/r and later. Table 29 lists the required EI circuit pack
slots, tone-clock circuit pack slots, and remaining port circuit pack slots in critical
reliability, direct connect systems. The Port Carrier in cabinet 1 is optional in systems with
only 1 PN, but it is required in systems with 2 or 3 PNs.
No EI circuit packs are required for systems with only a PPN because no connection is
required to another cabinet. The EI circuit packs shown in cabinet 1 are shown in their
R8r and later positions. These are installed in the control carriers in cabinet 1.
.
Table 29.
Critical Reliability Direct Connect System
Port Networks
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
1 PPN only
0
2
78 (si model)
60 (r model)
3
1 PPN and 1 EPN
4
4
172 (si model)
154 (r model)
7
1 PPN and 2 EPNs
12
6
262 (si model)
241 (r model)
11
Remaining Port Slots Service Slots
Cabinet Configurations in
CSS-Connected Systems
In this type of system, a Lucent Center Stage Switch serves as a network hub, reducing
the complexity of the interconnections and making more port networks possible. CSSconnected systems support up to 44 PNs.
Standard Reliability Systems
Table 30 lists configurations for a low-traffic, standard-reliability CSS system with up to 3
Switch Node Carriers (SNCs) and up to 44 PNs. Standard reliability systems with 1 SNC
can contain up to 2 DS1 converter circuit packs in the SNC. Standard reliability systems
can only contain 1 maintenance circuit pack.
In most cases, the maximum number of PNs has to be less than the theoretical number
given in the tables to allow for additional connections between SNCs.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
Table 30.
113
Standard Reliability CSS-Connected Systems
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Carriers
Port
Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
3
1
258
9
3
3
4
254
4
1
357
13
4
4
5
352
5
1
456
17
5
5
6
450
6
1
555
21
6
6
7
548
7
1
654
25
7
7
8
646
8
1
753
29
8
8
9
744
9
1
852
33
9
9
10
842
10
1
951
37
10
10
11
940
11
1
1050
41
11
11
12
1038
12
1
1149
45
12
12
13
1136
13
1
1248
49
13
13
14
1234
14
1
1347
53
14
14
15
1332
15
1
1446
57
15
15
16
1430
16
1
1545
61
16
16
17
1528
17
2
1624
65
17
17
18
1606
18
2
1723
69
18
18
19
1704
19
2
1822
73
19
19
20
1802
20
2
1921
77
20
20
21
1900
21
2
2020
81
21
21
22
1998
22
2
2119
85
22
22
23
2096
23
2
2218
89
23
23
24
2194
24
2
2317
93
24
24
25
2292
25
2
2416
97
25
25
26
2390
26
2
2515
101
26
26
27
2488
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
Table 30.
114
Standard Reliability CSS-Connected Systems — Continued
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Port
Carriers Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
27
2
2614
105
27
27
28
2586
28
2
2713
109
28
28
29
2684
29
2
2812
113
29
29
30
2782
30
2
2911
117
30
30
31
2880
31
3
2990
121
31
31
32
2958
32
3
3089
125
32
32
33
3056
33
3
3188
129
33
33
34
3154
34
3
3287
133
34
34
35
3252
35
3
3386
137
35
35
36
3350
36
3
3485
141
36
36
37
3448
37
3
3584
145
37
37
38
3546
38
3
3683
149
38
38
39
3644
39
3
3782
153
39
39
40
3742
40
3
3881
157
40
40
41
3840
41
3
3980
161
41
41
42
3938
42
3
4079
165
42
42
43
4036
43
3
4178
169
43
43
44
4134
44
3
4277
173
44
44
45
4232
Continued on next page
NOTE:
The information provided in Table 30 also applies to ATM-connected
systems, with two exceptions. The number of switch node carriers for all
port networks in an ATM-connected system is 0, and the expansion
interfaces become ATM interfaces. Because the ATM-connected system
does not use switch node carriers, there may be additional slots available
in the switch.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
115
High Reliability Systems
Table 31 lists configurations for a low-traffic, high-reliability, CSS-connected system with
up to 43 PNs with 1 PPN. High reliability systems with 1 Switch Node Carrier can contain
up to 2 DS1 converter circuit packs in the SNC. High reliability systems can contain only 1
maintenance circuit pack.
In most cases, the maximum number of PNs has to be less than the theoretical number
given in the tables to allow for additional connections between SNCs.
Table 31.
High Reliability CSS-Connected Systems
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Port
Carriers Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
3
1
218
10
4
4
5
213
4
1
317
14
5
5
6
311
5
1
416
18
6
6
7
409
6
1
515
22
7
7
8
507
7
1
614
26
8
8
9
605
8
1
713
30
9
9
10
703
9
1
812
34
10
10
11
801
10
1
911
38
11
11
12
899
11
1
1010
42
12
12
13
997
12
1
1109
46
13
13
14
1095
13
1
1208
50
14
14
15
1193
14
1
1307
54
15
15
16
1291
15
1
1406
58
16
16
17
1389
16
2
1485
62
17
17
18
1467
17
2
1584
66
18
18
19
1565
18
2
1683
70
19
19
20
1663
19
2
1782
74
20
20
21
1761
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
Table 31.
116
High Reliability CSS-Connected Systems — Continued
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Port
Carriers Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
20
2
1881
78
21
21
22
1859
21
2
1980
82
22
22
23
1957
22
2
2079
86
23
23
24
2055
23
2
2178
90
24
24
25
2153
24
2
2277
94
25
25
26
2251
25
2
2376
98
26
26
27
2349
26
2
2475
102
27
27
28
2447
27
2
2574
106
28
28
29
2545
28
2
2673
110
29
29
30
2643
29
3
2772
114
30
30
31
2741
30
3
2871
118
31
31
32
2839
31
3
2970
122
32
32
33
2937
32
3
3069
126
33
33
34
3035
33
3
3168
130
34
34
35
3133
34
3
3267
134
35
35
36
3231
35
3
3366
138
36
36
37
3329
36
3
3465
142
37
37
38
3427
37
3
3564
146
38
38
39
3525
38
3
3663
150
39
39
40
3623
39
3
3762
154
40
40
41
3721
40
3
3861
158
41
41
42
3819
41
3
3960
162
42
42
43
3917
42
3
4059
164
43
43
44
4015
43
3
4158
168
44
44
45
4113
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
117
NOTE:
The information provided in Table 31 also applies to ATM-connected
systems (Category A only), with two exceptions. The number of switch
node carriers for all port networks in an ATM-connected system is 0, and
the expansion interfaces become ATM interfaces. Because the
ATM-connected system does not use switch node carriers, there may be
additional slots available in the switch.
Critical Reliability Systems (Category A only)
Table 32 lists configurations for a low traffic, critical reliability CSS-connected system with
up to 44 port networks (PNs). Critical reliability systems have a duplicated Switch Node
Carrier (SNC). Up to 4 DS1 converter circuit packs can be installed, up to 2 per SNC.
Critical reliability systems can contain up to 42 maintenance circuit packs.
In most cases, the maximum number of PNs has to be less than the theoretical number
given in the tables to allow for additional connections between SNCs.
Table 32.
Critical Reliability CSS-Connected Systems
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Port
Carriers Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
3
2
218
9
6
6
10
208
4
2
317
13
8
8
15
302
5
2
416
17
10
10
20
396
6
2
515
21
12
12
25
490
7
2
614
25
14
14
30
584
8
2
713
29
16
16
35
678
9
2
812
33
18
18
40
772
10
2
911
37
20
20
45
866
11
2
1010
41
22
22
50
960
12
2
1109
45
24
24
55
1054
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabinet Configurations in CSS-Connected Systems
Table 32.
118
Critical Reliability CSS-Connected Systems — Continued
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Port
Carriers Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
13
2
1208
49
26
26
60
1148
14
2
1307
53
28
28
65
1242
15
2
1406
57
30
30
70
1336
16
2
1505
61
32
32
75
1430
17
4
1564
65
34
34
80
1484
18
4
1663
69
36
36
85
1578
19
4
1762
73
38
38
90
1672
20
4
1861
77
40
40
95
1766
21
4
1960
81
42
42
100
1860
22
4
2059
85
44
44
105
1954
23
4
2158
89
46
46
110
2048
24
4
2257
93
48
48
115
2142
25
4
2356
97
50
50
120
2236
26
4
2455
101
52
52
125
2330
27
4
2554
105
54
54
130
2424
28
4
2653
109
56
56
135
2518
29
4
2752
113
58
58
140
2612
30
4
2851
117
60
60
145
2706
31
6
2950
121
62
62
150
2800
32
6
3009
125
64
64
155
2854
33
6
3108
129
66
66
160
2948
34
6
3207
133
68
68
165
3042
35
6
3306
137
70
70
170
3136
36
6
3405
141
72
72
175
3230
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabling to On- and Off-Premises Systems
Table 32.
119
Critical Reliability CSS-Connected Systems — Continued
Port
Networks
Switch
Node
Port
Carriers Slots
Service
Slots
Expansion
Interfaces
ToneClocks
Unused
Port
Slots
Remaining
Port Slots
37
6
3504
145
74
74
180
3324
38
6
3603
149
76
76
185
3418
39
6
3702
153
78
78
190
3512
40
6
3801
157
80
80
195
3606
41
6
3900
161
82
82
200
3700
42
6
3999
165
84
84
205
3794
43
6
4098
169
86
86
210
3888
44
6
4197
173
88
88
215
3982
Continued on next page
NOTE:
The information provided in Table 32 also applies to ATM-connected
systems, with two exceptions. The number of switch node carriers for all
port networks in an ATM-connected system is 0, and the expansion
interfaces become ATM interfaces. Because the ATM-connected system
does not use switch node carriers, there may be additional slots available
in the switch.
The ATM links to the ATM switch are duplicated for inter-PN connectivity.
The ATM switches may or may not be duplicated, depending on the ATM
switch that is being used. Table 32 also applies to ATM network duplication.
Cabling to On- and Off-Premises
Systems
Cabling from the system to on-premises and off-premises systems establishes
communications paths between the system’s line port circuits and trunk port circuits to
external trunks, lines, and DTE equipment. The cabling from the system routes to the
following:
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Cabling to On- and Off-Premises Systems
120
Cabling to On- and Off-Premises
Systems
Cabling from the system to on-premises and off-premises systems establishes
communications paths between the system’s line port circuits and trunk port circuits to
external trunks, lines, and DTE equipment. The cabling from the system routes to the
following:
■
Through the network interface to off-premises trunks and lines going to the Central
Office (CO) and remote equipment
■
Premises (house) wiring (data lines) going to information outlets (modular jacks)
used for DTE and on-premises station sets
Cross-connect fields are termination points for equipment cabling and distribution
cabling. Connections are made between those termination points to establish
communications paths throughout the system. Two major types of distribution frames are:
■
The cross-connect field is the field on which terminations and cross-connections for
CO trunks, equipment cabling, and distribution cabling are made.
■
The Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) is any cross-connect field between the
main cross-connect field and the endpoint workstations. The terminations and
cross-connections are made for the distribution cabling from the cross-connect
field, from other IDFs, and from the site wiring from information outlets.
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
This section describes the circuit packs and related hardware in DEFINITY Systems. The
circuit packs are listed by apparatus code in Table 34. After the table, the circuit packs
and their functions are provided.
All circuit packs are approximately 8 in. (20 cm) by 13 in. (33 cm). The following
connectors attach to 1 end of a circuit pack: 200-pin connector to a TN-labeled circuit
pack and a 300-pin connector to a UN-labeled circuit pack.
Faceplates on the circuit packs are sized to fill the width of a slot, typically 0.75 inches
(1.9 cm). Each circuit pack faceplate has a standard pattern of 3 LEDs that indicate the
following conditions:
■
Red indicates a fault condition
■
Green indicates a test condition
■
Yellow indicates a busy condition
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
121
A special grounding latch on each circuit pack protects it from electrostatic discharge
during installation and removal.
! CAUTION:
A wrist strap must be worn when handling any circuit pack. A ground jack is
provided on each cabinet for this purpose.
Color coding
Port circuit packs and slots are now gray rather than purple. During the transition
between the old and new schemes, gray and purple circuit packs are interchangeable.
Control circuit packs and slots are white.
Types of Circuit Packs
NOTE:
The purple-colored and white-colored circuit packs and slots are being replaced
by circuit packs and slots labeled with gray and white rectangles, respectively. A
label with a solid gray rectangle indicates a port slot/circuit pack. A label with an
outlined white rectangle indicates a control slot/circuit pack.
■
Port: colored purple or labeled with a gray rectangle and can accept any purple or
gray-labeled circuit pack
■
Control: colored white or labeled with an outlined white rectangle and can accept
only a circuit pack assigned to that slot
■
Service: colored purple or labeled with a gray rectangle; is a special type of circuit
pack that does not have an I/O connector
Four types of circuit packs are installed in carriers:
1. Port circuit packs provide links between analog and digital lines, trunks, networks,
external communications equipment, and the TDM bus and packet bus. These
circuit packs install in any gray port slot.
2. Control circuit packs include processor, memory, network control, disk control, tape
control, protocol interfaces, duplication, and maintenance. These circuit packs
install in dedicated white slots in the control carrier and do not operate in any other
slots.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
122
3. Service circuit packs produce and detect tones, synthesize speech, classify calls,
record announcements, and allow system access for administration and
troubleshooting. These circuit packs install in any port slot.
4. Power Converter circuit packs supply DC voltages to port, control, and service
circuit packs. These circuit packs install in dedicated white slots only.
Port Circuit Packs
The components common to all port circuit packs are:
■
Bus buffers
■
Sanity and control interface (Random Access Memory (RAM)
■
Network processing elements (NPEs) or switch conferencing for Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM) in concentration highway (SCOTCH NPE)
Bus Buffers
The bus buffers are the digital interface between the TDM bus wires on the backplane
and the circuitry on the circuit pack. They receive or transmit on either of the two 8-bit
TDM buses.
SAKI
The sanity and control interface (SAKI) is the circuit pack interface to the TDM bus. It
receives control channel information from the bus and sends the information to the
microprocessor. Conversely, the microprocessor sends control channel information to the
SAKI, which sends it to the TDM bus.
The SAKI also controls status indicator LEDs on the circuit pack, initiates start-up
procedures when power is turned on, checks the circuit pack’s microprocessor for sanity,
and re-initializes the microprocessor in case of problems. If a problem is detected, the
SAKI takes the defective circuit pack out of service either on command from the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) or when the SAKI determines that interference is present in
control time slots on the circuit pack.
Microprocessor with External RAM
The microprocessor performs all low-level functions such as scanning for changes and
relay operations. In general, the microprocessor carries out commands received from the
SPE and reports status changes to the SPE. Some port circuit packs contain more than 1
microprocessor. The external RAM stores control channel information and port-related
information.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
123
Network Processing Elements (NPEs)
The NPEs, or a high-density SCOTCH, perform conference and gain-adjustment
functions. An NPE (under control from the microprocessor) can connect a port circuit to
any TDM bus time slot. Each port circuit pack has from 1 to 6 NPEs or a SCOTCH NPE.
International Consolidation (I-CON)
TN791, TN2793, TN2214 and TN2215 are new circuit packs for export outside of the
United States and Canada. The circuit packs are functionally identical to the TN746B,
TN793, and TN2224 circuit packs.
International Consolidation circuit packs work in Offer Category A systems outside of the
US and Canada and in Offer Category B (DEFINITY BCS or Guestworks) systems. When
an International Consolidation circuit pack is inserted into a Category A system with the
Location field set to 1 (US and Canada), the system fails to recognize the circuit pack
and generates a major alarm (error code 276).
Table 33.
I-CON Circuit Packs
US and Canada
Category A
International Category A or B,
US and Canada Category B only Description
TN746B
TN791
16 port analog line
TN793/TN793B
TN2793/TN2793B
24 port analog line
TN2224B
TN2214B
24 port digital line
TN2183
TN2215
16 port analog line
(Australia, China, and
Western Europe only)
TN464F (US and
Canada Category A
only)
TN2464
DS1
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
124
Circuit Packs in DEFINITY
Table 34 lists the circuit packs by apparatus code. After the table, circuit pack functions
are detailed.
Table 45 lists the available adjuncts. After the table, information briefly describes the
adjunct functions.
Table 34.
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
631DA1 AC
Power Unit
(Multi-Carrier
Cabinet)
AC Power Unit (MCC) (+5V, 60A)
Power
631DB1
AC Power Unit (MCC) (-48V/-5V,8A)
Power
644A1
(Replaced by 649A in R7 and later systems)
DC Power Unit (MCC) (+5V, 60A)
Power
645B1
(Replaced by 649A in R7 and later systems)
DC Power Unit (MCC) (-48V, 8A)
Power
649A
DC Power Unit (MCC) (-5, +5, -48V)
Power
(in a port carrier, a single 649A replaces both the 644A1
and 645B1 power units)
650A
AC Power Unit (CMC)
Power
1217A
AC Power Supply for Single-Carrier Cabinets
Power
676C
DC Power Supply (Single Carrier Cabinet)
Power
982LS
Current Limiter for si only (PPN)
Power
CFY1B
Current Limiter for r only
Power
ED-1E546
DEFINITY AUDIX R3 (Circuit-Pack Assembly)
(being replaced by ED-1E568)
Application
ED-1E546
CallVisor ASAI/DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1
(Circuit-Pack Assembly) (being replaced by
J58890MA-1)
Application
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
125
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
ED-1E568
DEFINITY AUDIX R4 (Circuit Pack Assembly)
(replaces ED-1E546)
Application
J58890MA-1
Multi Application Platform DEFINITY (Circuit Pack
Assembly)
Application
List 2 for Call Visor, ASAI, LAN Gateway R2
List 10 for IP Trunk
List 20 for CV ASAI, CentreVu Computer Telephony,
BCMS Vu
List 30 for IP Solutions
NAA1
Fiber Optic Cable Adapter for R7 or later (CMC)
TN417
Auxiliary Trunk (replaced by TN763D)
Trunk
TN419B
Tone-Clock (Italy, Australia and the United Kingdom,
replaced by TN2182B)
Control
TN420B/ C
Tone Detector (replaced by TN2182B or TN744D)
Service
TN429B
DIOD Trunk (Japan)
Trunk
TN429C
CO Trunk (with CAMA)
Trunk
TN429D
DIOD/CO Trunk (with CAMA and US/Japan ICLID)
Trunk
TN433
Speech Synthesizer (Italian)
Service
TN436B
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (Australia)
Trunk
TN437
Tie Trunk (Australia, replaced by TN760D)
Trunk
TN438B
Central Office Trunk (Australia)
Trunk
TN439
Tie Trunk (Australia and Japan)
Trunk
TN447
Central Office Trunk (United Kingdom, replaced by
TN2147C)
Trunk
TN457
Speech Synthesizer, British English
Service
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
126
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
TN458
Tie Trunk for the United Kingdom (replaced by
TN760D)
Trunk
TN459B
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk for the United Kingdom
Trunk
TN464C/D/E/F
DS1 Interface (T1 (24-Channel) or E1 (32-Channel))
Trunk
TN465B/C
Central Office Trunk (Multi-Country, 16 kHz PPM)
Trunk
TN467
Analog Line for the United Kingdom and Australia
(replaced by TN2183)
Line
TN468B
Analog Line for the United Kingdom and Australia
(replaced by TN2183) (16 ports)
Line
TN479
Analog Line (16 ports)
Line
TN497 Tie Trunk Tie Trunk (Italy, TGU/TGE/TGI)
for ItalyTN497
Trunk
TN553
Packet Data Line
Line
TN556B/C/D
ISDN Line (12-BRI-S-NT)
Line
TN566B
Multi-Function Board (See ED-1E546)
Application
TN567
Multi-Function Board (See ED-1E546)
Application
TN568
DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice Mail System (see
ED-1E568)
Application
TN570B/C
Expansion Interface
Network
TN572
Switch-Node Clock for the r model only
Control
TN573B
Switch-Node Interface for the r model only
Control
TN574
DS1 Converter (replaced by TN1654) (r model V2 and
later)
Port
TN577
Packet Gateway (r model only)
Port
TN722B
DS1 Tie Trunk (replaced by TN767B/C/D/E) (24 ports)
Trunk
TN725B
Speech Synthesizer, United States English
Service
TN726B
Data Line (8 ports)
Line
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
127
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
TN735
MET Line (4 ports)
Line
TN742
Analog Line (8 ports) (replaced by TN746B)
Line
TN744B/C/D
Call Classifier Tone Detector, Multi-Country
Service
TN746B
Analog Line (US and Canada Offer A Only) (16 ports)
Line
TN747B
Central Office Trunk(8)
Trunk
TN748B/C/D
Tone Detector (replaced by TN2182B)
Service
TN750B/C
Announcement
Service
TN753B
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (8 ports)
Trunk
TN754B/C
Digital Line (8-4w DCP)
Line
TN755B
Neon Power Unit (all models except csi)
Power
TN756
Tone Detector/Generator (XE) (replaced by TN2182B)
Service
TN758
Pooled Modem (2 ports)
Port
TN760D/E
Tie Trunk (4 ports)
Trunk
TN762B
Hybrid Line (8 ports)
Line
TN763B/C/D
Auxiliary Trunk (4 ports)
Trunk
TN765
Processor Interface (replaced by TN794 and
TN799/TN799B) for si only
Control
TN767B/C/D/E
DS1 Interface (T1, 24 Channel)
Trunk
TN768
Tone-Clock (replaced by TN2182B)
Control
TN769
Analog Line (8 ports) (Neon)
Line
TN771B/C/D
Maintenance Test
Service
TN772
Duplication Interface (R6 LAN si bus and earlier)
Control
TN775B/C
Maintenance (EPN)
Service
TN776
Expansion Interface (si only)
Network
TN777B
Network Control (R6 and earlier) (replaced by TN794)
for si only
Control
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
128
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
TN778
Packet Control (R6 and some earlier) for si only
(replaced by TN794)
Control
TN780
Tone Clock (all models except csi, Stratum 3)
Control
TN786B
Processor (G3V4si and earlier)
Service
TN787F/G/H/J/K Multimedia Interface
Service
TN788B
Voice Conditioner (Multimedia)
Service
TN789
Radio Controller
Port
TN790
Processor (R6 si and some earlier)
Control
TN790B
Processor (R7 si and later)
Control
TN791
Analog Guest Line (16 Port, International Offers or US
and Canada Category B only)
Line
TN792
Duplication Interface (for TN790B Processor Circuit
Packs, si only)
Control
TN793B
24-Port 2-Wire Analog Line with Caller ID
Line
TN794
Network Control/Packet Interface for si only (R7 and
later
Control
TN794/TN2400
Sandwich Assembly Board for R7si and later upgrades Control
when the Control Cabinet is being reused
TN795
Processor (DEFINITY ONE)
Control
TN797
Analog CO Trunk and Line (Combo 8 port similar to
TN747B)
Line
TN798B
Processor (csi)
Control
TN799/TN799B
Control LAN (C-LAN) Interface
Network
TN801 MAPD
(LAN Gateway
Interface)
MAPD for LAN Gateway Interface for CTI, CallVisor,
PC/LAN (see J58890MA)
Application
TN802/TN802B
MAPD
IP Interface Assembly for IP Solutions, including IP
Trunking and IP Softphones (see J58890MA)
Application
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
129
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
TN803
MAPD for CTI, CentreVu CT, BCMS Vu, Ursa Minor
Centaurus (see J58890MA)
Application
TN1648B
System Access and Maintenance (SYSAM) for r only
Control
TN1650B
Memory (32MB) for r only
Control
TN1654
DS1 Converter, T1 (24-Channel) and E1 (32-Channel)
Trunk
TN1655
Packet Interface (r model V1 and later)
Control
TN1656
Tape Drive (R8r and earlier) (replaced by TN2211 in R8 Control
and later)
TN1657
Disk Drive (r model V1 and later)
Control
TN2135
Analog Line for Italy (16 Port, replaced by TN2183))
Line
TN2136
Digital Line (2-Wire DCP 8 ports, replaced by TN2181
and TN2224/Tn2214)
Line
TN2138
Central Office Trunk (Italy, Loop Start)
Trunk
TN2139
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (Italy)
Trunk
TN2140B
Tie Trunk (Hungary and Italy, 4 wire E&M)
Port
TN2144
Analog Line (The Netherlands, replaced by TN2183)
(16 port)
Line
TN2146
Direct Inward Dialing trunk (Belgium and The
Netherlands)
Trunk
TN2147C
Central Office Trunk (without PPM, replaces TN447)
Trunk
TN2149
Analog Line for Belgium (replaced by TN2183) (16 port) Line
TN2169
Alarm Board (See ED-1E546)
Service
TN2170
Ethernet Alarm Board (See ED-1E546)
Service
TN2180
Analog Line for Spain and Germany (replaced by
TN2183)
Line
TN2181
Digital Line (16-ports DCP-2-Wire)
Line
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
130
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
TN2182B
Tone-Clock (Tone Detector, Tone Generator and Call
Classifier (replaces TN419B, TN748B/C/D, TN756 and
TN768 (superset of TN744D)
Control
TN2183
Analog line, Multi Country with DSLAC (replaces
TN467, TN460, TN2144, TN2146)
Line
TN2184
DIOD Trunk (Germany)
Trunk
TN2185B
ISDN (4-Wire S/T-TE Interface, 8 ports)
Line/Trunk
TN2198
ISDN Line (4-Wire BRI-U-NT, 8 ports)
Line
TN2199
Central Office Trunk (Russia)
Trunk
TN2202
50 Hz Balanced Ring Generator (France) (MCC)
Power
TN2207
DS1 Interface (T1 (24-Channel) and E1 (32 Channel)
with DS1 Adjunct Interface)
Trunk
TN2208
Multi-Function Board (see ED-1E546, CallVisor
ASAI/DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 (Circuit-Pack
Assembly))
Multifunction
TN2209
Tie Trunk (Russia)
Trunk
TN2210
Tone Generator (1780 Hz)
Service
TN2211
Optical Drive (R8, replaces TN1656)
Control
TN2214B
Digital Line (24-Port, 2-Wire DCP, International Offers
or US and Canada Category B only)
Line
TN2215/TN2183 Analog line (16-Port Programmable impedance,
International Offers or US and Canada Category B
only)
Line
TN2224B
Digital Line (24-Port, 2-Wire DCP)
Line
TN2238
ATM Interface (Multi-Mode Fiber, Port Network
Connectivity, replaced by TN2305 in R7)
Trunk or
Application
TN2242
Digital Trunk (Japan - 2MB TTC)
Trunk
TN2301
Logic Switch (for R6r or later, Survivable Remote EPN) Service
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 34.
131
Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules — Continued
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
TN2305
DEFINITY ATM Interface (Multi-Mode fiber, Port
Network Connectivity, CES Trunk)
Trunk or
Application
TN2306
DEFINITY ATM Interface (Single-Mode Fiber, Port
Network Connectivity, CES Trunk))
Trunk or
Application
TN2308
Direct Inward Dialing (Brazil)
Trunk
TN2313
DS1 Interface (US (24-Channel) and
International (32-Channel))
TN2400
Net/Pkt Backplane Connection (See TN794/TN2400)
Control
TN2464
DS1 Interface (1 (24-Channel) /E1 (32-Channel,
International Offers or US and Canada Category B
only))
Trunk
TN2793/
24-Port, 2-Wire Analog Line with Caller ID (International Line
Offers or US and Canada Category B only, with US
CLID)
TN2793B
TN-CCSC-1
PRI to DASS Converter
Service
TN-CCSC-2
PRI to DPNSS Converter
Service
TN-C7
PRI to SS7 Converter
Service
TN-CIN
CIN Voice Multiplexer
Service
UN330B
Duplication Interface (r model V1 and later)
Control
UN331B
Processor (r model V1 and later)
Control
UN332B
MSS Network Control (R7r and earlier)
Control
UN332C
MSS Network Control (used with the TN2211 Optical
Drive) (R8r or later)
Control
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
132
631DA1 AC Power Unit (Multi-Carrier
Cabinet)
The 631DA1 accepts 120 VAC 60 Hz and produces the +5 VDC at 60 A available on the
carrier backplanes.
If the AC input power fails, the unit converts 144 VDC from the optional batteries in the
AC power distribution unit to +5 VDC. A circuit in the battery charger detects the highest
equivalent AC or DC input voltage and switches in the correct input voltage.
631DB1 AC Power Unit (MCC)
The 631D B1 accepts 120 VAC 60 Hz and produces –48 VDC at 8 A and –5 VDC at 6 A
available on the carrier backplanes. The –48 VDC also supplies power to the cabinet
fans.
If the AC input power fails, the unit converts 144 VDC from the optional batteries in the
AC power distribution unit to –48 VDC and –5 VDC. A circuit in the optional battery
charger detects the highest equivalent AC or DC input voltage and switches in the correct
input voltage.
644A1 DC Power Unit (MCC)
The 644A1 converts a –48-VDC input to a +5 VDC output at 60 A. The +5 VDC is
distributed on the carrier backplanes to circuit pack slots in the carriers.
645B1 DC Power Unit (MCC)
The 645 B1 converts a –48 VDC input to outputs of –48 VDC at 8 A and –5 VDC at 6 A.
The –48 VDC and –5 VDC are distributed on the carrier backplanes to circuit pack slots in
the carriers.
649A DC Power Unit (MCC)
The 649A power converter converts a –48 VDC input into outputs of –48 VDC at 10 A, +5
VDC, and –5 VDC at 6 A. The outputs are distributed to circuit pack slots in the carriers.
Only one 649A converter is required per carrier except for SN carriers. SN carriers
require 2 converters; 1 on each end. The use of the 649A also allows an increase in the
number of terminals supported per carrier.
The 649A is not compatible with the 644A or the 645B power converters and is used in
R7 or later systems.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
133
650A AC Power Unit (CMC)
The 650 A is a global power-factor-corrected AC/DC converter providing multiple DC
outputs and AC ring outputs. The unit is autoranging and accepts 85-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz
AC input, and provides 330 Watts total output. The unit provides multiple DC outputs as
follows:
■
+5.1 VDC, 28 A
■
-5.1 VDC, 1.0 A
■
-48 VDC, 4.5 A
■
+8 to +14 VDC, 1.6 A (fan speed control)
■
-150/-115 VDC, 200 mA (neon bus)
The power unit has 3 switch-selectable ring outputs:
■
85 VAC RMS, 80 mA, 20 Hz, centered about -48 VDC, 180 mA
■
72 VAC RMS, 8 to 80 mA, 25 Hz, centered about -48 VDC, 180 mA
■
Two 28 VAC RMS (56 V eff), 220 mA, 50 Hz biased about -48 VDC and 0 VDC, 70
mA balanced
The fan speed is controlled by the +8 to +14 VDC (+12 VDC nominal). The output voltage
is a function of the ambient inlet air temperature at the bottom of the power supply. The
fan output voltage is +14 VDC if the FANALM signal is active.
1217A AC Power Supply for Single-Carrier
Cabinets
The 1217A power supply provides additional protection to your equipment in the event of
an overload. Overloads trigger a power-supply alarm, but the system’s cooling fans
continue to run, and the power supply continues to function. The new power supply
replaces the WP-51193 L3 and L4-25. It is fully backward compatible.
The 1217A is a power factor-corrected, 50/60-Hz, autoranging (90-264 VAC) input,
multi-output power supply providing regulated DC output and switch-selectable 20/25-Hz
AC Ringer output voltages. It meets the harmonic distortion requirements of IEC1000-3-2
(PFC), the immunity requirements of IEC 1000-4, and the safety requirements of IEC
950, as well as current UL and CSA requirements.
The 1217A mounts in the power supply slot of the carrier. A power cord with a 3-prong
plug on one end connects the supply to a dedicated, AC power source.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
134
676C DC Power Supply (Single Carrier
Cabinet)
A –48 VDC source supplies power to the DC power supply at up to 25 A. The 676C
produces the following DC outputs: +5 VDC, –5 VDC, –48 VDC, and +12 VDC. The DC
outputs are distributed on the cabinet backplane to the slots for the circuit packs. The AC
ringing voltage output value and frequency depend on the country of use. The power
supply has circuit breakers and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filtering.
982LS Current Limiter for R7si or later (PPN)
The 982LS connects to the rear of the processor circuit pack slot only in the PPN in R8si.
The 982LS provides current-limited accessory 48 VDC, emergency transfer logic,
current-limited 5 VDC to trip main circuit breaker if high temperature is detected, and
duplicated 48 VDC to fans in the PPN cabinet.
CFY1B Current Limiter for R7r or later
The CFY1B is only in: R7r or later PPNs, MCC EPNs, and single-carrier cabinet EPNs.
The unit connects to the rear of the maintenance circuit pack slot and provides
current-limited accessory 48 VDC, emergency transfer logic, current-limited 5 VDC to trip
the main circuit breaker if high temperature is detected, and duplicated 48 VDC to fans in
the EPN cabinet.
ED-1E546 DEFINITY AUDIX R3
(Circuit-Pack Assembly) (being replaced by
ED-1E568)
The DEFINITY AUDIX R3 system allows a person to record and exchange voice
messages over the telephone when direct communication is inconvenient or
unnecessary. The unit installs in 5 adjacent slots in a carrier and contains up to 16 ports.
The TN566/B Alarm and TN567 multifunction circuit pack holds the CPU, controllers,
memory devices, and signal processors. TN566B circuit pack operates with the TN2169
alarm circuit pack to provide monitoring for system power and environmental status, –48
VDC to +12 VDC power conversion for the disk drive and tape drive, and remote terminal
access. The TN2170 alarm circuit pack provides a connection to an external LAN in
addition to all of the functions provided by the TN2169.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
135
The 160 Mbyte or 600 Mbyte tape drive data cassette recorder distributes software onto a
disk, stores periodic backups of data, installs software releases, and removes core
dumps and other maintenance information. A 148, 248, 456, 800 Mbyte, or 1 Gbyte disk
drive stores customer data, boots the system, and logs system error information.
Depending on the disk drive sizes, the unit can handle from 300 to 2000 local and
remotely administered subscribers.
Refer to the DEFINITY AUDIX System, System Description, 585-300-205, for more
information.
ED-1E546 CallVisor ASAI/DEFINITY LAN
Gateway R1 (Circuit-Pack Assembly) (being
replaced by J58890MA-1)
ED-1E546 transports ASAI links between a DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 system and an
Ethernet LAN. This unit installs in 5 adjacent slots in a carrier; preferably, the 5 rightmost
slots. It is available for all systems except R6 or later csi.
The TN2208 Multi-function circuit pack holds the CPU, controller, and memory devices.
The TN2208 operates with the TN2170 Alarm with Ethernet Interface circuit pack to
provide monitoring for system power and environmental status, –48 VDC to +12 VDC
power conversion for the disk drive and tape drive, and remote terminal access.
The mass storage/cabling combination provides an interface to a 160-Mb tape drive, a
456-Mb disk drive, and associated I/O cables. All application-specific labeling is provided,
as required.
ED-1E568 DEFINITY AUDIX R4
(Circuit-Pack Assembly)
The ED-1E568 circuit-pack assembly replaces the ED-1E546.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
136
J58890MA-1 Multi Application Platform
DEFINITY (Circuit-Pack Assembly)
The J58890MA-1 is a variation of the MAPD platform that transports ASAI links between
a DEFINITY LAN gateway R2 system and an Ethernet LAN. The J58890MA-1
circuit-pack assembly uses the TN801B MAPD (LAN Gateway Interface), a circuit pack
built from industry-standard PC processors, interfaces, buses, and ISA/PCI expansion
boards. The unit takes up 3 adjacent slots unless placed in slots 6 and 7 — then it uses
only those two slots (in the CMC). J58890MA-1 supports all releases after R6.3.1.
J58890MA-1 List 2 is used to support CallVisor and ASAI, while List 10 supports IP
Trunking. Ursa Minor is supported by J58890MA-1 List 20 and IP solutions is supported
by J58890MA-1 List 30.
NAA1 Fiber Optic Cable Adaptor for R7 or
later (CMC)
The NAA1 adapter reroutes fiber-optic cable from the front of an ATM circuit pack to the
rear of an R7 or later csi Compact Modular Cabinet. While it looks like a circuit pack, it is
electrically and optically passive.
TN417 Auxiliary Trunk (replaced by TN763D)
The TN763D auxiliary trunk circuit pack replaces the TN417.
TN419B Tone-Clock for Italy, Australia, and
the United Kingdom (replaced by TN2182B)
The TN419B is replaced by the TN2182 tone clock - tone detector and call classifier
circuit pack.
TN420B/C Tone Detector (replaced by
TN2182B or TN744D)
The TN2182 tone clock-tone detector and call classifier or the TN744D call
classifier-detector circuit pack replace the TN420B/C.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
137
TN429B/C/D DIOD and/or Central Office
Trunk
TN429B circuit pack provide 8 ports for direct inward/outward dialing (DIOD) trunks.
Each port provides a 2-wire interface to the central office (CO) public exchange for
incoming and outgoing calls. This circuit pack is required for the Japan ANI feature where
the calling number passes through to the DEFINITY System. An in-band
detector/converter may be required. Contact your Lucent Technologies representative.
TN429C circuit packs provide 8 ports for direct inward/outward dialing (DIOD) trunks.
Each port provides a 2-wire interface to the central office (CO) public exchange for
incoming and outgoing calls. The TN744D or TN2182B work with TN429C to provide tone
generation and tone detection. Upon seizing out, dial tone from the CO passes through
the TN429C to a tone detector. The TN429C provides the required CO disconnect
functions as well as the interface to CAMA/E911.
TN429D (ICLID incoming call line identification) provides 8 ports for direct
inward/outward dialing (DIOD) trunks. Each port provides a 2-wire interface to the central
office (CO) public exchange for incoming and outgoing calls. The CO provides caller
names and numbers to the TN429D, which displays them on DEFINITY digital voice
terminals (DCP and BRI) equipped with a 32- or 40-character alphanumeric display, and
with System 25/MERLIN 7315H and 7317H terminals supported by DEFINITY. This
feature is supported in the United States (name and number) and Japan (number only)
and countries that comply with either requirements.
TN433 Speech Synthesizer, Italian
The TN433 provides 4 ports that retrieve fixed messages for leave word calling,
Automatic wakeup, and visually impaired attendant console features. Examples of the
messages are: good morning, time-of-day, and extension number. Each of the ports has
touch-tone detection. The TN433 has administrable µ-Law and A-Law companding.
TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk for
Australia
The TN436B provides 8 ports for direct inward Dialing (DID) independently connected to
a public network. Each port is an interface between a 2-wire analog line from a CO and
the 4-wire TDM network in the system. The TN436B has administrable timers.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
138
TN437 Tie Trunk for Australia (replaced by
TN760D)
The TN437 is replaced by the TN760D tie trunk circuit pack.
TN438B Central Office Trunk for Australia
The TN438B provides 8 ports for loop-start CO trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal
leads. The TN438B can detect 12 kHz and 50 Hz periodic metering pulses from the CO.
Additional features include call still held timing and automatic guard fault detection
circuitry.
TN439 Tie Trunk for Australia and Japan
The TN439 provides 4 ports for 2-wire tie trunks with loop disconnect signaling. The
TN439 has administrable A-Law and µ-Law companding and administrable timers.
TN447 Central Office Trunk for the United
Kingdom (replaced by TN2147C)
The TN2147C central office trunk circuit pack replaces the TN447.
TN457 Speech Synthesizer, British English
The TN457 provides 4 ports that retrieve fixed United Kingdom-accent spoken messages
for leave word calling, automatic wakeup, and visually impaired attendant console
features. Examples of messages are: good morning, time-of-day, and extension number.
Each of the ports has touch-tone detection. The TN457 has administrable A-Law and
µ-Law companding.
TN458 Tie Trunk for the United Kingdom
(replaced by TN760D)
The TN458 is replaced by the TN760D tie trunk circuit pack.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
139
TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk for the
United Kingdom
The TN459B provides 8 ports for immediate-start or wink-start direct inward dialing (DID)
trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal leads. Each port is an interface between a 2-wire
analog line from a CO and the 4-wire TDM network in the system. The TN459B has
administrable timers and a backward busy circuit that complies with signaling
requirements.
TN464C/D/E/F DS1 Interface, T1 (24-Channel)
or E1 (32-Channel)
All TN464 circuit packs provide
■
Board-level, administrable A-Law or µ-Law companding
■
CRC-4 generation and checking (E1 only)
■
Stratum 3 clock capability
■
ISDN-PRI T1 or E1 connectivity
The TN778 packet-control circuit pack and the TN765 processor interface (R7 or
later si) or TN1655 packet interface (R7 or later r) handle D-channel signaling for
the TN464.
■
Line-out (LO) and line-in (LI) signal leads (unpolarized, balanced pairs).
■
Support for CO, TIE, DID, and off-premises station (OPS) port types that use
robbed-bit signaling protocol, proprietary bit-oriented signaling (BOS) 24th channel
signaling protocol, or DMI-BOS 24th channel signaling protocol
■
Support for Russian incoming ANI (R7 or later)
TN464C and later circuit packs can be used as universal, digital, signal level-1 boards
in wideband ISDN-PRI applications.
TN464E and later circuit packs provide test-jack access to the DS1 or E1 line and
support the 120A Integrated Channel Service Unit (CSU) module.
TN464F (US and Canada Offer A Only) circuit packs use the enhanced
maintenance capabilities of the integrated channel service unit (ICSU). These circuit
packs can communicate with CONVERSANT®. See TN2185B.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
140
TN465B/C Central Office Trunk,
Multi-Country
TN465B/C circuit packs support 8 analog CO trunk ports, loop-start trunk signaling,
12-kHz and 16-kHz periodic pulse metering (PPM) detection and counting, and
administrable timers.
TN465B circuit packs provide battery reversed signaling.
TN465C circuit packs provide multi-country selectable signaling. For more information,
contact your Lucent Technologies representative.
TN467 Analog Line for the United Kingdom
and Australia (replaced by TN2183)
The TN467 is replaced by the TN2183 analog line circuit pack.
TN468B Analog Line for the United Kingdom
and Australia (replaced by TN2183)
The TN468B is replaced by the TN2183 analog line circuit pack.
TN479 Analog Line
The TN479 has 16 ports and supports 3 ringer loads and 3 simultaneous ringing ports.
Only 1 voice terminal can have an LED message-waiting indicator (neon
message-waiting indicators are not supported). The TN479 supports µ-Law companding.
The TN479 supports the terminals listed below.
Table 35.
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN479
Terminal
500-Type
2500-Type
Wire Size (metric area/diameter)
Maximum Range
2/0.5
mm)
3,000 ft. (914 m)
2/0.5
mm)
3,000 ft. (914 m)
2/0.5
mm)
3,000 ft. (914 m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
7100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
7101A-Series
not supported
not supported
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 35.
141
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN479 — Continued
Terminal
Wire Size (metric area/diameter)
Maximum Range
7103A-Series
not supported
not supported
2/0.5
8100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
mm)
2,500 (762 m)
9100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
2,500 (762 m)
Continued on next page
TN497 Tie Trunk for Italy
The TN553 has 12 ports that can connect through a cross-connect field to a TN726B
circuit pack and provides software-administrable connections between the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) and system access ports. Inside the system, the TN553
connects to the packet bus and converts mode-2 protocol to mode-3 protocol connecting
the TN726B to the TDM bus for asynchronous Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
connections to adjuncts.
TN553 Packet Data Line
The TN553 has 12 ports that can connect through a cross-connect field to a TN726B
circuit pack and provides software-administrable connections between the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) and system access ports. Inside the system, the TN553
connects to the packet bus and converts mode-2 protocol to mode-3 protocol connecting
the TN726B to the TDM bus for asynchronous Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
connections to adjuncts.
TN556B/C/D ISDN-BRI 4-Wire S/T-NT
Interface
The TN556 has 12 ports connecting to ISDN-BRI terminals. Each port on a TN556 has
TXT, TXR, PXT, and PXR signal leads. Up to 8 ports can be used for Adjunct Switch
Application Interface (ASAI) links. Each port operates at 192 kbps per second and has 2
B-channels and 1 D-channel (not used to carry data).
The TN556 has a range of up to 1900 feet (579 m) maximum from the system to the voice
terminal using 24 AWG (0.20 mm2/0.51 mm) wire, and uses standard ANSI T1.605
protocol. The TN556 also has multipoint support; 24 terminals can be connected, where
each terminal uses 1 B-channel and shares the D-channel. In multi-support applications,
2 voice terminals, or 1 voice terminal and 1 data terminal, or 2 data terminals can connect
to each port.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
142
The TN556 circuit pack supports A-Law or µ-Law companding. The TN556 also functions
as a trunk, connecting to a TE interface (example: a TN2185B in another DEFINITY
ECS). It can be used for lines and trunks simultaneously (on the same circuit pack).
TN556C are required for ISDN BRI service under R7 or later csi.
TN556D circuit packs provide end-to-end outpulse signaling when the circuit pack is in
tie-trunk mode with a TN2185B.
TN566B Multi-Function Board (see
ED-1E546)
A component of ED-1E546, the DEFINITY AUDIX R3 (Circuit-Pack Assembly) (being
replaced by ED-1E568). The TN566B monitors system power and environmental status,
-48 VDC to +12 VDC power conversion for the disk drive and tape drive, and remote
terminal access.
TN567 Multi-Function Board (see ED-1E546)
A component of ED-1E546, the DEFINITY AUDIX R3 (Circuit-Pack Assembly) (being
replaced by ED-1E568). TN567 multifunction circuit packs contain a CPU, controllers,
memory devices, and signal processors.
TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice Mail
System (see ED-1E568)
A component of the ED-1E568, the TN568 is a processor circuit pack that supports voice
mail using an embedded 386EX processor. DEFINITY AUDIX systems can be
interconnected to create large voice-mail networks that support up to 100,000
subscribers and store up to 100 hours of messages. Each circuit pack has 8 ports
available for calls when networking is enabled. Without networking, 12 ports are
available.
The TN568 takes up two adjacent slots, except in slot 6 of a CMC.
The circuit pack includes a writable magneto-optical disk drive for backing up and
upgrading system software and a hard disk for storing messages. There is an RS-232
connection for a maintenance and administration terminal, an Ethernet port (for the
Message Manager PC desktop application), an Amphenol connection to the switch, and
an RS-232 port for an external, remote-maintenance modem.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
143
DEFINITY ECS recognizes the TN568 as a TN746B, TN754 or a TN2181 in R6 or earlier
systems, depending on the emulation mode that is used.
TN570B/C Expansion Interface
The TN570 Expansion Interface (EI) is used in R7si/r or later systems. This circuit pack is
an interface between the TDM bus and packet bus, and fiber optic links interconnecting
cabinets. It is used in a Port Network (PN) between a PN and another PN in a
direct-connect system, and between a PN and an SNI in a switch node carrier in a
CSS-connected system.
The TN570 provides control channel applications and time-slot interchanging between
the PPN and EPNs. It is used when ISDN-BRI and/or ASAI is connected in an EPN, and
is always used in R7r or later.
The TN570 carries circuit-switched data, packet-switched data, network control, timing
control, and DS1 control. This circuit pack also communicates with the TN775B
maintenance circuit pack in an EPN to send the EPN environmental and alarm status to
the SPE.
The TN570 is replaced by the TN2242 when an ATM switch replaces the Center Stage
Switch.
TN570C circuit packs are used in SREPN (Survivable Remote Expansion Port
Network), R7 or later csi.
TN572 Switch-Node Clock for the r model
only
The TN572 distributes the timing signals that synchronize the SN carrier. The TN572 also
receives maintenance data.
TN573B Switch-Node Interface for the r
model only
The TN573B Switch Node Interface (SNI) routes circuit, packet, and control messages.
The TN573B is an interface (installed in a SN carrier in a CSS that terminates a fiber optic
link from a SNI in an SN carrier to an SNI in another SN carrier, an EI in a PPN, and an EI
in an EPN. One TN573B is used per PN and supports the TN574 DS1 converter circuit
pack.
The TN573B and higher provides an interface to the single-mode fiber optic transceiver
and supports the TN1654 and TN574 DS1 converter circuit pack.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
144
TN574 DS1 Converter (replaced by TN1654)
for r only
The TN574 is replaced by the TN1654.
TN577 Packet Gateway for r only
The TN577 packet gateway (PGATE) provides 4 RS-423 physical ports for X.25 protocol
interfaces between the system and adjuncts. In this application, PGATE functions as the
data communications interface unit providing protocol conversion between the X.25
protocol and the mode 3 protocol carried across the LAN Bus.
The X.25 protocol (Levels 1 and 2) are terminated and the data reformatted into the ISDN
packet mode protocol for transport across the LAN bus. Supported adjuncts include
AUDIX, CMS, and Message Server Adjunct (MSA).
The TN577 also supports the Distributed Communications System (DCS) environment by
providing X.25 signaling through 1 of the RS-423 physical ports, or back through the
system using the TDM Bus to the appropriate DS1 or tie trunk circuit pack.
TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk (replaced by
TN767B/C/D/E)
This circuit pack is replaced by the TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack.
TN725B Speech Synthesizer, United States
English
The TN725B has 4 ports that send voice message information to voice terminals to
activate leave word calling, automatic wakeup, voice message retrieval, and Do Not
Disturb features. The ports can detect tones.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
145
TN726B Data Line
The TN726B has 8 serial asynchronous EIA ports with modem interfaces connected
through asynchronous data units (ADUs) to EIA ports (such as RS-232) on DTE. The
TN726B uses Mode 2 or Mode 3 data transfer protocol. The DTE can be adjuncts and
peripheral equipment such as data terminals, printers, host computers, personal
computers (PCs), graphics and facsimile systems, and call detail acquisition and
processing systems (CDAPSs).
With software-administered system access ports, a TN726B connects through a
cross-connect field to a TN553 packet data line circuit pack. The TN553 then converts
mode 2 protocol to mode 3 protocol transferring the TN726B from the packet bus to the
TDM bus for EIA connections.
Each port on a TN726B has TXT (terminal, transmit, and tip), TXR (terminal, transmit,
and ring), PXT (port, transmit, and tip), and PXR (port, transmit, and ring) signal leads.
TN735 MET Line
The TN735 has 4 ports that connect to multi-button electronic telephone (MET) sets.
Each port has tip and ring (analog voice) and BT, BR, LT and LR (digital signals to control
terminals) signal leads.
TN742 Analog Line (replaced by TN746B)
The TN742 is replaced by the TN746B analog line circuit pack.
TN744B/C/D Call Classifier Tone Detector,
Multi-Country
TN744B has 8 tone detectors used in vector prompting, outgoing call management
(OCM), and call prompting applications in the United States and Canada. The TN744B
detects special intercept tones used in network intercept tone detection in OCM. The
TN744B also detects tones when a CO answers a call. The TN744B does not classify
data calls. Instead, a tone detector circuit pack classifies the calls. If the TN744B does not
classify the call within 60 seconds, it is removed from the call and timed far-end
supervision classifies the call.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
146
The TN744B provides tone generation and detection for R2-MFC DID signaling used in
non-United States installations. The TN744 also allows gain or loss to be applied to pulse
code modulation (PCM) signals received from the bus and supports A-Law and µ-Law
companding. The TN744B detects 2025 Hz, 2100 Hz, or 2225 Hz modem answerback
tones and provides normal broadband and wide broadband dial tone detection. For MFC,
the TN744B vintage 7 or greater call classifier is required.
TN744B/C circuit pack has 8 ports of tone detection on the TDM bus. The TN744/B/C
does not support call progress tone generation or clocking
The TN744/B/C processor supports digital signal processing of PCM signals on each port
to detect tones and other signals. Generation of signaling tones is also supported for
applications such as R2-MFC, Spain MF, and Russia MF. Gain (or loss) and conferencing
can be applied to PCM signals received from the TDM bus. Additional support includes
DTMF detectors to collect address digits during dialing, and A-Law and µ-Law
companding.
TN744D circuit pack has 8 ports of tone detection on the TDM bus. The TN744D does
not support call progress tone generation or clocking.
The TN744D supports all of the functions of the TN744C plus additional call classifier
options for various countries. The TN744D processor supports digital signal processing of
PCM signals on each port to detect, recognize, and classify tones and other signals.
Generation of signaling tones is also supported for applications such as R2-MFC, Spain
MF, and Russia MF. Gain (or loss) and conferencing can be applied to PCM signals
received from the TDM bus. Additional support includes DTMF detectors to collect
address digits during dialing, and A-Law and µ-Law companding.
In normal operation, a port on the TN744D may serve as an incoming register for Russia
MFR (multi-frequency shuttle register signaling). Use the TN744D Vintage1 with the
TN429C analog line central office trunk for CAMA/E911.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
147
TN746B Analog Line
(US and Canada Offer A Only)
The TN746B has 16 ports. Each port supports 1 voice terminal. LED message waiting
indicators are not supported off premises. Auxiliary equipment — such as fax machines,
answering machines, modems, and amplifier handsets — is supported.
The TN746B supports on-premises (in-building) wiring with either touch-tone or rotary
dialing and with or without the LED and neon message waiting indicators. The TN746B
supports off-premises wiring (out-of-building only with certified protection equipment) with
either DTMF or rotary dialing, but LED or neon message waiting indicators are not
supported off-premises.
The TN746B, along with a TN755B neon power unit per carrier or per single-carrier
cabinet, supports voice terminals equipped with neon message waiting indicators
(on-premises use only). The TN746B supports 3 ringer loads, only 1 voice terminal can
have an LED or neon message waiting indicator.
The TN746B supports µ-Law companding but not administrable timers. TN746C and later
supports A-Law and µ-Law companding and administrable timers. The TN746B supports
queue warning level lights associated with the DDC and UCD features, recorded
announcements associated with the Intercept Treatment feature, and PagePac paging
system for the Loudspeaker Paging feature. Additional support is provided for external
alerting devices associated with the TAAS feature, neon message waiting indicators, and
modems. Secondary lightning protection is provided on the TN746B only. The TN746B
supports up to 8 simultaneous ports ringing.
Combined conversion of Modem Pooling requires a port on a TN754B and a port on a
TN742, TN746B or TN769 Analog circuit pack for each combined resource that is to be
supported.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
148
The TN746B is compatible with the terminal configurations shown in the table below.
Table 36.
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN746B Circuit Pack
Terminal
500-Type
Wire Size
Maximum Range
2/0.5
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
2/0.5
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
7100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
7101A-Series
7103A-Series
2/0.5
mm)
15,200 ft. (4,633 m)
2/0.5
mm)
15,200 ft. (4,633 m)
2/0.5
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
8100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
9100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
Continued on next page
TN747B Central Office Trunk
The TN747B has 8 ports for loop-start or ground-start CO, foreign exchange (FX), and
wide area telecommunications service (WATS) trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal
leads. A port can connect to a PagePac paging system. The TN747B supports the
abandoned call search feature in automatic call distribution (ACD) applications (if the CO
has this feature). Vintage 12 or greater of the TN747B also provides battery reversed
signaling.
TN748B/C/D Tone Detector (replaced by
TN2182B)
The TN748B/C/D is replaced by the TN2182B tone clock - tone detector and call
classifier and the TN744C call classifier circuit pack.
TN750B/C Announcement
The TN750 and TN750B record and store announcements to be played back on demand
as part of a calling feature. The TN750 has sampling rates of 16, 32, or 64 kbps. The
TN750 records announcement times of up to 2 minutes 8 seconds at 64 kbps, 4 minutes
16 seconds at 32 kbps, and 8 minutes and 32 seconds at 16 kbps.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
149
TN750B can record messages from on- or off-premises voice terminals and can store
up to 128 recorded announcements of 8 maximum minutes total. The TN750B has 16
channels and each can play any announcement. Up to 25 call connections can listen to
each channel. This means a total simultaneous call capacity of 400 calls in R7 or later si.
256 callers can connect to each channel in R7r or later.
TN750C Announcement circuit pack records and stores announcements that can be
played back on demand as part of a calling feature. Equipping 10 circuit packs in a
system provides a total capacity of 42.6 minutes (at 32 kbps) and 160 ports. In other
words, 160 announcements can play simultaneously. The 16 kbps compression rate
(adequate for VDN of origin announcements) provides a total capacity of 85.3 minutes.
Use of multiple circuit packs allows a more efficient method of providing many kinds of
announcements and provides improved management of integrated announcements.
TN753B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk
The TN753B has 8 ports used for immediate-start and wink-start direct inward dialing
(DID) trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal leads. For the Czech Republic of Slovakia
and the Commonwealth of Independent States, vintage 17 (or greater) is required. The
TN753B supports A-Law and µ-Law companding with vintage 17 (or greater).
The TN753B is required to support Brazil Block Collect Call.
TN754B/C 4-Wire DCP Digital Line
The TN754B has 8 asynchronous, 4-wire DCP ports that can connect to 7400-series and
8400-series digital voice terminals, attendant consoles, or data modules. The TN754B
has administrable A-Law and µ-Law companding. The TN754B supports the 8400-series
terminal/Data Module types and 7400-series terminals.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 37.
150
Maximum Range of 7400-series and 8400-series
Supported Equipment
Distance Limits
Wire
7400 Data Modules
5000 feet (1524
m)
24 AWG (0.2
mm2/0.5 mm)
7400 Data Modules
4000 feet
(1219m)
26 AWG
7400-series Telephones
3500 feet
(1067m)
24 AWG (0.2
mm2/0.5 mm)
7400-series Telephones
2200 feet
(670m)
26 AWG
8400-series Data Modules
3500 feet
(1067 m)
24 AWG (0.2
mm2/0.5 mm)
8400-series Telephones
3500 feet
(1067m)
24 AWG (0.2
mm2/0.5 mm)
The TN754B does not support group paging.
The TN754C provides greater call handling capacity for high traffic applications and
supports the group paging feature.
Combined conversion of Modem Pooling requires a port on a TN754B and a port on a
TN742, TN746B or TN769 Analog circuit pack for each combined resource that is to be
supported.
TN755B Neon Power Unit for all Models
except csi
The TN755B produces 150 VDC to operate neon message waiting lights on terminals
connected to TN746B analog line circuit packs.
A TN755B neon power unit is required for each carrier where neon message waiting
indicators are connected.
This circuit pack and the neon message waiting function are not available on systems
using the TN2202 ring generator circuit pack for France balanced-ringing.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
151
TN756 Tone Detector/Generator (replaced by
TN2182B)
The TN756 is replaced by the TN2182 tone clock-tone detector and call classifier circuit
pack.
TN758 Pooled Modem
The TN758 has 2 conversion resources ports (such as a trunk data module) for switched
connections between digital data endpoints (data modules) and analog data endpoints
(modems). A TN758 Circuit pack is required for each 2 conversion resources provided
with the integrated type of modem pool. The TN758 supports µ-Law companding only.
TN760D/E Tie Trunk
TN760D has 4 ports used for Type 1 or Type 5 four-wire E & M lead signaling tie
trunks, that can be automatic, immediate-start, wink-start, and delay-dial. Each port on a
TN760D has T, R, T1, R1, E, and M signal leads. The TN760D provides release link
trunks required for the CAS feature and has administrable A-Law and µ-Law
companding.
Option switches on each TN760D port can select connections to Type 1 E & M standard
unprotected format, Type 1 E & M compatible unprotected format, Type 1 E & M
compatible protected format, and Type 5 simplex format.
For Belgium, Czech Republic of Slovakia, the Commonwealth of Independent States, and
the Netherlands, use vintage 11 or greater.
TN760E circuit packs support outgoing, Multilevel Precedence and Preemption
(MLPP).
TN762B Hybrid Line
The TN762B has 8 ports connecting to multi-appearance hybrid analog and digital voice
terminals. It can connect to 7300-series telephones, an MDC-9000 (cordless telephone),
and an MDW-9000 (cordless telephone with separate base station and charging
stations).
Each port on a TN762B has VT and VR (analog voice), CT, CR, P-, and P+ (digital
signals that control terminals) signal leads.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
152
TN763B/C/D Auxiliary Trunk
The TN763 has 4 ports. Each port has T, R, SZ, SZ1, S, and S1 signal leads. The circuit
pack is used for on-premises applications such as music-on- hold, loudspeaker paging,
code calling, and recorded telephone dictation access.
TN763C supports external recorded announcement equipment.
TN763D is administrable to select A-Law or µ-Law companding.
TN765 Processor Interface (replaced by
TN794 and TN799/TN799B)
The TN794 and TN799/TN799B replace this circuit pack, though existing circuit packs will
work with DEFINITY ECS R8. The R7csi does not support the TN765 circuit pack.
TN767B/C/D/E DS1 Interface, T1 (24
Channel)
All TN767 circuit packs provide a DSX1 level physical interface to the DS1 facility and
require a TN464C or greater DS1 interface. The TN767 has unpolarized line out (LO) and
line in (LI) signal lead pairs.
TN767B and later suffix circuit packs support DS1 rate digital facility connectivity. The
circuit packs support CO, Tie, DID, and off-premises stations (OPS) port types using the
robbed-bit signaling protocol. These circuit packs also support ISDN-PRI connectivity in
R7 or later. For these applications, the signaling D channel can connect from the TN767B
to the TN765 processor interface by a permanent switched call over the TDM bus.
TN767E and later is required to communicate with CONVERSANT and for the
enhanced maintenance capabilities of the 120A enhanced integrated channel service unit
(ICSU) feature.
DS1 tests include loopback tests at the DS1 board edge or the 120A (if used), bit error
rate (BER) loopback tests at the far-end CSU, and BER 1-way DS1 facility tests. Other
tests include loopback testing specifically designed to locate DS1 facility faults.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
153
TN768 Tone-Clock (replaced by TN2182B)
The TN768 is replaced by the TN2182B Tone Clock - tone detector and call classifier
circuit pack. It is not necessary to replace the TN768 with the TN2182B in an upgrade.
The TN768 is an acceptable Tone-Clock for R7 or later.
TN769 Analog Line
The TN769 has 8 ports, each with tip and ring signal leads. The TN769 supports
■
On- or off-premises wiring (with certified protection equipment) with either
touch-tone or rotary dialing and with or without LED or neon message waiting
indicators
■
3 ringer loads, such as 3 voice terminals with 1 ringer load each
■
Up to 4 simultaneous ports ringing
■
Queue warning level lights associated with the DDC and UCD features
■
Recorded announcements of the intercept treatment feature
■
Dictation machines of the recorded telephone dictation access feature
■
PagePac paging system for the loudspeaker paging feature
■
External alerting devices of the trunk answer any station (TAAS) feature
■
Modems
The TN769 does not support off premises message waiting indicators.
The TN769 provides secondary lightning protection, and supports µ-Law companding.
Each carrier with neon message indicators requires the TN769, along with a TN755B
neon power unit to support neon message waiting indicators. Only 1 voice terminal can
have an LED or neon message waiting indicator.
Combined conversion of Modem Pooling requires a port on a TN754B and a port on a
TN742, TN746B or TN769 Analog circuit pack for each combined resource that is to be
supported.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 38.
154
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN769 Circuit Pack
Terminal
Wire Size
Maximum Range
500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
2500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
7102-Series
2/0.5
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
2/0.5
24 AWG (0.2 mm
7101A-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
mm)
15,200 ft. (4,633 m)
7103A-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
15,200 ft. (4,633 m)
8100-Series
9100-Series
2/0.5
mm)
10,000 (3,048 m)
2/0.5
mm)
10,000 (3,048 m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
Continued on next page
TN771D Maintenance/Test (all except R6 and
later csi)
The TN771D performs maintenance functions. These functions include packet bus
reconfiguration that allows diagnosis and correction of recoverable packet bus failures
before the link access procedure on the D-channel (LAPD) links fail. LAPD is a link-layer
protocol on the ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI data link layer (level 2). LAPD provides data
transfer between 2 devices and error and flow control on multiple logical links. It recovers
packet bus failures involving up to 3 malfunctioning leads (1 or 2 data or parity leads and
1 control lead) by swapping spare leads with the malfunctioning leads.
Other maintenance functions include ISDN-PRI testing that originates and terminates
loopback tests on ISDN facilities. It provides bit and block error rate information indicating
ISDN facility quality.
A TN771D is required in all si- and r-model standard reliability PPNs and critical reliability
EPNs, all standard reliability PPNs when packet endpoints (BRI and/or ASAI) are
supported, and in all critical reliability systems when packet endpoints are supported. The
TN771D can be used in the csi model, but is not required.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
155
TN772 Duplication Interface (R6 and earlier)
for si only
The TN772 selects the active Switch Processing Element (SPE) (control complex) in high
reliability and critical reliability R6 and some earlier systems. The TN772 also coordinates
the interchange of SPEs.
The TN772 controls the memory shadowing function with the duplication option,
terminates the environmental sensors, and controls the integrated battery supply and
charging circuits. The TN772 is also responsible for selecting the active SPE, selecting
the active tone-clock circuit pack, and providing an administration terminal interface in
place of the processor. A second TN772 circuit pack resides in the duplicated control
carrier/cabinet and requires a cable connection to the Duplication Interface circuit pack in
the basic control carrier/cabinet.
TN775B/C EPN Maintenance Board
The TN775B/C boards are used in maintenance and monitor power failure signals in an
EPN cabinet in R7si/r or later. These circuit packs also monitor the clock, monitor and
control the power supplies and battery charger, and monitor air flow and high temperature
sensors. These circuit packs provide 2 serial links to communicate with Expansion
Interface (EI) circuit packs, and provide an RS-232 interface for connection to an
administration terminal. Each circuit pack contains a 3-position switch to control
emergency power transfer.
The TN775C contains a new DC to DC power converter and is used in maintenance to
monitor the R7 or later processor in a Survivable Remote Expansion Port Network
(SREPN) configuration.
TN776 Expansion Interface for R6 or earlier si
The TN776 installs in the expansion interface slot in a duplicated control carrier or in an
expansion control carrier. The TN776 connects to the TDM bus in 1 PN and is an
interface between that PN and the TDM bus extending to another PN. The TN776
packages the TDM control channel with Link Access Procedure on the D-Channel
(LAPD) for transmission over the fiber link between cabinets. The TN776 provides the
time-slot interchange between cabinets.
A system with ASAI/BRI or with PRI signaling from the packet bus (PACCON) requires a
TN570B/C EI circuit pack in place of a TN776 circuit pack.
Starting with R7 all new si model switches will ship with the TN570.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
156
TN777B Network Control (R6 and earlier)
(replaced by TN794) for si only
The TN777B is replaced by the TN794 Network Control/Packet Interface (for R7 and
later).
TN778 Packet Control (R6 and earlier)
(replaced by TN794) for si only
The TN778 is replaced by the TN794 Network Control/Packet Interface.
TN780 Tone-Clock for All Models Except csi
The TN780 connects to and monitors an optional external Stratum 3 clock for digital
frame timing. It also couples the clock output to local clocks. The TN780 supplies master
timing to the system and produces the following tones: call progress, touch tones,
answer-back, and trunk transmission test. It has 2 MHz, 160 kHz, and 8 kHz clocks. This
circuit pack can transmit the system clock and tones on either TDM bus A, TDM bus B, or
both.
The TN780 is administrable to produce 5 tone plans (for countries outside the United
States) other than the United States tone plan. Six tones can be customized in each plan.
The TN780 supports µ-Law or A-Law companding.
TN786B Processor for R4 and earlier
The TN786B contains a CPU, 4 Mb of RAM, and 7 Mb of ROM, as well as a maintenance
processor (MTP) with 32 Kb of RAM and 64 Kb of ROM. The TN786B does not have a
tape interface. The TN786B maintenance processor provides:
■
Power management
■
Control for system alarms and LEDs
■
Transfers in duplicated systems
■
Serial IO capability
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
157
TN787F/G/H/J/K Multimedia Interface
The TN787 multimedia interface circuit pack is used in conjunction with the TN788B
multimedia voice conditioner circuit pack to provide service circuit functionality for the
Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature. This feature provides both voice and
multimedia data service between multimedia complexes (endpoints). Up to 6 endpoints
can conference to a single multimedia call occurrence.
TN787F/G provides a TDM bus interface and a DS1 adjunct cable interface. The
TN787F/G routes the H.221 multimedia information to the DS1 interface to free more
TDM bus timeslots. This allows the system to carry more audio, video, and data bit
streams between multimedia complexes (endpoints).
TN787J introduces multiple PN support.
TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner
The TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner circuit pack is used in conjunction with the
TN787F/G multimedia interface circuit pack to provide service circuit functionality for the
MMCH feature. This feature provides both voice and multimedia data service between
multimedia complexes (endpoints).
NOTE:
The TN788B vintage is µ-Law only. The TN788B vintage 2 or later is A-Law and
µ-Law.
The TN788B is the audio processor for the Px64 multimedia conference bridge. The
TN788B contains 8 digital signal processors; 4 for encoding and 4 for decoding. Each
encoder/decoder pair is assigned to a Px64 endpoint to process its audio channel.
Connection to and from the endpoint’s audio is by way of a TN787F/G multimedia
interface port. This connection is through the TDM bus timeslots.
Each of the 8 digital signal processors communicate with the main on-board processor
through 8 individual Dual Port Random Access Memory (DPRAMs). No Read Only
Memory (ROM) is available on this circuit pack; the DPRAM is used for program
download.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
158
TN789 Radio Controller
The TN789 circuit pack is an interface between a DEFINITY system and 2 Wireless Fixed
Base (WFB) radio units for the DEFINITY wireless business system R1-PWT. The TN789
contains a main processor to handle data line circuit (DLC) and upper medium access
(MAC) layers of firmware. The TN789 also contains 2 lower MAC processors; 1 for each
radio interface. Each radio interface is referred to as an I2 interface.
The I2 link is the connection between the Radio Controller (RC) and the WFB. The RC
supports up to two I2 links, each link consisting of 4 pairs of twisted-pair cable: the
transmit pair, the receive pair, and the local power pair. The transmit pair transfers WFB
control and frame information from the RC to the WFB. The receive pair transfers status
and frame information from the WFB to the RC. If the RC cannot provide power to the
WFB, a third pair (to the WFB) can supply local power. When possible, the transmit pair
and the receive pair provide phantom power from the RC to the WFB.
Each circuit pack includes a standard TDM bus interface from a system, 2 radio
interfaces to 2 separate radio units, and 2 synchronization ports. In addition, 2 RS-232
interfaces provide for a debug terminal and for setting up the wireless terminal. Provides
an interface to Wizard II base stations (DWBS).
TN790 Processor (R6 and earlier) Also used
for "VS"
The TN790 processor circuit pack is a circuit pack level replacement for the
TN786B/CPP1 combination. The TN790 does not support a mezzanine board for
memory expansion (no CPP1 circuit pack is used). The TN790 provides a performance
increase over the TN786B/CPP1 combination.
The Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) processor platform runs at 40 MHz and
includes all of the functions of the TN786B processor circuit pack as well as providing an
operating system base more common with R7r or later. Diagnostics for the TN790 are
enhanced over earlier systems. The TN790 is compatible with the processor interface
circuit pack (TN765), the PACCON circuit pack (TN778), the NETCON circuit pack
(TN777B), and the duplication interface circuit pack (TN772).
The TN790 is available in R6 and some earlier systems. The TN790 provides 16 MBytes
of Flash PROM (programmable read only memory). The PROM is compatible with the
NETCON Flash cards and is programmed using the +12 VDC supplied by the NETCON
circuit pack.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
159
The TN790 is factory-populated with a minimum of 16 MBytes of Dynamic Random
Access Memory (DRAM).
NOTE:
Existing Release 5 TN790 circuit packs with 8 or 12 MBytes of DRAM must be
upgraded to 16 MBytes of DRAM for R7 or later.
The DRAM can be seen remotely by field technicians to determine the memory
configurations at each site. The amount of DRAM can increase depending on customer
requirements. Contact your Lucent Technologies representative.
The TN790 contains an on-board modem with a maximum speed of 9.6 kbps and
complies with V.32 (9.6 kbps communication) and V.42 (error detection and correction)
protocols. The TN790 can support an external modem that can take the place of the CDR
port since CDR connections can be provided by other methods. An external modem and
an asynchronous data unit (ADU) or data module may be required to support a system
printer or CDR device.
TN790B (R7 or later si only)
The TN790B is very similar to the TN790. The circuit pack is designed to handle errors
that are associated with the EM-BUS and is required for the use of the C-LAN (TN799)
and NetPkt (TN794) circuit packs in R7 and later.
TN791 16-Port Analog Guest Line
(International Offers or US and Canada
Category B only)
The TN791 has 16 ports. Each port supports 1 voice terminal, such as 500 (rotary dial)
and 2500 terminals (DTMF dial). LED and neon message waiting indicators are
supported (a separate power supply is required for neon message indicators).
The TN791 supports on-premises (in-building) wiring with either touch-tone or rotary
dialing and with or without the LED and neon message waiting indicators.
The TN791 supports 3 ringer loads, only 1 voice terminal can have an LED or neon
message waiting indicator. The TN791 allows a maximum of 8 simultaneous ports
ringing.
TN791 supports A-Law and µ-law companding and administrable timers. Secondary
lightning protection is provided. The TN791 supports up to 8 simultaneous ports ringing.
The TN791 is compatible with the terminal configurations shown in the table below.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 39.
160
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN791 Circuit Pack
Terminal
Wire Size
Maximum Range
500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
2500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
6200-Type
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
2/0.5
24 AWG (0.2 mm
7100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
7101A-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
15,200 ft. (4,633 m)
7103A-Series
8100-Series
9100-Series
2/0.5
mm)
15,200 ft. (4,633 m)
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
Continued on next page
TN792 Duplication Interface for TN 790B
Processor Circuit Packs for si only
In high- and critical-reliability R7 or later si systems, duplication interfaces copy the
contents of memory from the primary Switch Processing Element (SPE) to a standby
SPE, so that the latter can take over immediately when the former fails. The TN792 uses
the Enhanced M-Bus of the TN790B processor for this memory shadowing function. The
Enhanced M-bus supports 32-bit addressing and data access (vs. 16-bit for the M-bus),
so it transfers data faster and shadows a larger area of memory than the older bus. The
M-bus is still supported, however, for legacy applications. The TN790B is required for all
R7 and later si duplicated systems.
You need two TN792 circuit packs, one for the primary control carrier and one for the
standby. You can replace TN772 duplication interfaces with TN792s, but you must
replace them in pairs. A TN772 cannot communicate with a TN792.
A new duplex optical cable connects the TN792 circuit packs. This cable eliminates the
additional electromagnetic emissions that would otherwise result from the doubled data
rate on the bus. The optical cable interface to the new DUPINT is on the front faceplate of
the circuit pack.
The TN792 is compatible with existing duplication cables.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
161
TN793/TN793B 24-Port 2-Wire Analog Line
with Caller ID
The TN793/TN793B is a dual coded, analog line 24-port, that performs all the functions of
the TN746B, 16-port analog line circuit pack. Each port supports 1 voice terminal, such
as 500 (rotary dial) and 2500 terminals (DTMF dial).
The TN793/TN793B supports on-premises (in-building) wiring with either touch-tone or
rotary dialing and with or without the LED and neon Message Waiting Indicators. The
TN793/TN793B supports off-premises wiring (out-of-building only with certified protection
equipment) with either DTMF or rotary dialing, but LED or neon message waiting
indicators are not supported off -premises.
The TN793/TN793B, along with a TN755B neon power unit per carrier or per
single-carrier cabinet, supports voice terminals equipped with neon message waiting
indicators (on-premises use only). The TN793/TN793B supports 3 ringer loads, only 1
voice terminal can have an LED or neon message waiting indicator. The TN793/TN793B
allows a maximum of 12 simultaneous ports ringing.
The TN793/TN793B supports A-Law and µ-law companding and administrable timers.
The TN793 supports queue warning level lights associated with the DDC and UCD
features, recorded announcements associated with the Intercept Treatment feature, and
PagePac paging system for the Loudspeaker Paging feature. Additional support is
provided for external alerting devices associated with the TAAS feature, neon message
waiting indicators, and modems The TN793/TN793B also supports secondary lightning
protection.
The TN793B is compatible with the terminal configurations shown in the table below.
Table 40.
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN793
Terminal
Wire Size
Maximum Range
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
20,000 ft (6,096 m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
20,000 ft (6,096 m)
6200-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
7100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
500-Type
2500-Type
8100-Series
9100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
162
TN794 Network Control/Packet Interface for
si only
The TN794 provides LAPD connections over the TDM bus, as currently provided by the
Processor Interface (TN765). The TN794 replaces the NETCON (TN777B) and PACCON
(The TN777B is replaced by the TN794 Network Control/Packet Interface (for R7 and
later).) in R8 or later si systems. It is not backward compatible with earlier releases. The
TN794 inserts into the NETCON slot and may require a TN2400 Net/Pkt Backplane
Connection (R6si and older field upgrades when reusing the existing Control Cabinet
only). A modified TN790B processor circuit pack and a TN792 DUPINT circuit pack are
required for duplicated systems.
TN794/TN2400 Sandwich Board Assembly
The TN794/TN2400 Sandwich Board Assembly (comcode 848254942) is required for
upgrades to R7si that reuse the existing backplane. The board bridges the packet bus to
the TN794 NetPkt circuit pack. The TN794/TN2400 Sandwich Board Assembly cannot be
separated into two circuit packs.
Replaces the TN778 packet-control circuit pack in field-upgraded systems (in new-build
systems, the TN2400’s function is performed by a revised backplane). Used with the
TN794.
A new TN790B Processor circuit pack and the new TN792 DUPINT circuit pack are
required for R7si duplicated systems
TN795 Processor (DEFINITY ONE)
The TN795 processor provides a system offering support for up to 40 voice stations with
co-resident voice switching, voice and fax messaging and system applications that are
running on a Microsoft Windows NT operating system. The communication between the
firmware and the software is done by an Ethernet connection. An Intel processor
Message Link or IML is the Ethernet control like between the Pentium processor and the
MPC860 processor. This allows for the message based communication between the two
processors.
The TN795 is the equivalent to 2 standard DEFINITY cards but has only one appearance
on the backplane connector system. For the Tone/Clock angel firmware the TN2182 must
be removed from the system, the TN795 must be in an even slot and the TN744 must be
in the system.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
163
There are other components that are "unique" to DEFINITY ONE. They include the Hard
Disk (comcode 848320800), a multi-leg auxiliary or octopus cable (comcode 601929763),
a software CD (J58890TN10L1), pcANYWHERE, a backup Flash Disk (408166783) and
a PCMCIA Ethernet card (407961804).
NOTE:
The ComCodes are always subject to change.
TN797 US Analog Trunk or Line Circuit Pack
Provides a combination 8-port Analog Trunk and Line circuit pack for the US, Canada and
countries that have the same analog standards. The TN797 provides you with the
capability to administer any of the 8 ports of this circuit pack as a CO trunk (loop or
ground start), a CAMA E911 trunk, a DID trunk (either wink or immediate start), or as an
analog line (on or off-premises and/or with or without LED Message Waiting Indication. It
does not support ICLID on the analog trunk to the CO, nor Caller ID on the line side to the
telephone.
TN798B Processor for csi only
The TN798B processor platform runs at 25 MHz and integrates many functions of the
TN790 processor and the TN777B NETCON circuit packs onto a single circuit pack.
These functions include a 32-bit RISC CPU complex and a maintenance processor
complex providing serial communications and maintenance functions. In addition, the
TN798B terminates ISDN LAPD signaling over the DEFINITY TDM bus from PRI and BRI
trunk circuit packs.
The RISC CPU complex provides 4 to 32 MBytes of Flash PROM. The DRAM is provided
via 1 SIMM. The TN798B contains 16 MBytes of DRAM. The flash is not interleaved.
The TN798B processor does not provide X.25 communications nor does it provide a
duplication option. The TN798B does not contain an on-board modem. Instead, an
external modem must be connected to the RS-232E port previously used for the internal
modem.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
164
TN799/TN799B Control LAN (C-LAN)
Interface
The TN799/TN799B Control LAN Interface simplifies the connections between adjunct
equipment and DEFINITY. It provides TCP/IP connectivity over Ethernet or PPP (Point to
Point Protocol) connections to applications, such as CMS Call Center, INTUITY™,
AUDIX®, and DCS. The TN799B is required to support the TN802B IP Interface operating
in MedPro mode for H.323 functionality. The TN799/TN799B is also required to support
ATM interfaces and WAN PNC on DEFINITY R7 or later.
The TN799/TN799B does not support BX.25 connectivity on the R8 or later csi platform.
On the other platforms, TN765 Processor Interface and TN577 Packet Gateway circuit
packs provide BX.25 connectivity for existing customers as well as TCP/IP service.
The TN799B C-LAN pack provides connectionless UDP sockets for IP solutions support,
variable length PING and Traceroute. The pack will also support 500 remote sockets,
while current packs support 220.
The TN799 circuit pack is available with R7r, R7si and R7csi and the TN799B C-LAN
circuit pack is available with R8r, R8si, and R8csi.
The TN799 supports the traceroute and netstat network testing commands starting in R8.
TN801 MAPD (LAN Gateway Interface)
The TN801 is part of the DEFINITY Multi-Application Platform (MAPD). It allows direct
integration of PC-based application into the DEFINITY switch. This circuit pack works as
the interface for such solutions as CTI, CallVisor and PC/LAN. The TN801 provides
DEFINITY packet bus and TDM bus interfacing, physical mounting for a CPU, external
interfaces, and mapping of circuit switched connections between the DEFINITY TDM bus
and the expansion circuit pack.
TN802/TN802B MAPD (IP Interface
Assembly)
The TN802 Internet Protocol Interface circuit pack supports voice and fax calls from the
DEFINITY ECS across a corporate intranet or the Internet. The IP trunking software runs
on an embedded PC operating under Windows NT. The TN802B supports IP Solutions
including IP Trunking and MedPro (H.323) with IP SoftPhones.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
165
It is implemented using the TN802/TN802B IP Interface, which is a Windows NT server
that resides on the IP Interface circuit pack inside the DEFINITY ECS. The TN802B IP
Interface operates in two modes: IP Trunk, available with Release 7, and Media
Processor (MedPro/H.323), available with Release 8. The TN802B is backwards
compatible and defaults to IP Trunk mode. To use it in MedPro mode you activate it
through administration to take full advantage of all the R8 IP Solutions features. You also
must install a new TN799B C-LAN circuit pack.
TN1648B System Access and Maintenance
(SYSAM) for r only
The TN1648B is an SPE component used for maintenance. A processor in the TN1648B
runs control routines that connect to maintenance software. The TN1648B has a 5-LED
alarm panel and a toggle switch to manually inhibit automatic emergency transfer of PPN
analog lines.
The TN1648B provides 2 RS-232 interfaces for connection to an administration terminal
and, with duplication, connection to a standby maintenance terminal. The TN1648B also
provides a tip and ring port with a built-in modem allowing a remote administration
terminal to access the system.
The circuit pack allows connection to the management terminal and connection to and
termination of 1 end of the processor bus. Other maintenance items include:
■
PPN alarm monitors and outputs including auxiliary alarms for auxiliary equipment
and environmental monitoring for over- temperature conditions
■
Power supply sense and control for the carriers
■
Emergency transfer control for catastrophic failure. The circuit consists of a
3-position toggle switch. The switch may be moved into the manual on position,
manual off position, or automatic position.
■
Non-volatile memory containing the time-of-day clock, the INitialization and
ADministration System (INADS) telephone number, login password, and product
identification
■
Alarm panel information with major, minor, and warning LEDs, an ACKnowledge
LED, and an emergency transfer LED
The TN1648B increases the internal and external modem speeds from 2400 bps to 9600
bps with error control implementation. Appropriate software administration is added to
choose between external modem access to the maintenance port, and direct loop start
trunk access. The former is used in countries that do not support the analog loop
signaling protocol supplied by the internal modem.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
166
For non-U.S. use, a cable from the TN1648B connects directly to an external modem.
When the external modem is selected, the internal modem is disabled. The TN1648B is
backward-compatible with the TN1648.
TN1650B Memory for r only
The TN1650B memory circuit pack contains 32 Mb of Dynamic Random Access Memory
(DRAM) and error detection and correction circuitry to ensure information integrity. The
TN1650B is used for system software, customer translations, and call processing
maintenance.
TN1654 DS1 Converter, T1 (24-Channel) and
E1 (32-Channel)
The TN1654 DS1 converter circuit pack is a replacement for the TN574 DS1 converter
circuit pack in R8r or later systems. The TN1654 converter complex installs in place of the
conventional fiber and supports from 1 to 4 T1 or E1 facilities, providing a total of 92 T1
channels (or 120 E1 channels) in each direction between the PPN and the EPN. This
capacity is enough for an EPN to easily support several hundred stations.
R8r or later architecture provides for EPNs that are remotely located from the PPN. EPNs
within 5 miles (8 km) of the PPN may be coupled using multimode fiber optic cable or
within 22 miles (35.4 km) using single-mode fiber optic cable. When the distance between
the PPN and the EPN exceeds 5 miles (8 km) (multimode), or 22 miles (35.4 km),
single-mode, or private right-of-way is not available, connect using a DS1 converter
complex. A DS1 converter complex consists of a pair, 1 at each end, of DS1 converter
circuit packs and the associated T1/E1 facilities.
A new set of Y-cables is required by the TN1654 to connect to a TN570B Expansion
Interface circuit pack for system communication.
TN1655 Packet Interface for r only
The TN1655 provides the communication path between the SPE and the packet bus in
the PPN. The packet bus connects to EI circuit packs in the PPN that communicate with
EPNs and the CSS.
The TN1655 provides the link access procedure on the D-channel (LAPD) for up to 8,192
links at a sustained rate of 2Mbits per second. These are the digital multiplexed interface
(DMI) mode-3 terminations of communication links across the packet bus that link to the
processor circuit pack. Some data communication will use the X.25 data phase protocol
at level 3.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
167
The TN1655 provides termination for ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI signaling links, expansion
archangel links connecting the processor to the expansion archangels on EI circuit packs
in each PN, and center stage control network links connecting the processor with SNI
circuit packs in the CSS.
The TN1655 supports firmware downloading. It also provides X.25 termination to the
DCS links and adjuncts such as CDR and AUDIX.
TN1656 Tape Drive (R8r and earlier)
(replaced by TN2211 in R8 and later)
The TN1656 contains a Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) tape drive that stores 3
Mb to 120 Mb of system software, including customer translations, bootstrap image, and
any core dumps. This Drive is being replaced by the TN2211 Optical Drive. Both Drives
will be supported with R8.
TN1657 Disk Drive
The TN1657 contains a 180 Mb small computer system interface (SCSI) disk drive. The
TN1657 reduces the boot time of the system, stores translations, bootstrap image, and
core dumps.
TN2135 Analog Line for Italy (replaced by
TN2183)
The TN2135 is replaced by the TN2183 analog line circuit pack.
TN2136 2-Wire DCP Digital Line (replaced by
TN2181)
The TN2136 is replaced by the TN2181 Digital Line circuit pack.
TN2138 Central Office Trunk for Italy
The TN2138 provides 8 analog loop start CO trunk ports. Each port has tip and ring
signal leads. The TN2138 has 50 Hz, 12-kHz, and 16-kHz Periodic Pulse Metering
(PPM).
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
168
TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk for Italy
The TN2139 provides 8 analog direct inward dialing (DID) trunk ports for analog DID
signaling. Each port has tip and ring signal leads.
TN2140B Tie Trunk for Hungary and Italy
The TN2140B provides 4 ports for 4-wire E & M lead signaling tie trunks. The TN2140
provides continuous E & M signaling and discontinuous E & M signaling. Administrable
A-Law and µ-Law companding and standard Type 1 and Type 5 signaling is provided.
The TN2140B is required for Hungary.
TN2144 Analog Line for the Netherlands
(replaced by TN2183)
The TN2144 is replaced by the TN2183 analog line circuit pack.
TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk for
Belgium and the Netherlands
The TN2146 provides 8 analog DID trunk ports. Each port has tip and ring signal leads.
The TN2146 uses 4 (1 for each pair of ports) Dual Subscriber Line Audio processing
Circuits (DSLACs) administered to meet trunk transmission characteristics. The DSLACs
can be set to either a resistive or complex balance impedance in the voice or AC talk path
on the trunk interfaces. The DSLACs convert analog signals to digital signals and
vice-versa to match the analog DID trunks to the system’s digital TDM bus.
Companding can be set to either A-Law or µ-Law.
TN2147C Central Office Trunk,
Multi-Country (replaces TN447)
The TN2147 has 8 analog CO trunk ports. Each port has tip and ring signal leads. The
TN2147 uses 4 (1 for each pair of ports) Dual Subscriber Line Audio processing Circuits
(DSLACs) to be administered to meet a given transmission and impedance requirement.
The DSLACs convert analog signals to digital signals and digital signals to analog signals
to interface the analog CO trunks to the system’s digital TDM bus.
The TN2147C provides multi-country signaling based on trunk type: loop-start, ground
start, or battery reverse loop-start.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
169
TN2149 Analog Line for Belgium (replaced by
TN2183)
The TN2149 is replaced by the TN2183 analog line circuit pack.
TN2169 Alarm
A component of ED-1E546, the DEFINITY AUDIX R3 (Circuit-Pack Assembly) (being
replaced by ED-1E568). Like the TN2170, the TN2169 alarm circuit pack monitors
system power and environmental status, -48 VDC to +12 VDC power conversion for the
disk drive and tape drive, and remote terminal access. Unlike the TN2170, the TN2169
does not support an external Ethernet LAN connection.
TN2170 Alarm with Ethernet Interface
A component of the CallVisor ASAI/DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 (Circuit-Pack Assembly)
(being replaced by J58890MA-1) (ED-1E546) and the DEFINITY AUDIX R3 (Circuit-Pack
Assembly) (being replaced by ED-1E568) (ED-1E546). Like the TN2169, the TN2170
monitors system power and environmental status, -48 VDC to +12 VDC power
conversion for the disk drive and tape drive, and remote terminal access. In addition, the
TN2170 supports an external Ethernet LAN connection.
TN2180 Analog Line for Spain and Germany
(replaced by TN2183)
The TN2180 is replaced by the TN2183 analog line circuit pack.
TN2181 2-Wire DCP Digital Line
The TN2181 has 16 DCP ports that can connect to 2-wire terminals such as the 6400,
8400 and 9400 Series digital voice terminals and the 302C attendant console. The
maximum range of the 8400 and 9400 Series terminals using 24 AWG (0.5 mm) wire is
3,500 feet (1067 m).
The TN2181 supports either A-Law or µ-Law companding (software selectable). The
TN2181 also supports the 8400 Series data modules.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
170
TN2182B Tone-Clock, Tone Detector, and Call
Classifier (replaces TN419B and TN768)
The TN2182B tone-clock integrates the tone generator, tone detection-call classifier,
system clock, and synchronization functions onto 1 circuit pack for all system reliability
configurations. The TN2182B supports 8 ports for tone detection and allows gain or loss
applied to PCM signals received from the bus. The TN2182B provides Stratum 4
enhanced clock accuracy, supports MFC signaling (such as Russia MF), supports Russia
MFR (multi-frequency shuttle Register signaling) and supports A-Law and µ-Law
companding.
The TN2182B provides continuous, cadenced and mixed tones, allows administrable
setting of tone frequency and level, detects 2025 Hz, 2100 Hz, or 2225 Hz modem
answerback tones, and provides normal and wide broadband dial tone detection.
In most configurations, the 2- or 3-circuit pack combination of tone generator, tone
detector, and/or call classifier can be replaced with this 1 circuit pack, freeing 1 or 2 port
slots.
The TN2182B Vintage 1 includes all the functionality found on the TN744D. Use the
TN2182B Vintage 1 with the TN429C analog line central office trunk for CAMA/E911 and
the TN429D DIOD central office trunk for ICLID.
It is not necessary to replace the TN768 with the TN2182B in an upgrade. The TN 768 is
an acceptable Tone-Clock for R7 or later. A TN2182 is required for the on-board tone
detection or for additional tones to support CCRON, Russian ANI and others.
TN2183 Analog Line, Multi-Country
(replaces TN467, TN468B)
See TN2215/TN2183.
TN2184 DIOD Trunk for Germany
The TN2184 Direct Inward/Outward Dialing (DIOD) trunk contains 4 port circuits, each
interfacing a 2-wire analog CO trunk with the TDM switching network of the system. Each
port allows incoming and outgoing calls to include addressing information being received
from the CO for incoming calls and addressing information being sent to the CO for
outgoing calls. It detects Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) signals for call charge
accounting on outgoing calls.
The TN2184 combines the features of both a CO trunk and a DID trunk to provide both
outgoing and incoming calls with addressing information in both directions.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
171
TN2185B ISDN-BRI, 4-Wire S/T-TE Interface
(can be used as an alternative to TN464F or
TN2464)
The TN2185B supports eight 4-wire ISDN BRI line S interfaces, each operating at 192
Kbps, with 2 B-channels (64 Kbps) and 1 D-channel (16 Kbps). The TN2185B interfaces
to the DEFINITY LAN bus and the TDM bus to provide the TE side of the BRI interface.
The TN2185B is similar to the TN2198 except the TN2185B is a 4-wire S interface
instead of a 2-wire U interface. Another difference is the function of the SCOTCH/NPE
and SAKI are replaced by the network control element (NCE).
For each port, information communicates over two 64 Kbps bearer channels called B1
and B2, and over a 16 Kbps channel called the demand channel, or D channel. The D
channel is used for signaling. Channels B1 and B2 can be circuit switched
simultaneously, or either of them may be packet switched, but not both at once. The D
channel is always packet switched. The circuit switched connections have a µ-Law or
A-Law option (on a per-board basis) for voice operation and operate as 64 kbps clear
channels when in the data mode. The packet switched channels support the LAPD
protocol, however, the TN2185B does not terminate on LAPD protocol. The S interface
does not support switching of both B channels together as a 128 Kb/s wideband channel.
The TN2185B has a long range up to 18,000 feet (5486 m) maximum from the system to
the NT1 device. In a multiple terminal environment, the B channels are shared only on a
per-call basis. For example, if the B2 channel is for data, then the B2 by 1 terminal
excludes the others from having access to it. When a used device communicates over
the D channel to access B1 or B2, that channel is owned until the call is taken down (no
party on line). The D channel is always shared among the terminals. Replaces the
TN-PRI/BRI PRI to BRI converter (ETSI-BRI) and can be used as an alternative to the
TN464F or the TN2464.
The ability of outpulse in-band DTMF signals or end-to end signaling is supported by the
TN2185B.
QSIG Call Completion is supported, however, QSIG Supplementary Services are not.
ISDN-BRI trunks can be used as inter-PBX tie lines using the QSIG peer protocol.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
172
TN2198 ISDN-BRI, 2-Wire U Interface
The TN2198 allows connection to the ANSI standard 2-wire U-Interface. The 2-wire
interface from the TN2198 connects to an NT1 network interface. The 4-wire interface on
the other side of the NT1 may connect to 1 or 2 telephones. The TN2198 does not
provide a trunk-side interface as does the TN2185 circuit pack.
The TN2198 contains 12 ports that interface at the ISDN U reference point. For each port,
information communicates over two 64 Kbps bearer channels called B1 and B2, and over
a 16 Kbps channel called the demand channel, or D channel. The D channel is used for
signaling. Channels B1 and B2 can be circuit switched simultaneously. The D channel is
always packet switched. The TN2198 requires a packet control circuit pack (TN778) on
Category B ONLY. Each port supports 1 voice terminal, such as 500 (rotary dial) and
2500 terminals (DTMF dial).
The D channel supports the LAPD protocol and is consistent with the CCITT Q.920
Recommendations for D channel signaling.
In a multiple terminal environment, the B channels are shared only on a per-call basis.
For example, if the B2 channel is used for data, then the use of B2 by 1 terminal excludes
the others from having access to it. When a device communicates over the D channel to
access B1 or B2, that channel is owned until the call is taken (no party on line). The D
channel is always shared among the terminals. The TN2198 interfaces with the TDM bus
and packet bus in the DEFINITY backplane and terminates with 12 ISDN basic access
ports.
The TN2198 has a long range to 18,000 feet (5486 m) maximum from the system to the
NT1 device and uses standard protocol ANSI T1.601. The TN2198 has a 160 Kbps line
rate, consisting of 2 bearer channels at 64 Kbps channels each, the D channel at 16
Kbps, framing at 12 Kbps, and maintenance at 4 Kbps. The circuit pack uses demand
channel (ringing, tone, and so forth), 16 Kbps channel, and supports up to 24 telephones
or data modules per circuit pack.
The TN2198 is not offered as a BRI Tie Trunk.
TN2199 Central Office Trunk for Russia
The TN2199 is a 4-port, 3-wire, loop-start trunk circuit pack that can be used as a DID
trunk, CO trunk (2-way, 1-way incoming, or 1-way outgoing CO). The TN2199 combines
the functionality of the DID trunk and the 1-way outgoing CO trunk (DIOD trunk). This
circuit pack is used with the call classifier circuit pack (TN744D or later) or the
Tone-Clock/ tone detector (TN2182B or later) to accomplish MF shuttle signaling (similar
to R2-MFC signaling). Supports incoming ANI.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
173
TN2202 Ring Generator for France
The TN2202 ring generator circuit pack supplies 50 Hz ringing power. The TN2202
supplies balanced ringing, by a modified backplane, to terminals connecting to the
TN2183 multi-country analog line circuit pack when administered for France analog
transmission.
The TN2202 plugs into the power unit slot and is required for each carrier containing
analog lines (1 in an single-carrier cabinet or 1 in each port carrier of a MCC). A 1-lead
modification is required in each backplane using TN2202. This is true for all products
made for France. The TN2202 produces 2 symmetrical voltages (typically 28V rms) with
respect to ground, and takes –48 VDC, –5 VDC, and ground from the backplane and
generates 2 x 28V rms with added –48 VDC.
TN2207 DS1 Interface, T1 (24-Channel)
and E1 (32-Channel), for MMCH
The TN2207 circuit packs support digital signal level 1 (DS1) rate (24 channel) and E1
rate (32 channel) digital facility connectivity. All TN2207 suffixes support CO, Tie, DID,
and off premises station (OPS) port types using the robbed-bit signaling protocol, the
proprietary Bit-Oriented Signaling (BOS) 24th channel signaling protocol, and the
DMI-BOS 24th channel signaling protocol. The circuit packs also support ISDN-PRI
connectivity T1 or E1.
In DS1 (24 channel) mode, a DS1 interface is provided to the DS1 facility. The TN2207
circuit packs provide board-level administrable A-Law and µ-Law companding, CRC-4
generation and checking (E1 only), and Stratum 3 clock capability.
The TN2207 provides test jack access to the DS1 or E1 line and support the 120A
integrated channel service unit (CSU).
All suffixes have line out (LO) and line in (LI) signal leads. The Line Out and Line In leads
are unpolarized balanced pairs.
The TN2207 has additional hardware to support direct cabling to a TN787 MMI circuit
pack.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
174
TN2208 Multi-Function
The TN2208 Multi-Function circuit pack holds a PC-type CPU, controller, and memory
devices. In the CallVisor ASAI/DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 (Circuit-Pack Assembly)
(being replaced by J58890MA-1), the TN2208 operates with the TN2170 Alarm with
Ethernet Interface circuit pack to monitor system power and environmental status, -48
VDC to +12 VDC power conversion for the disk drive and tape drive, and remote terminal
access.
TN2209 Tie Trunk for Russia
The TN2209 has 4 ports used for Type 1 or Type 5 four-wire E & M lead signaling tie
trunks, that can be automatic, immediate-start, wink-start, and delay-dial. The TN2209
provides an interface between these four frequency signaling tie trunk lines and the
DEFINITY TDM network. Based on a TN760D each port has modified E, and M signal
leads for universal hardware compatibility. The TN2209 provides release link trunks
required for the CAS feature and has administrable A-Law and µ-Law companding.
TN2210 Tone Generator
The TN2210 tone generator provides a 1780 Hz tone for an auxiliary trunk port on a
TN763 or SN231. The external alarm interface provides a contact closure to connect to
the TN492C remote interface circuit of the DEFINITY common control carrier. The tone is
used by the AUTOPLEX system to support CO call associated continuity testing of trunk
circuits between the CO and AUTOPLEX system. The circuit will provide an active alarm
LED to indicate the circuit pack is in a fault condition.
TN2211 Optical Drive for r only
The TN2211 Optical Drive has replaced the TN1656 Tape Drive in DEFINITY ECS R8r.
The drive provides removable storage for software upgrades, translation backups,
announcement file backups, core dumps, etc., as did the TN1656 Tape Drive. The Optical
Drive has several advantages over the TN1656 Tape Drive.
■
writing to the optical disk is considerably shorter than writing to tape. A full backup
will take approximately 20 minutes, whereas the Tape Drive takes up to 95
minutes.
■
the optical disk is more reliable because it does not error due to:
■
block allocation (has several spare block available
■
number of accesses to the media
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
175
The UN332C MSSNET must be used with the TN2211. Both the TN2211 and the
TN1656 will be supported with R8.
TN2214B 24-Port, 2-Wire DCP Digital Line
(International Offers or US and Canada
Category B only)
The TN2214B has 24 DCP ports that can connect to 2 wire terminals such as the 6400,
8400 or 9400 Series digital voice terminals and the 302C Attendant Console.
The TN2214B supports either A-Law or µ-Law companding (software selectable).
The TN2214B supports the terminals listed below.
Table 41.
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN2214B
Terminal
Wire Size
Maximum Range
302C Attendant Console 24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
6400-Series
8400-Series
9400-Series
3,500 ft. (1,067) m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
3,500 ft. (1,067) m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
3,500 ft. (1,067 m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
3,500 ft. (1,067 m)
For more information see the Allowable Intra-premises Cabling Distances, Table 45 in the
Technical Specifications chapter of this book.
TN2215/TN2183 16-Port, Analog Line,
Multi-Country (International Offers or US and
Canada Category B only) (TN2183 replaces
TN467, TN468)
The TN2215/TN2183 provides 16 analog port interfaces. Each port supports 1 voice
terminal, such as 500 (rotary dial) and 2500 terminals (DTMF dial) from a tip/ring pair.
Each port also sends or receives signaling to and from a station; such as an analog
telephone, answering machine, facsimile and loop-start CO port AUDIX. The
TN2215/TN2183 provides rotary digit 1 recall, ground-key recall, and programmable flash
timing. Additional support is provided for selectable ringing cadence, LED message
waiting, and secondary lightning protection.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
176
The TN2215/TN2183 supports on-premises (in-building) wiring with either touch-tone or
rotary dialing and with or without the LED message waiting indicators. It supports
off-premises wiring (out-of-building only with certified protection equipment) with either
DTMF or rotary dialing, but LED message waiting indicators are not supported
off-premises. Neon message waiting indicators are not supported.
A maximum of 6 to 8 simultaneous ports ringing is allowed depending on the ringing
cadence selected. The TN2215/TN2183 supports A-Law and µ-Law companding and
administrable timers.
The TN2215/TN2183 also supports balanced ringing (when configured for France with
TN2202 ring generator circuit pack) and DTMF sending levels appropriate for
CONVERSANT.
The TN2215/TN2183 is impedance and gain selectable for multiple countries. For more
information, contact your Lucent Technologies representative.
The TN2215/TN2183 supports the following terminals:
Table 42.
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN2215/TN2183
Terminal
Wire Size
Maximum Range
2/0.5
500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
2500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
6200-Type
7102A-Series
8100-Series
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
2/0.5
mm)
3,100 ft. (945 m)
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
24 AWG (0.2 mm
Continued on next page
TN2224B 24-Port, 2-Wire DCP Digital Line
The TN2224B has 24 DCP ports that can connect to 2-wire terminals such as the 6400-,
8400-, or 9400-Series digital voice terminals and the 302C Attendant Console.
The TN2224B supports either A-Law or µ-Law companding (software selectable).
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Table 43.
177
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN2224B
Terminal
Wire Size
Maximum Range
302C Attendant Console 24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
6400-Series
8400-Series
9400-Series
3,500 ft. (1,067) m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
3,500 ft. (1,067) m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
3,500 ft. (1,067) m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
3,500 ft. (1,067) m)
For more information see the Allowable Intra-premises Cabling Distances, Table 45 in the
Technical Specifications chapter of this book.
TN2238 ATM Trunk/Port-Network Interface
for Multi-Mode Fiber (replaced by TN2305)
The TN2238 is not supported with DEFINITY ECS R8.
TN2238 ATM circuit packs replace TN570B/C Expansion Interface circuit packs when
ATM is used for the Center-Stage Switch of a Port Network (R7r only), and they support
ATM trunking and wide-area network (WAN) connectivity (for ATM Circuit Emulation
Service, see TN2305). The TN2238 can be connected to an ATM-based Center-Stage
Switch or an ATM network. It uses standard, multi-mode, 155.52-MHz, OC-3c fiber.
Up to 2 TN2238 ATM port-network expansion interfaces can be installed per carrier.
TN2242 Digital Trunk (Japan 2MB TTC)
The TN2242 supports versions of Channel Associated Signaling and ISDN-PRI signaling
that are peculiar to the TTC private networking environment used in Japan. It supports
the special line-coding and framing used on 2.048-Mbps Japanese trunks. The TN2242
connects DEFINITY with other vendor equipment and with other DEFINITY switches via
the TDM device that is commonly used throughout Japan for this purpose.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
Issue 1
April 2000
178
TN2301 Logic Switch for R6/R7/R8
Provides service to the customer when the link to the main R6/R7/R8 processor fails or is
severed, or when the R6/R7/R8 processor or Center -Stage Switch fails. The TN2301
Survivable Remote Switch (SRS) circuit pack connects the SREPN links (fiber or T1/E1)
to the appropriate PPN for call processing. It does this under control of the TN775C
maintenance circuit pack which monitors the health of the expansion interface TN570B.
Not for ATM PNC.
TN2305 ATM-CES Trunk/Port-Network
Interface for Multi-Mode Fiber (Category A
only)
The TN2305 provides an ATM-based replacement for the TN570B/C expansion interface.
This interface uses OC-3c or STM-1 155-Mbps multimode fiber. The TN2305 supports
both trunk and port-network connectivity. As a trunk, the TN2305 uses Circuit Emulation
Service (CES) to emulate up to 8 ISDN-PRI trunks on an ATM facility. As a port-network
expansion interface, the TN2305 connects port networks to an ATM switch that provides
port network connectivity for an R7r or later network. The TN2305 provides echo
cancellation.
The TN2305 does not support hybrid port-networks that use both ATM and CSS
simultaneously. TN2305s must connect all port networks through the ATM switch. Direct
connect EPNs are not supported.
TN2306 ATM-CES Trunk/Port-Network
Interface for Single-Mode Fiber (Category A
only)
The TN2306 circuit pack has the same features as the TN2305 but supports single-mode
fiber.
The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device. The LASER device operates
within the following parameters:
■
Maximum Power Output: -8 dBm
■
Wavelength: 1310 nm
■
Mode Field Diameter: 8.8 microns
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
179
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
IEC 825 1993
! CAUTION:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
TN2308 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk for
Brazil
The TN2308 uses 8 ports for immediate-start and wink-start direct inward dialing (DID)
trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal leads.
DEFINITY requires the TN2308 to support Brazil Block Collect Call. TN2308’s
transmission characteristics comply with Brazilian telecom standards for PBXs.
TN2313 DS1 Interface (US (24-Channel) or
International (32-Channel))
The TN2313 DS1 port board interfaces a DS1 trunk to the switch backplane via port slots
that are standard for DEFINITY products. The TN2313 is compatible with previous DS1
circuit packs, including the TN464F (V19 and below), the TN2464 (V19 and below), and
the TN767E DS1, except that it does not provide for packet adjunct capabilities. The
TN2313 supports a variety of applications, including networking of DEFINITY switches,
international trunk types, video teleconferencing, and wideband data transmission.
The TN2313 DS1 interface can be configured for domestic (24-channel, 1.544 Mbps) or
international (32-channel, 2.048 Mbps) use. The TN2313 can supply two 8-Khz reference
signals to the switch backplane for optional use by the tone/clock board in synchronizing
the system clock to the received line clock.
TN2400 Net/Pkt Backplane Connection (R6si
and older field upgrades when reusing the
existing Control Cabinet only)
See TN794/TN2400 Sandwich Board Assembly.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
180
TN2464 DS1 Interface, T1/E1 (International
only)
The TN2464 DS1 circuit pack supports T1 (24-channel) and E1 (32-channel) digital
facilities. In ISDN-PRI applications, the ISDN D-channel connects to the TN778 packet
control and the TN765 processor interface (R8 or later si) or the TN1655 packet interface
(R8r or later) via the LAN bus. The TN2464 has the same functionality as the TN464F,
which is for US and Canada offers only.
The TN2464 circuit pack provides:
■
test jack access to the T1/E1 line.
■
Board-level administrable A-Law and µ-Law companding
■
CRC-4 generation and checking (E1 only)
■
Stratum 3 clock capability
■
support for the 120A Channel Service Unit Module
■
CO, TIE, DID, off-premises station (OPS) port types that use robbed-bit signaling
protocol, proprietary bit-oriented signaling (BOS) 24th-channel signaling protocol,
or DMI-BOS 24th-channel signaling protocol
■
Unpolarized, balanced-pair, line-out (LO) and line-in (LI) signal leads.
■
Support for Russian incoming ANI.
■
Support for the enhanced maintenance capabilities of the enhanced integrated
channel service unit (ICSU)
■
■
Support for CONVERSANT®
Channel-associated signaling protocols for many countries (for details, contact
your Lucent Technologies representative)
TN2793/TN2793B 24-Port, 2-Wire Analog
Line with Caller ID (International Offers or
US and Canada Category B only)
The TN2793/TN2793B installs in Category B ONLY. It is a dual coded, analog line
24-port, that performs all the functions of the TN746B, 16-port analog line circuit pack.
Each port supports 1 voice terminal, such as 500 (rotary dial) and 2500 terminals (DTMF
dial).
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
181
The TN2793/TN2793B supports on-premises (in-building) wiring with either touch-tone or
rotary dialing and with or without the LED and neon message waiting indicators. The
TN2793/tn2793B supports off-premises wiring (out-of-building only with certified
protection equipment) with either DTMF or rotary dialing, but LED or neon message
waiting indicators are not supported off-premises.
The TN2793/TN2793B along with a TN755B neon power unit per carrier or per
single-carrier cabinet, supports voice terminals equipped with neon message waiting
indicators (on-premises use only). The TN2793/TN2793B supports 3 ringer loads, only 1
voice terminal can have an LED or neon message waiting indicator. The
TN2793/TN2793B allows a maximum of 12 simultaneous ports ringing.
The TN2793/TN2793B supports A-Law and µ-law companding and administrable timers.
The TN2793/TN2793B supports queue warning level lights associated with the DDC and
UCD features, recorded announcements associated with the Intercept Treatment feature,
and PagePac paging system for the Loudspeaker Paging feature. Additional support is
provided for external alerting devices associated with the TAAS feature, neon message
waiting indicators, and modems The TN2793/TN2793B also supports secondary lightning
protection.
Table 44.
Terminals and wiring configurations supported by the TN2793/TN2793B
Terminal
Wire Size
500-Type
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
Maximum Range
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
7102A-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm
2/0.5
mm)
20,000 ft. (6,096 m)
8100-Series
24 AWG (0.2 mm2/0.5 mm)
12,000 ft. (3,657m)
2500-Type
6200-Type
Continued on next page
TN-CCSC-1 PRI to DASS Converter
The TNCCSC-1 circuit pack converts ISDN-PRI to a DASS interface. DASS is a 2-Mbps
interface using a 75-Ohm coaxial transmission facility. One TNCCSC-1 circuit pack can
support up to 2 TN464F DS1 Interface circuit packs. A Y cable and an 888B 75-Ohm
coaxial adapter connect to the public network facility.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
Circuit Packs and Related Hardware
182
TN-CCSC-2 PRI to DPNSS Converter
The TNCCSC-2 circuit pack converts ISDN-PRI to a DPNSS interface. DPNSS is a
2-Mbps interface using a 75-Ohm coaxial transmission facility. One TNCCSC-2 circuit
pack can support up to 2 TN464F DS1 interface circuit packs. A Y cable connects to the
public network facility.
TN-CCSC-3 PRI to DPNSS Converter
The TN-CCSC-3 circuit pack is the same as the TN-CSSC-2 with a 120-Ohm twisted pair
interface.
TN-C7 PRI to SS7 Converter
Provides a gateway interface between the TN464 and the public signaling network.
Integrates DASS, DPNSS and SS7 into a single board type. The TN-C7 is intended to
support international service provider Call Center customers. It is not designed for
operation in the US or Canada.
TN-CIN Voice Multiplexer
Provides QSIG and private networking transparency on demand across a switched
network.
UN330B Duplication Interface for r only
In high- and critical-reliability systems with 2 SPEs, 1 UN330B resides in each SPE and
connects to the other UN330B. The UN330Bs provide control and communication paths
between the SPEs to keep the standby SPE ready to assume control if the active SPE
fails. The UN330Bs select active/ standby mode for the 2 SPEs, shadow (copy) the active
SPE memory writes into the standby SPE memory, and support inter-SPE
communications.
The duplication channel is a bi-directional high-speed path between the 2 SPEs. When
memory shadowing is active, all shadowed memory writes on the active processor’s bus
are sent across the link and written into the standby processor’s memory. Standby
memory writes are not sent to the active processor.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
183
UN331B Processor for r only
The UN331B controls the system and executes stored programs that perform call
processing activity and maintenance. The UN331B is a RISC designed around a MIPS
R3000A CPU operating at 33 MHz. It employs 32-bit address and data buses to obtain
and execute instructions at a rate approaching 1 instruction per clock cycle. The 256
kbyte instruction cache with burst-mode refill and 256 kbyte data cache are key to the
performance of the processor. A read/write buffer chip tailors the UN331B to the call
processing environment.
Peripheral devices residing on the UN331B are positioned outside the CPU cache
structure and interface to the CPU through the read/write buffers. These peripherals
include 512 kbytes of ROM for the monitor, counters/timers, UARTs, control/status/error
registers, and the logic that provides bus arbitration and the Bus Time-Out feature.
The UN331B interfaces to the 32-bit multiplexed address/data processor bus (PM-Bus)
and the 32-bit processor expansion bus (PX-Bus). The PM-Bus is for all processor write
operations and single-word (4-byte) read operations. Multiple-word or burst reads are
performed using the PM-Bus to transfer the address to main memory, then the words of
the burst are returned using both the PM-Bus and PX-Bus.
UN332B/C Mass Storage/Network Control for
r only
The UN332 provides an interface between the UN331B processor and the small
computer system interface (SCSI) bus for access to the mass storage system (MSS)
such as a disk drive. The UN332 also provides TDM network control for the PPN, and
terminates 1 end of the processor-multiplexed bus.
The UN332C allows the interface of the DEFINITY to the TN2211 optic disk drive. The
circuit pack includes the SCSI Host Adapter, the ArchAngel and the Tone/Clock switching
logic.
DEFINITY Adjuncts
The following table lists the adjuncts for R8 or later systems. After the table, detailed
descriptions of each adjunct are provided.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
Table 45.
184
DEFINITY Adjuncts
Apparatus Code
Name
Type
105D
Isolating Data Interface
Adjunct
120A
Channel Service Unit Module
Adjunct
122A
Music-on-Hold Interface for France
Port
127A
E1 120 Ohm/75 Ohm Quad Balun Box
Adjunct
300A
Single-Mode Fiber Optic Transceiver
Network
315x/316x-Series
Channel Service Unit
Adjunct
400A
Ti Splitter for ATM Synchronization (being
replaced by the 401A)
Adjunct
401A
T1 100 Ohm Synch Splitter for ATM (replacing
the 400A)
Adjunct
402A
E1 120 Ohm (twisted pair) Synch Splitter for ATM Adjunct
Synchronization
403A
E1 75 Ohm (coax) Synch Splitter for ATM
Adjunct
700A
DS1 CPE Loopback Jack
Network
9823A/B
Multi-Mode Fiber Transceiver
Network
BU3200A/B
Battery Interface Unit
Power
BTD08
Busy Tone Disconnect for Loop-Start, 2-Wire,
Analog Trunks
Port
Customer-Supplied
ESPA-Compliant Radio-Paging Equipment
Adjunct
Customer-Supplied
External Alarm Equipment
Adjunct
J58907AA-1
Personal Communications Manager (Forum)
Adjunct
none
DECT/ETSI-Compliant DEFINITY Wireless
Business System for Non-US Markets
Adjunct
RM0850HA100
Rectifier Module
Power
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
185
105D Isolating Data Interface
The 105D Isolating Data Interface is an adapter that lets you connect adjunct devices and
switches that use different data-cable interfaces. The 105D IDI connects one 25-pin
RS-232 cable to one 37-pin RS-449 cable. Eight DIP switches let you configure the IDI for
a direct connection (switches 0-3 UP, 4-9 DOWN) or a connection via a MUX or modem
(switches 0-3 DOWN, 4-9 UP). DIP settings are printed on the IDI (see Figure 49).
37-pin RS-449 interface
ADJUNCT - B
J4
105D
ISOLATING
DATA
INTERFACE
UNIT
SWITCH - B
J3
J1
SWITCH - A
DIRECT CONNECT
O N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MUX / MODEM
ADJUNCT - A
J2
h1df105d LJK 010699
Figure 49. 105D Isolating Data Interface
25-pin RS-232 interface
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
186
120A Channel Service Unit Module
The 120A channel service unit (CSU) module connects to either a TN464E/F or a
TN767D/E DS1 circuit pack on 1 end. The other end connects to the network interface
smart jack. The 120A is powered from the +5 VDC port carrier power supply and uses a
maximum of 1.2 Watts.
In combination with the DS1 circuit pack, it provides the essential functions of external
CSUs. The TN464/767 and switch administration support all framing and line coding
options.
The 120A is small, a little larger than a wallet, is easier to install than an external CSU,
and does not require any option switch settings or DS1 cable.
Vintage 2 of the 120A CSU module (the 120A2) provides enhancements to support the
payload loopback function available when the ESF framing format is selected. This 700A
loopback jack is controlled from the network side using the data link provided by the ESF
framing format. This provides a loopback of data back to the network and operates as
defined in AT&T TR54016-1989.
122A Music-on-Hold Interface for France
A highly reliable music source is provided by the wall-mounted 122A adjunct circuit pack.
It provides the correct electrical transformation between a port of the TN2183 analog line
circuit and a customer- provided music source. The 122A monitors the music source,
and, if music is not present at the input, switches to a Hold Tone generated by the
interface itself.
127A E1 120 Ohm/75 Ohm Quad Balun Box
The Balun box was designed primarily for the TN1654 DS1 converter. The 127A is
capable of handling up to four E1 facilities. The Balun box is used in any application that
requires impendence matching between 120 Ohm and 75 Ohm flavors of CEPT E1. In
the case of the TN1654, the 127A was created to allow any 120 Ohm E1 balanced signal
source to be converted to 75 Ohm un-balanced. It has the ability to selectively ground the
shields of the 75 Ohm BNC connectors. Each balun in the Balun box is an impendence
matching transformer, common mode filter and two shield ground selector switch.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
T
187
T
A
12
0
R
75
1
T
T
R
5B
AL
75
0/7
UN
0
12
D
2
E1
12
C
12
0
R
1
80 27A
32
30
1
10
75
B
12
0
R
75
3
h1df127a KLC 083199
4
Figure 50. 127A E1 120 Ohm/75 Ohm Quad Balun Box
300A Single-Mode Fiber Optic Transceiver
The 300A is a single-mode lightwave transceiver that transmits and receives light up to
115,000 feet (22 miles or 35 km). Single-mode fiber optic cable connects from the
lightwave transceiver on 1 EPN carrier to the lightwave transceiver on another PPN or
EPN carrier. The cable consists of 2 separate 8-10-micron core diameter fiber optic
cables. The fiber optic connection allows full duplex (simultaneous bi-directional)
transmission.
Fiber loss must be less than 17 dB. Saturation may occur if distances are short; simple
in-line attenuators may be required if the total loss on the fiber link is less than 10 dBm.
An optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) test is recommended to determine specific
fiber optic hardware requirements.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
188
315x/316x-Series Channel Service Unit
The 315x/316x-series of the Channel Service Unit (CSU) is an interface between the T1
digital network and the customer premises equipment. A CSU provides an interface
between the DSX1 levels of a DS1 Interface circuit pack and the levels of a DS1
transmission facility. The CSU also
■
Isolates the DS1 interface circuit pack from DC voltages that may be on the facility
■
Provides jacks to test access to receive and transmit signals between the DS1
circuit pack and the CSU
■
Provides secondary surge protection between the DS1 facility and the DS1 circuit
pack
■
Provides loopbacks for the signals from the DS1 circuit pack and from the facility
for fault isolation purposes
■
Allows software configuration menus to display for quick and easy operation
The 3150/3160 units can sit on a desktop or a shelf. The Model 3151 is a circuit card and
installs in a COMSPHERE® 3000-series carrier.
400A T1 Splitter for ATM (being replaced by
the 401A (Category A only)
The 400A splitter supplies the 8-KHz clock signal from the incoming T1 to an external
ATM switch via a twisted pair cable. It attaches to the 50-pin connector behind a DS1 (T1)
circuit pack.
In the USA, the 400A resides behind the Channel Service Unit, which serves as a barrier
between the 400A and the public network.
401A T1 100 Ohm Sync Splitter for ATM
(replacing the 400A) (Category A only)
The 401A splitter supplies the clock signal from an incoming T1 to an external ATM
switch via twisted pair cable. The 401A supports distances of up to 1000 feet from the
sync splitter to 1 or 2 ATM switches, with a loss of 6 dB allowed in the cable. It is only for
use on DEFINITY ATM PNC and WAN PNC configurations on the r model. The 401A
attaches to the 50-pin connector behind the DS1 (T1) circuit pack. It is designed to
comply with all the applicable US domestic and international signaling, EMC and safety
specifications. The 401A is self-contained, which should reduce service calls that are
related to ATM timing synchronization connectivity.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
Issue 1
April 2000
189
402A E1 S120 Ohm (twisted pair) Sync
Splitter for ATM (Category A only)
The 402A splitter supplies the 8-KHz clock signal from the incoming E1 to an external
ATM switch via a twisted pair cable. The 402A supports distances of up to 1000 feet from
the sync splitter to the ATM switch, with a loss of 6 dB allowed in the cable. It is only for
use on DEFINITY ATM PNC and WAN PNC configurations on the r model. The 402A
attaches to the 50-pin connector behind a DS1 (E1) circuit pack. It is designed to comply
with all the applicable ETSI signaling, EMC and safety specifications.
403A E1 75 Ohm (coax) Sync Splitter for ATM
(Category A only)
The 403A is sometimes used to extend an E1 from the network interface where E1 is
provided. One or two 75-ohm cables are used from the 403A splitter to 1 or 2 ATM
switches. The 403A supports distances of up to 1000 feet from the sync splitter to the
ATM switch, with a loss of 6 dB allowed in the cable. The 403A is only for use on
DEFINITY ATM PNC and WAN PNC configurations on the r model. It attaches to the
50-pin connector behind a DS1 (E1) circuit pack. The 403A is designed to comply with all
the applicable ETSI signaling, EMC and safety specifications.
700A DS1 CPE Loopback Jack
The 700A is a loopback device intended for permanent installation in DS1 house wiring at
the network interface (NI) point when ICSUs are used. The 700A allows all customer
wiring between the system and the NI to be looped and tested, either locally or remotely,
via the management terminal. Using the 700A, DS1 problems can be quickly isolated to
either the customer premises or to the external DS1 span.
The 700A operates with any vintage of TN767E (or later) or TN464F (or later) DS1 circuit
packs and with G3V3 Release 3 (or later) software. The unit operates with the 120A2 (or
later) integrated channel service unit (ICSU); not the 31xx series of CSUs or other
external CSUs or earlier ICSUs.
The 700A is required when DC power appears at the interface to the ICSU. The 700A
isolates the ICSU from the DC power and properly loops the DC span power. The 700A is
also used when no smart jack is installed by the local phone company.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
190
9823A/B Multi-Mode Fiber Transceiver
The 9823A-type lightwave transceiver transmits light up to 4,900 feet (0.93 miles or 1.5
km). The 9823B lightwave transceiver transmits light up to 25,000 feet (4.73 miles or 7.6
km). Multi-mode fiber optic cable connects from the lightwave transceiver on 1 carrier to
the lightwave transceiver on another carrier. The cable consists of 2 separate
62.5-micron diameter fiber optic cables or 50-micron diameter fiber optic cables. The fiber
optic connection allows full duplex (simultaneous bi-directional) transmission.
BU3200A/B Battery Interface Unit
The Battery Interface Unit (BIU) controls the RM0850HA100 rectifier modules, manages
the batteries, and reports the status of system power. The BIU provides the emergency
power off option and provides all battery alarm interfaces for internal and external alarms.
BTD08 Busy Tone Disconnect for Loop-Start,
2-Wire, Analog Trunks
This adjunct provides the method to detect disconnect of incoming calls connected by
loop start 2-wire analog trunks used in some countries. In these cases, the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) sends voice band tones instead of line disconnect,
to indicate the caller has disconnected; while the called end remains connected.
This adjunct prevents connecting abandoned calls to the answering call center agent,
locking up trunk-to-trunk connections, or locking up connections to repetitive
announcements.
Customer-Supplied ESPA-Compliant
Radio-Paging Equipment
The European-Standard Paging Access (ESPA) radio paging interface is the Western
European standard paging protocol. The interface to the DEFINITY system is via an ASAI
link.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
191
Customer-Supplied External Alarm
Equipment
The external alarm allows analog line ports to be used as additional external device alarm
inputs to the DEFINITY System. This feature operates with all supported analog line
circuit packs and with all maintenance circuit packs. This interface does not include a
contact relay closure.
Each analog port used for this feature is administered as an external alarm connection.
This administration includes information identifying the port, the external device
connecting to the port, the alarm level assigned to the external device, and the “product
identifier” of the adjunct or external equipment.
J58907AA-1 Personal Communications
Manager (Forum)
The Forum Personal Communications Manager (PCM) is available outside the United
States. The PCM uses a CommunicoreTM Mobility Manager that serves as an adjunct to
DEFINITY ECS, to manage mobility. The system uses cordless telephone generation 2
(CT2) technology, which is a global standard for wireless telephone service. This
standard defines the radio interface between the Forum pocket telephones and the base
stations in the system.
The PCM system manager provides superior system administration capabilities. The
PCM personal communications manager can accommodate even the largest businesses.
It has the following maximum capacities:
■
500 wireless telephones
■
126 base stations
■
6 PRI interfaces to DEFINITY
■
1 Sun workstation
■
14.4 (minimum Baud rate) modem for remote maintenance
■
2 maintenance telephones
■
4 million square foot (371,000 square meter) coverage area
The PCM communicates to the DEFINITY ECS via a DS1 interface (ISDN-PRI).
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Cabinets, Carriers, and Circuit Packs
DEFINITY Adjuncts
192
DECT/ETSI-Compliant DEFINITY Wireless
Business System for Non-US Markets
The DEFINITY Wireless Business System Digitally Enhanced Cordless
Telecommunications (DECT) provides mobility management with an adjunct processor.
The system uses the DECT/ETSI standard, which defines the interface between the
wireless phones and the base stations.
The DEFINITY wireless business system (DWBS) has the following capacities:
■
360 wireless telephones
■
24 base stations
■
12 E1 CAS links to DEFINITY
■
1 administration PC
■
1 modem for remote maintenance
The DWBS-DECT adjunct communicates to the DEFINITY ECS via a DS1 interface
(providing E1 CAS).
RM0850HA100 Rectifier Module
The rectifier module is used in the J588980CH Power Distribution Unit. It operates as an
integral part of a complete power system with battery backup. The modules operate in a
redundant, high reliability mode to provide –48 VDC at 850 Watts to a common power
bus.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Representative Number of Lines/Trunks
193
4 —Technical Specifications
This section includes the following technical specifications on the capabilities,
performance, and feature capacities:
■
Representative Number of Lines
■
Call Performance
■
Additional Hardware to Use Features
■
Allocation of Buttons
■
Cabling Distances
■
Initialization and Recovery
■
Call Progress Tones
■
Indicator Lamp Signals
Representative Number of
Lines/Trunks
Table 46 lists the representative number of lines/trunks for each configuration of PPNs,
EPNs, and CSSs in R8. The actual number of lines depends on the features and
characteristics of the configuration.
Table 46.
Representative Number of Lines/Trunks
Configuration
R8csi
R8si
R8r
1 processor port network (PPN)
400
400
800
Direct connect with 1 PPN and 2 EPNs
Does not
apply
2400/400
2400/400
1 switch node (SN) in the CSS with 1 PPN and
15 EPNs
Does not
apply
Does not
apply
12,500/
2000
3 SNs in the CSS with 1 PPN and 43 EPNs
Does not
apply
Does not
apply
25,000/
4000
1 PPN and 4 EPNs with ATM port network con- Does not
nectivity (Category A only)
apply
Does not
apply
25,000/
4000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Call Performance
194
Call Performance
Table 47 lists call processing performance for R8. This is also termed as Busy Hour Call
Completion or BHCC. Realistic system capacity is what a DEFINITY ECS system,
including a processor, TDM bus, Packet bus, etc., can support on a sustained basis. With
allowances for system maintenance, administration, audits, etc., the system is still able to
meet the various timing requirements, such as cut through. The numbers are based on
0.57 call processing occupancy, allowing 0.28 for maintenance, administration, audits,
etc., and 0.15 for normal bursts in traffic and for minimization of queuing delays in the
processor. Keep in mind that the following chart is intended to be a guideline. The BHCC
rate may vary depending on what features are being used with which DEFINITY ECS.
NOTE:
Call performance can vary with different customer applications. A Processor
Occupancy Evaluation (POE) may be required.
Table 47.
Call Processing Performance (BHCC, calls per hour)
System Type
R8csi
R8si
R8r
All Analog
10,000
20,000
150,000
General business
10,000
20,000
100,000
ISDN
10,000
20,000
40,000
Automatic call distribution (ACD)
10,000
20,000
70,000
Inbound call management (ICM)
10,000
20,000
30,000
Outbound call management
(OCM)
10,000
20,000
130,000
Computer Telephony Interface
(CTI)
10,000
20,000
70,000
In the case of the csi model and si model, we allow for higher call volumes than would be
expected from the number of stations, or in the case of ACD, the number of agents
without having to perform a POE.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
195
The system capacity for the r model is dependant upon the call mix and is bounded by
processor occupancy and the number of stations. The number of agents in ACD
applications and the TDM bus do not limit the BHCC rate as it does for the csi model and
si model. In the case of the r model, when the expected call volume will exceed 70% of
the System Capacity BHCC rate, a processor occupancy evaluation must be performed
by the SDSC before certification of a new order or an upgrade.
The r model ISDN is limited by packet capabilities.
Table 48 lists response times for R8.
Table 48.
Response Times
Attribute
Response Time
Call processing
General voice path cut-through: 750 ms
Attendant ring tip: 260 ms
Direct extension selection (DXS) lamp update: 1 second
Announcement circuit pack upload (no call processing load):
40 minutes
System management
4 to 6 seconds mean response time
Maintenance
High-priority periodic tests must be completed within 1 hour.
High-priority scheduled tests must be completed once each
day, but not during busy hours.
Booting and recovery
11 minutes (not including announcements)
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49 describes all features and any additional hardware required to use features. The
hardware consists of circuit packs installed in carriers, devices in an auxiliary cabinet, and
external devices. Not all feature applications require additional hardware.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Issue 1
April 2000
196
s
Table 49.
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Feature
Hardware
Abandoned call
search
Central office (CO) trunk circuit pack.
Abbreviated dial- Additional call progress tone detector ports on a tone detector circuit
ing
pack if the special wait character is used frequently.
Abbreviated dial- No additional hardware required except as required for abbreviated
ing (enhanced)
Dialing, above.
ACCUNET service
Data module and printer.
Adjunct switch
Up to 8 interfaces are supported.
application interR7si & later: the NetPkt, TN794 is required for ASAI applications. An
face (ASAI) (CatTN570EI circuit pack is also required for system connectivity in mulegory A only)
tiple PN systems. R7r & later: the packet bus operation of the switch
precludes requirement for a packet control or a NetPkt. In the R7 si/r
and later switches, packet applications such as ASAI, require that a
MAPD/LAN Gateway be provided, a maintenance/test circuit pack
(TN771) in the PPN and TN570 E1 circuit packs for EPN connectivity. In a critical reliability system, a maintenance/ test circuit pack is
required in each additional EPN.
The DEFINITY LAN Gateway is connected to the CallVisor Adjunct.
Note: Older systems might have a BRI circuit pack installed for this
application, however, the use of a BRI pack limits the Adjunct to a
286 processor. This, a BRI circuit pack is not a recommended solution.
Note for csi: R6.3.2 and later csi models use the TN801B MAPD —
the TN771 is not required. The R6csi model supports 120 messages/sec. If the C-LAN (TN799) is present in R7 and later csi models, throughput is increased to 240 messages/sec.
Administrable
language displays
No additional hardware required.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
197
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Administration
No additional hardware required.
without hardware
Administered
connection
Circuit packs: data line, digital line, BRI line, pooled modem, or DS1
Interface. Data modules: 7400 series voice terminals; 7500 series
BRI voice terminals with ADM.
Agent call handling
No additional hardware required. CallMaster voice terminals are recommended for ACD agents.
Alphanumeric
dialing
No additional hardware required.
Alternate facility
restriction levels
No additional hardware required.
Alternate operations support
system alarm
number
No additional hardware required.
Announcement
See recorded announcement.
Announcements Hardware to support recorded announcement, if equipped. See
— intercept treat- recorded announcement.
ment
Answer machine
detection
Call classifier circuit pack (TN2182B or TN744B or later).
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
198
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
ATM port-netR7r or later only: ATM interface circuit pack, TN2305 or TN2306
work connectivity (replaces the TN570B expansion interface), software-selected OC3c
(Category A only) or STM-1 facility.
Establishes calls between port networks as Switched Virtual Connections (SVCs) based on Q.2931 signaling, as per the ATM forum
UNI 3.1 specification. A private ATM network provides the inter-port
network switching. Customers adopting this option no longer require
switch node carriers and must replace all EIs with ATM circuit packs
(hybrid EI- and ATM-based port network connectivity is not supported). DS1 converter remote-port networks are not supported.
ATM CES Trunks R7 or later only: Requires TN2305 or TN2306. Uses ATM Forum
(Category A only) VTOA-0078 to support up to 8 ISDN-PRI emulated circuits over separate PVCs. Each circuit has 1 D-channel and 6 to 30 B-channels.
Additionally, the TN799 is required for the csi switch model.
Attendant
auto-manual
splitting
No additional hardware required other than an attendant console.
Attendant automatic start
No additional hardware required other than an attendant console.
Attendant
backup Alerting
Backup telephone.
Attendant call
waiting
No additional hardware required other than an attendant console.
Attendant calling
of inward
restricted stations
No additional hardware required other than an attendant console.
Attendant console
This feature requires a port on a TN754B, TN2181, or TN2224 digital
line circuit pack for each attendant console to be assigned. For reliability, the attendant consoles should not be assigned to ports on the
same TN754B circuit pack. For example, if 3 digital line circuit packs.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
199
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Attendant control of trunk
group access
Attendant console.
Attendant crisis
alert and other
hospitality
enhancements
Attendant console, backup telephone, or digital pager.
Attendant direct
extension selection with Busy
lamp field
Selector console.
Attendant direct
trunk group
selection
No additional hardware required other than an attendant console.
Attendant display No additional hardware required other than an attendant console.
Attendant intrusion (call offer)
Attendant console.
Attendant override of diversion
features
Attendant console.
Attendant priority queue
No additional hardware required.
Attendant recall
Attendant console.
Attendant room
status
Selector console.
Attendant serial
calling
Attendant console.
Attendant
vectoring
No additional hardware required.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
Issue 1
April 2000
200
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Audible message waiting
No additional hardware required.
Audio information exchange
(AUDIX) adjunct
voice mail system
Voice: AUDIX machine and appropriate ports on analog line circuit
packs.
Data control link: R7si uses the processor interface (PI) RS-232 connector on the rear panel of the PPN control carrier and a data module. If the PI connector is not available, a port on a digital line circuit
pack and a data module are required in addition to a PI link.
R7r: port on packet gateway circuit pack. AUDIX networking requires
ports on 1 or more digital line circuit packs.
AUDIX (audio
information
exchange)
embedded voice
mail system
DEFINITY AUDIX assembly resides in 2 consecutive port slots for
the si and r models (using the SCC and MCC cabinets). Two slots
are also used in the CMC unless placed in slot 6 — then only one
slot is used. Digital port mode does not require additional hardware
for a data control link and supports only 16 AUDIX ports. Control link
mode requires the same additional data control link hardware as an
AUDIX adjunct listed above. The administration terminal can connect via: direct connection, modems, ADU, G3-MA, and G3-MT.
Control link mode is not available with R7csi.
Authorization
codes
No additional hardware required.
Auto start and
don’t split
Attendant console.
Automatic callback
No additional hardware required other than an available feature button.
Automatic alternate routing
(AAR) and Automatic route
selection (ARS)
No additional hardware is required for a stand-alone system. For a
private network, additional tie trunks and tone detector circuit packs
may be required.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
201
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Automatic call
distribution
(ACD) Does not
require added
hardware.
If needed: 1 port on an analog line circuit pack per auxiliary queue
warning level lamp. Hardware to support recorded announcement or
music-on-hold. See Recorded announcement and music-on-hold.
Voice terminals (not 2500-type sets) are required for agents. If CMS
is used, CMS hardware is required (see CMS).
Automatic circuit
assurance
Voice terminal with display or a speech synthesis circuit pack.
Automatic incom- 715 BCS management terminal, display-equipped voice terminal, or
ing call display
voice terminal that can display information through an attached data
terminal. The terminals require a PRI or DCS link; otherwise, they
are station-to-station only.
Automatic trans- TN771C maintenance/test circuit pack or later.
mission measurement system
(ATMS)
Automatic
wake-up
If voice prompting is used, a voice synthesizer circuit pack is
needed. Each circuit pack has 4 ports to provide voice prompting. If
voice synthesis announcements are used, 2 ports are reserved for
announcements. AUDICHRON is used for customized recorded
announcements. Journal printer and interface. For automatic
wake-up with integrated announcement, the integrated announcement circuit pack is needed. If wakeup via Tones is used, no additional hardware is required.
Barrier code
aging
System printer and cable if a printed report is desired.
Basic call management system
(BCMS) reports
System printer and cable if a printed report is desired.
Brazil block collect call
TN753B analog DID circuit pack vintage 1 or later, TN465B CO circuit pack vintage 1 or later, and TN464F digital line circuit pack vintage 9 or later.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
202
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Bridged call
Multi-appearance voice terminal with available 2 light (red and
appearance —
green) buttons. A Call Coverage module or expansion module can
multi-appearprovide up to 20 bridged call appearances.
ance voice terminal
Bridged call
appearance —
single-line voice
terminal
Multi-button set with available 2 light (red and green) buttons. A Call
Coverage module or expansion module can provide up to 20 bridged
call appearances.
Busy tone disconnect
A busy tone disconnect adjunct and cables are required.
Busy verification
of terminals and
trunks
No additional hardware required. Need feature buttons on multi-button set or attendant console.
Call-by-call service selection
(PRI) feature)
R8si: DS1 Interface and PI or NetPkt circuit packs. R8r: DS1 interface circuit pack. R8csi:The processor supplies the function.
Call charge infor- Same hardware as ISDN and CDR. See ISDN-PRI and Call Detail
mation
Recording (CDR).
Call coverage
No additional hardware is required.
Call coverage of
calls redirected
off-net
TN2182 vintage 4 or later tone-clock-tone detector and call classifier circuit pack and/or TN744C vintage 3 or later call classifier-detector circuit pack required.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
Issue 1
April 2000
203
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Call detail
recording (CDR)
All except R8r: a CDR output device can connect to the RS-232 port
on the processor circuit pack to eliminate the need for data modules
for the output devices below.
R8r: a CDR output device connects to either:
1. Packet data circuit pack cross-connected to a port on a digital
line circuit pack connected to a second data line circuit pack port
and then to an ADU, or
2. Packet data circuit pack cross-connected to a port on a digital
line circuit pack connected to a BRI line circuit pack connected
to a 7500 Data Module or a digital line connected to a data
module.
Reused equipment: printer, PC, or tape unit.
94A LSU — data module connected to a digital line circuit pack
port, or a modem connected to a port on an analog line circuit
pack with a pooled modem. Host computer — Private line
terminated at the system with a data module. A private line
modem is used if off-premises (out-of- building).
Call forwarding
all calls
No additional hardware is required.
Call forward
busy/ don’t
answer
No additional hardware is required.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
204
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Call management system
(CMS) (Category A only)
For R7 and later, all models, the ethernet port on the C-LAN board.
For si models: port on a processor interface circuit pack and,
depending on distance, an IDI or DSU. Alternatively, a port on a processor interface is connected to a data module. The data module is
connected to an administered connection through a port on each of
a pair of digital line circuit packs and terminates at the CMS.
For r models: port on a packet gateway circuit pack and, depending
on distance, an IDI or DSU. Alternatively, a port on a packet gateway
is connected to a data module. The data module is connected to an
administered connection through a port on each of a pair of digital
line circuit packs and terminates at the CMS.
Call park
No additional hardware required.
Call prompting
Each call prompting announcement requires a port on an integrated
announcement circuit pack or an external announcement facility. If
an external announcement facility is used, each announcement
requires a port on an analog line circuit pack. The call-classifier or
tone-clock circuit pack is required for touch-tone receivers to collect
digits input by callers.
Call vectoring
Announcement hardware is required. See Call Prompting.
CallVisor ASAI
A port on a BRI line circuit pack or DEFINITY LAN gateway con(Category A only) nected to the CallVisor adjunct. See ISDN-BRI.
Calling party
number/billing
number
(CPN/BN)
R8si: an interface link (requires a PI or NetPkt circuit pack) and a
data module are assigned. Alternately, a port is used on a digital line
circuit pack instead of a data module. The link is administered on the
system’s processor channel assignments form. The link is used as
an interface to an ISDN Gateway adjunct to support CPN/BN.
Optional ASAI Link (see ASAI for more information). Display terminals also require ACD related hardware. See the ACD feature. G3V4
and later systems do not support ISDN Gateway.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
Issue 1
April 2000
205
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Call pickup
(includes call
pickup alerting)
No additional hardware required.
Call waiting termination
No additional hardware required.
CAS (branch or
A tie trunk circuit pack for the release link trunk. Alternately, the PRI
main (Category A DS1 interface circuit pack can be used for the release link trunks of
only))
the CAS network.
Class of restriction
No additional hardware required.
Class of service
No additional hardware required.
CDR call splitTerminal and data module.
ting, CDR privacy
CDR multimedia
applications
server interface
(MASI) (Category A only)
No additional hardware required.
Centralized voice No additional hardware required.
mail via mode
codes
Code calling
access
Loudspeaker paging equipment and 1 port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack per zone, can be shared with the loudspeaker paging
access feature.
Conference attendant
Attendant console.
Conference - ter- Telephone.
minal
Conference/intru- No additional hardware required.
sion tones
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
206
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Constellation
A 6544 cluster controller is required to provide data connection to
voice/ data termi- the host. One of the following adjunct voice terminals is required:
nal support
7401D, 7406D, 602A1, or 603D1. The adjunct voice terminal can
function as a stand-alone station even if the Constellation is powered down.
Consult
No additional hardware required.
Cordless telephone support
An appropriate analog line or hybrid line circuit pack is used for the
cordless set.
Coverage callback
No additional hardware required.
Coverage incom- No additional hardware required other than available feature button
ing call Identifica- on a multi-button set.
tion
Customer provided equipment
(CPE) alarm
A customer-provided alarm such as a lamp, bell, or other device.
D-channel
backup
PRI DS1 interface circuit pack and PRI facilities. See ISDN-PRI.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
207
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Data call setup
Each DCP data module requires 1 port on a digital line circuit pack.
A data module shares the port with the associated voice terminal.
Reused equipment: each personal terminal 510D or 515 BCT
requires 1 port on a digital line circuit pack for shared use of voice
and data. Each 7400, 7401D, 7404D, 7406D, 7407D or
64xx/84xx/94xx voice terminal requires 1 port on a digital line circuit
pack for shared use of voice and data. Each BRI data module
requires 1 port on a BRI line circuit pack. Each 7505D w/ADM,
7506D with ADM, 7507D with ADM, 8510D with ADM, or 8520D with
ADM terminal requires 1 port on a BRI line circuit pack for shared
use of voice and data. Each 7500 or 8500 data module requires 1
port on a BRI line circuit pack for data. Each modem requires 1 port
on an analog line circuit pack. Modem pooling requires either a
modem pool circuit pack or a port on a digital line circuit pack with a
data module, and 1 port on an analog line circuit pack with analog
modem for each conversion resource. Keyboard dialing to off-premises (out of building) data endpoints requires call progress tone
detector ports on a tone detector circuit pack.
Data hot line
No additional hardware required.
Data only off-pre- Data module and 1 port on a TN754B, TN2181, or TN2224 digital
mises extensions line circuit pack.
Data privacy
No additional hardware required.
Data restriction
No additional hardware required.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
208
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
DCS features
r Model:
(All) (Category A
For releases before R7, a port on a PGATE (TN577) circuit pack and
only)
a data module or DSU are required. A tie trunk circuit pack or DS1
circuit pack for the tie trunks between switches.
For R7 and later, the C-LAN (TN799) circuit pack is needed for IP
connections.
si Model:
For releases before R7, the PI (TN765), NetCon (TN777B) and
PACCON (TN775) circuit packs.
For R7si and later, the NetPacket (TN794) and C-LAN (TN799) circuit packs.
csi Model:
For R7si and later, the NetPacket (TN794) and C-LAN (TN799) circuit packs.
DCS plus (Category A only)
PRI D-channel link: a PRI DS1 interface circuit pack is required and,
if required by the network provider, 1 CSU per span.
DCS over BX.25 R8si/r: A tie trunk circuit pack for the tie trunks between switches.
(Category A only) R8si: A port on a TN765 PI circuit pack. R8r: A port on a TN577
packet gateway circuit pack and a data module or DSU. R8csi: Not
available.
DCS+ (DCS over R8si/r: A port on a DS1 interface. A tie trunk circuit pack for the tie
ISDN) (Category trunks between switches.
A only)
R6 and later csi models require a DS1 circuit pack.
Default dialing
No additional hardware required.
DEFINITY
extender
DEFINITY DCP extender and external data module required to connect to DCP display stations such as the 8400-series DCP terminals
(2-wire mode only).
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
209
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
DEFINITY wire- TN789 radio controller and DS1 interface circuit packs.
less business
system
DEFINITY forum
personal communications manager
Demand print
A message server adjunct (MSA) equipped with appropriate messaging server software and associated printers.
Dial access to
attendant
No additional hardware required.
Dial plan
No additional hardware required.
Dialed number
For non-ISDN type calls, a port on a DID Trunk or DS1 interface ciridentification ser- cuit pack to support MEGACOM 800 DNIS. Also requires the
vice (DNIS)
answering voice terminals be equipped with a display if display of
trunk information is desired.
Digital multiplexed interface
(DMI) (Category
A only)
One PRI DS1 interface circuit pack per 24 or 32 DMI trunks
(depends on the circuit pack).
Direct agent
announcement
Except for integrated announcements, each announcement requires
announcement equipment plus a port on an analog line circuit pack.
For music on delay announcement, a music source and a port on an
auxiliary trunk circuit pack are required.
Direct department calling and
uniform call distribution (no
added hardware
required)
If needed: 1 port on an analog line circuit pack per queue warning
level lamp. Hardware for support of recorded announcement, or
music-on-hold if there is to be a delay announcement or music. See
Recorded Announcement and Music-on-Hold.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
210
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Distinctive ringing
No additional hardware required.
Do not disturb
If voice prompting is used, 1 or more ports on a voice synthesizer circuit pack.
DS1 integrated
CSU
DS1 interface circuit pack (TN767D or TN464E and later) and integrated CSU module.
DS1 tie trunk ser- One DS1 interface circuit pack is required per 24 voice-grade DS1
vice
tie trunks or per 23 AVD DS1 tie trunks. E1-32 channel is not supported in the United States and Canada.
Dual DCP
I-channels
Refer to AUDIX for hardware requirements.
DXS button
enhancements
Attendant console with DXS console addition.
ECMA conformance in
ISDN-PRI
DS1 Interface (24/32) circuit pack.
EIA Interface
One data line circuit pack per 8 EIA interfaces, and 1 data module
per port on the circuit pack are required.
Emergency
access to the
attendant
Requires a 301A basic, 302A enhanced, or 302B attendant console
if a unique emergency tone is required at the console; otherwise,
normal ringing is heard for an emergency call and the attendant display flashes.
Enhanced voice
terminal display
8400-series DCP terminal, 603E1 CallMaster III, or 9400-series
DCP terminals are required. The 9400-series terminals are for European use only. 6400-series DCP terminals are available for R7 and
later.
ESPA radio -pag- European standard paging access equipment required.
ing
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
211
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Extended user
No additional hardware required.
administration of
redirected calls
(Category A only)
External device
alarming
No additional hardware required.
Facility busy indi- No additional hardware required other than a feature button with a
cation
light.
Facility test calls
No additional hardware required.
Fiber link administration
For a public network, a CSU. For a campus network, a digital data
module or similar device.
Go to cover
No additional hardware required.
Hold
No additional hardware required.
Hold - automatic
No additional hardware required.
Hot line service
No additional hardware required.
Hunt group
No additional hardware required.
Facility and
See ISDN-BRI.
non-facility associated signaling
Flexible billing
An ASAI adjunct processor is required.
Generalized
MFC
DS1 interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs. DEFINITY supports MFC in roughly 40 countries. In all of those countries, you
need some type of trunk interface circuit pack and a call classifier
circuit pack. some countries require a digital interface and some
require an analog interface and some can use either one.
German — digital DS1 interface 24/32 for German digital trunks (such as PRI).
Greece MFC
DS1 interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
212
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Inbound call
management
(ICM) (Category
A only)
ASAI hardware (See ASAI feature). Use of ACD feature required
(see ACD feature).
Individual attendant access
No additional hardware required.
Integrated
announcement
See Recorded Announcement.
Integrated directory
If the terminal is connected to an associated data terminal, the
7404D voice terminal requires an optional Messaging Cartridge.
Intercept treatment
Requires announcement equipment and 1 port on an analog line circuit pack for each announcement and for each external analog
announcement device, or an AUX trunk port for each external AUX
trunk device. See Recorded Announcements. A TN750C Announcement circuit pack can provide up to 256 announcements. Intercept
treatment can be administered to the attendant console.
Intercom - automatic
No additional hardware required.
Intercom — dial
No additional hardware is required.
Internal automatic answer
(IAA)
All multi-function voice terminals with speakerphone or headset may
be used (except ISDN-BRI voice terminals) plus a port interface on a
circuit pack.
Inter-PBX attendant calls
Tie trunk group between the branch and main locations.
IP trunk
All: TN802 MAPD IP Trunk circuit pack, TN802 External Cable
Assembly, three adjacent, vacant slots in the carrier.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
213
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
ISDN-BRI line
All: BRI line circuit pack
R8si: a packet interface circuit pack for PRI over the packet interface, TN794 Netpacket circuit pack.
R8si: TN570 expansion interface circuit pack (for system connectivity in multiple port network systems), maintenance/test circuit pack in
the PPN (for packet applications), maintenance/test circuit pack in
each additional EPN (for critical reliability systems).
R8r: Maintenance/test circuit pack in the PPN (for packet applications), maintenance/test circuit pack in each additional EPN (for critical reliability systems).
ISDN-BRI trunk
One BRI trunk circuit pack for up to eight 2B+D interfaces.
ISDN-PRI
One PRI DS1 (T1/E1) interface circuit pack provides a signaling link
and up to 23 ISDN-PRI trunk group members and up to 30 for E1
channels. R8si: a processor interface circuit pack for PRI over PI, a
packet control circuit pack for PRI via the LAN bus and NetPacket.
R8csi/r: no additional hardware beyond DS1 interface.
Last number
dialed
No additional hardware required.
Leave word calling
Display terminal to store and retrieve the LWC message.
Line lockout
No additional hardware required.
Listed directory
numbers
No additional hardware required.
Look ahead inter- No additional hardware is required. Interconnecting facilities must be
flow (Category A ISDN-PRI with no interworking. Calls that interwork may interflow
only)
successfully but the ability to do so on an intelligent basis is lost, as
is the look ahead interflow DNIS information.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
214
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Loudspeaker
paging access
Requires loudspeaker paging equipment and 1 port on an auxiliary
trunk circuit pack for each individual paging zone port (9 maximum).
Paging interface equipment consisting of a 909-type voice coupler
adapter (only if equipment is not FCC-registered) and a 24-volt
power supply, per zone. This hardware can be shared with the code
calling access feature. If PagePac paging system equipment is
used, 1 port on a CO trunk, analog line, or auxiliary trunk circuit pack
is used, depending on the PagePac arrangement.
Loudspeaker
paging access deluxe
Loudspeaker paging equipment and 1 port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack per zone. Paging interface equipment consisting of a
909-type voice coupler adapter (only if equipment is not FCC- registered) and a 24-volt power supply, per zone. This hardware can be
shared with the code calling access feature.
Malicious call
trace
A display set and optional CPE recording device.
Manual message waiting
No additional hardware required.
Manual originating line service
No additional hardware required.
Manual signaling No additional hardware required.
MERLIN/system
25 - voice terminal support
(731xH Series)
No additional hardware required.
Messaging
server interface
R8si requires a processor interface circuit pack. A port on a digital
line circuit pack is required to provide the MS interface This application also requires an ADU and a port on a data line circuit pack or a
modem and an analog line circuit pack. R8r: The BX.25 connection
requires a PGATE circuit pack.
MFC enhancements
DS1 interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
215
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
MF shuttle
DS1 interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs.
MF signaling
No additional hardware required.
Misoperations
handling
No additional hardware required.
Modem pooling
One pooled modem circuit pack per 2 integrated conversion
(Category A only) resources provided. Each combined conversion resource requires 1
port on the digital line circuit pack, 1 port on an analog line circuit
pack, and an analog modem and data module or 7400 terminal.
Multi-appearance preselection and
preference
Multiappearance telephone.
Multimedia appli- DS1 interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs.
cations server
interface (MASI)
(Category A only)
Multimedia call
Requires no additional hardware.
appearances
(Category A only)
Multimedia call
Requires no additional hardware.
early answer on
vectors and stations (Category A
only)
Multimedia call
handling
(MMCH) (Category A only)
Multimedia interface circuit pack and multimedia voice conditioner
circuit pack to provide multimedia call processing. A digital line port
and BRI data port per multimedia complex.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
Issue 1
April 2000
216
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Multiple call han- A multi-appearance set is required.
dling on request
or forced (forced
is Category A
only)
Multimedia call
Requires no additional hardware.
redirection to MM
endpoint (Category A only)
Multimedia data
conferencing via
expansion services module
(ESM) (Category
A only)
ESM adjunct device (terminates T.120 protocol and provides data
conference control and data distribution), TN2207 modified PRI circuit pack, TN787 multimedia interface circuit pack, a cable to connect the TN2207 to the TN787
Multimedia hold, Requires no additional hardware.
conference,
transfer, and
drop (Category A
only)
Multimedia
Requires no additional hardware.
multiple-port network (Category A
only)
Multimedia queu- Requires no additional hardware.
ing with voice
announcement
(Category A only)
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
Issue 1
April 2000
217
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Multimedia serRequires no additional hardware.
vice-link architecture support of
voice/data mode
(Category A only)
Music-on-hold
access
Music source and 1 port on an auxiliary trunk or analog line circuit
pack are required. A 909-type voice coupler is required if the system
is not FCC-registered (United States only). A music source and 1
port on a TN746B or TN468B or later Analog Line circuit pack. A
KS23395, L4 Music-on-Hold interface to convert a loop start port into
a Music-on-Hold port. The port must be administered for this purpose. Also, a 909-type voice coupler is required if the music source
is not FCC-registered (United States only). France: a port on the
TN2183 Analog Line circuit pack and the 122A Music-on-Hold interface unit (wall-mounted).
Names registration
A PMS can connect through a data module and a port on a digital
line circuit pack, or through an ADU and a port on a data line circuit
pack. A journal printer requires a data module and a port on a digital
line circuit pack, or an ADU and a port on a data line circuit pack.
National ISDN-1
DS1 Interface circuit pack.
Native support of Requires no additional hardware.
6402D display
terminal
Network access
— public
One port on a CO or DIOD trunk circuit pack or 1 port on a DS1/E1
interface circuit pack or tie trunk circuit pack.
Night Service No additional hardware required other than a button to activate and
hunt group, night deactivate the feature.
console service
and night station
service
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
218
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Night service —
trunk answer
from any station
Ringing device and 1 port on an analog line circuit pack.
Night service trunk group
No additional hardware required other than a button to activate and
deactivate the feature.
NT interface on
TN556B/C
Requires no additional hardware.
NT QSIG peer
protocol
Requires no additional hardware.
Off-premises
data extensions
Trunk data module or DCP extender and 1 port on a digital line circuit pack or DS1 circuit pack.
Off-premises sta- Cross-connecting capabilities and 1 port on an analog line circuit
tion
pack or DS1 circuit pack.
Outbound call
management
(OCM) (Category A only)
Requires a TN2182B tone-clock circuit pack. Can also use an older
tone-clock as long as a TN744C or newer tone detector circuit pack
is in the system.
PC application
software translation exchange
(PASTE) (Category A only)
A port on a digital line or BRI line circuit pack connected through a
Personal Computer configured with the PC/PBX, PC/ISDN, or PassageWay circuit pack and application software to an appropriate
voice terminal.
PC interface
(hardware varies
depending on the
configuration
group used)
Group 2: 7400-series DCP terminals, PC/PBX interface card, an
IBM-compatible PC (6300 or 6300 Plus with DOS 3.1 or later, or
PC/XT with PC-DOS 3.1 or later. 448K or more of RAM is recommended on PCs running integrated software applications.
Group 3: 7500-series ISDN-BRI Voice Terminal, up to 4 PC/ISDN
expansion cards, an IBM-compatible PC (6300, 6300 Plus, PC/XT,
PC/AT, PS/2, or Compaq), and DOS 3.1 or later.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
219
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
PC/PBX connec- A port on a digital line circuit pack for each PC/PBX connected.
tion
Personal central
office line
(PCOL)
A port on a central office trunk circuit pack for each trunk assigned
as a PCOL.
Personal station
access
Digital line ports and a digital voice terminal.
Personalized
ringing
No additional hardware required.
Power Failure
Transfer
One emergency transfer panel per 5 or 6 trunks assigned to Power
Failure Transfer, depending on panel used. The following panels are
available:
PRI Converter
■
808A Panel — Serves up to 5 failure transfer terminals. The unit
provides automatic ground start or loop start
■
Z1A Panel — Serves up to 6 power failure transfer terminals. A
ground-start key is required at each preselected voice terminal
when ground-start trunks are used
DASS - 1 TN464F DS1/E1 circuit pack and 1 TNCCSC-1 circuit
pack.
DPNSS - 1 TN464F DS1/E1 circuit pack and 1 TNCCSC-2 circuit
pack.
BRI - 1 TN464F DS1/E1 circuit pack and 1 TNPRI/BRI circuit pack.
Priority Calling
No additional hardware required.
Privacy - Attendant Lockout
No additional hardware required.
Privacy - Manual No additional hardware required.
Exclusion
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
220
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Property ManFor all except R8r, either:
agement System
1. Using a digital line port and a data module, or
(PMS)
2. Using a digital line port and an ADU
For R8r, either:
1. A packet data circuit pack cross-connected to a port on a data
line circuit pack, connected to a second data line circuit pack
port and then to an ADU, or
2. A packet data circuit pack cross-connected to a port on a data
line circuit pack connected to either a BRI line circuit pack
connected to a 7500 Data Module or to a digital line connected
to a data module. Data line circuit pack with an ADU or a data
module and port on a digital line circuit pack.
Public Network
Call Priority
No additional hardware required.
Pull Transfer
No additional hardware is required in a stand-alone configuration. In
a network environment, the TGU/TGE tie trunks (TN497) are the
only trunks that support the flash signaling necessary to complete
the pull transfer operation between systems.
QSIG Global
Networking
Same as ISDN-PRI. See ISDN-PRI.
QSIG call offer
(Category A only)
QSIG call completion (Category A only)
No additional hardware is required.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
221
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
QSIG
called/busy
name display
and called/busy
number ID
No additional hardware is required.
QSIG call named No additional hardware is required.
ID (Category A
only)
QSIG manufac- No additional hardware is required.
turers specific
information (MSI)
(Category A only)
QSIG path reten- No additional hardware is required.
tion (Category A
only)
QSIG to best
No additional hardware is required.
ISDN support
(Category A only)
Queue Status or
Queue Status
Indication
One port on an analog line circuit pack for each auxiliary queue
warning lamp.
Reason Codes
No additional hardware is required.
(Category A only)
Recall Signaling
No additional hardware required.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
222
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Recorded
Announcement
All except R8r: each analog announcement has announcement
equipment, such as a unit configured with an analog interface, and 1
port on an analog line circuit pack. These systems can also use an
(Announceannouncement unit configured with an auxiliary trunk interface and
ments are proport on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Each integrated announcevided by a port
ment, accessed by a call, requires 1 port on an integrated
on an analog line
announcement circuit pack. Up to 128 announcements can be
circuit pack, a
recorded on the integrated announcement circuit pack. A network
port on an auxilcontrol circuit pack restores messages after a power failure.
iary trunk circuit
R8r: each analog announcement has announcement equipment,
pack, or an intesuch as a unit configured with an analog interface, and 1 port on an
grated
analog line circuit pack. Can also use a unit configured with an auxilannouncement
iary trunk interface and 1 port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Each
circuit pack)
integrated announcement, accessed by a call, has 1 port on an integrated announcement circuit pack. Up to 256 announcements can
be recorded. Requires a system access port resource (packet data
and data line combination) to save and restore announcements to
the integrated announcement circuit pack(s).
Recorded Telephone Dictation
Access
Telephone dictation machines and, depending on type of machine, 1
port on an analog line circuit pack or 1 port on a auxiliary trunk circuit
pack for each machine assigned.
Release Link
Requires a port in a TN722B, TN767, or TN464D circuit pack for
Trunk Group
each trunk to be assigned in the trunk group. A TN722B or TN767
(Category A only) provides 24 ports, and a TN464D provides 24 or 32 ports.
Remote Access
Dedicated trunks, such as a dedicated port on a CO trunk, or an
extension number accessed by a tie trunk, DID or DIOD port circuit,
if remote access is not available via DID.
Remote adminis- For on-premises remote: A data module and associated ADU and
tration
system access protocol or data module and a terminal.
For off-premises remote: A pooled modem circuit pack on site, or
access to the RMATS modem. For off site, a data terminal modem
and communication emulation software in a PC.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
223
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Remote call cov- No additional hardware required.
erage
Reset Shift Call
No additional hardware required.
Restricted/unrestricted call lists
No additional hardware required.
Restriction - con- No additional hardware required.
trolled
Restriction - fully No additional hardware required.
restricted service
Restriction - mis- No additional hardware required.
cellaneous terminal
Restriction - toll
No additional hardware required.
Restriction -voice No additional hardware required.
terminal: inward,
manual terminating line, origination, outward,
public and termination
Ringback queuing
No additional hardware required.
Ringing —abbre- No additional hardware required.
viated and
delayed
Ringer cutoff
No additional hardware required other than available feature buttons.
Rotary dialing
No additional hardware required.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
224
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Russia MFR for
ANI
DS1 interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs.
R2-MFC
Analog or digital trunk and call classifier, such as a TN2182 or a
TN744B or greater suffix circuit pack.
Security violation notification
Voice terminal with a display. Security violation notification via
announcements requires the integrated announcement circuit
packs.
Send all calls
No additional hardware required.
Software defined No additional hardware required unless a tie trunk is used. If so, 1 tie
data network
trunk circuit pack or 1 DS1 circuit pack.
Spain MFE
DS1 Interface 24/32 and call classifier circuit packs.
Station hunting
No additional hardware required.
Station security
code
No additional hardware required.
Subnet Trunking
Additional call progress tone detector ports on tone detector circuit
packs, if routing patterns containing “wait” symbols are used heavily
and if dial tone detection is preferable to waiting for interval time-out.
Survivable
remote EPN
(SREPN) (Category A only)
Enhanced single-carrier cabinet, TN790B processor and TN794 or
TN2400 (upgrade only) circuit pack, TN2301 circuit pack, TN775C
circuit pack, 9823A/B fiber optic transceivers, TN1654 DS1 converter circuit pack for T1, fiberoptic cables
The SREPN allows a DEFINITY R8r EPN to provide service to the
customer when the link to the main R8r processor fails or is severed.
SVN Refer Call
with Announcements
Integrated announcement circuit pack.
Switch Based
Bulletin Board
No additional hardware required.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
225
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
System Adminis- See report scheduler and system printer.
tration Report
Scheduler
Telecommuting
Access
Requires a DEFINITY Extender at both the home site and the office
location (the location of the DEFINITY ECS).
Temporary
Bridged Appearance
No additional hardware required.
Tenant Partitioning (Category A
only)
No additional hardware required.
Terminal Translation Initiation
No additional hardware required.
Terminating
No additional hardware required.
Extension Group
Timed Reminder
and Attendant
Timers
No additional hardware required.
Transfer
No additional hardware required.
Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to
Outgoing Trunk
(with Security)
Feature can be activated for trunk groups with trunks assigned to the
following trunk circuit packs: TN747B Central Office Trunk, TN760C
Analog Tie Trunk, and TN722B, TN767, or TN464C DS1 circuit
pack.
Trunk Flash
No additional hardware required.
Trunk Group
Busy/Warning
Indicators to
Attendant
No additional hardware required other than available feature buttons.
Trunk Identification by attendant
No additional hardware required other than available feature buttons.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
226
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Trunk to Trunk
Transfer
No additional hardware required.
Uniform Call Dis- Requires an analog line circuit pack for each auxiliary queue warntribution
ing lamp. An announcement circuit pack is recommended if calls will
be sent to a call queue.
Uniform dial plan No additional hardware is required except as needed for DCS. See
DCS feature. Tie lines are required if system-to-system communication via DCS is not over the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN).
United Kingdom
(UK) Networking
(Name/Number)
DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel - E1, 32 Channel circuit pack.
VDN of origin
Integrated announcement circuit pack.
announcement
(Category A only)
Visually impaired At least 1 TN433 (Italy) or TN457 (United Kingdom) speech procesattendant sersor circuit pack is required. The TN725B (United States) speech provice (VIAS)
cessor circuit pack does not support VIAS.
Voice Conditioner Circuit
Pack
Saronix 66.667-MHz oscillators (replace Pletronics 66.667-MHz
oscillators)
Voice mail system via mode
code
A port on an existing analog circuit pack.
Voice message
retrieval
Speech synthesizer circuit pack, which has 4 ports to provide voice
message retrieval. Traffic engineering is required to determine the
number of circuit packs.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
227
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Feature
Hardware
Voice response
An analog line or DS1 interface circuit pack (line side T1/E1). The
integration (VRI) TN744 call classifier circuit pack is not required by call prompting for
(Category A only) the returning of digits in-band from CONVERSANT to the DEFINITY
system; a TN748 tone detector is used. Basic call vectoring must be
enabled to use converse-on vector step. Call prompting must be
enabled.
Voice terminal
ringing options
No additional hardware required.
Voice terminal
display
Display-equipped voice terminal that can be a:
■
Digital terminal requiring 1 port on a digital line circuit pack
■
BRI terminal requiring 1 port on a BRI circuit pack
■
Hybrid terminal requiring 1 port on a hybrid line circuit pack
VuStats (Category A only)
Terminal with display
Wideband
switching (Category A only)
One DS1 interface circuit pack (TN464C or later) for line-side and
another for network facilities. Same as ISDN-PRI. See ISDN-PRI.
Also requires wideband data modules.
World class BRI
Same as ISDN-BRI. See ISDN-BRI.
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Additional Hardware to Use Features
Table 49.
Feature
Issue 1
April 2000
228
Additional Hardware to Use Features — Continued
Hardware
World class Tone Tone Detection Modes 1, 2, and 3 are meaningful only if the tone
detection
detectors are TN420B or greater or TN2182B, or TN744D. Modes 4
and 5, the tone validation timer, and the interdigit pause are meaningful only if the tone detectors are TN744C, TN420C, or TN2182.
Tone detection for countries using the same tone plan as the United
States is also available using an alternate tone detector. The
TN420B only recognizes tone detection modes 1, 2, and 3. TN420C,
TN744, and TN2182B recognize modes 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, and tone
validation and interdigit pause. TN2182 and TN744C recognize
mode 6. TN748C provides precise tone detection for the United
States tone plan.
World class Tone The ability to administer tone characteristics. The TN780 or TN2182
Generation
are required for the system to administer the tone characteristics.
The older tone generators, TN768, TN419B and TN756, are capable
of producing all North American including 440 Hz at 17.22 dBm0.
However, they cannot generate tones with arbitrary administered
characteristics. The TN2210 is also not able to generate arbitrary
tones.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Allocation of Buttons
229
Allocation of Buttons
The allocation of buttons in Table 50 is by station type. The minimum button capacity was
calculated by administering each terminal with the default number of call appearances
and adding a non-call appearance/bridged-appearance button to the highest allowed
button for every possible screen.
The maximum button capacity was calculated by administering each terminal with the
default number of call appearances, then adding additional call appearances as the
highest allowed button number for each SMT screen which contained buttons.
Table 50.
Allocation of Buttons by Station Type
Typical Button Units
R8csi, si
Minimum Maximum
Typical
Button
Units
R8r
Analog sets:
500, 2500, 6200, 7101A, 7103A,
7104A, 8110, DS1SA, and DS1FD
76
76
76
Other Analog Ports1, Wired Spare
Ports, and Non-wired Spare Ports
76
76
76
10MET set — 10 buttons
20MET set — 20 buttons
30MET set — 30 buttons
64
184
304
64
184
304
64
184
304
Terminal — 510 BCT
Terminal — 515 BCT
388
280
400
364
388
602A1 Callmaster I
603A1 Callmaster II
603D1 Callmaster III
603E1 Callmaster III
606A1 Callmaster IV
412
412
412
412
952
496
448
448
448
1552
412
412
412
674
Station Type
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Allocation of Buttons
230
Table 50. Allocation of Buttons by Station Type — Continued
Typical Button Units
R8csi, si
Minimum Maximum
Typical
Button
Units
R8r
Digital set — 6402
Digital set — 6408
Digital set — 6408D
Digital set — 6408D+
Digital set — 6416D+
Digital set — 6416D+w/XM24B
expansion module
Digital set — 6424D+
Digital set — 6424D+w/XM24B
expansion module
184
112
448
448
544
832
184
112
508
508
700
1276
—
—
—
—
—
—
640
928
892
1468
—
—
Voice/data — 6538 (Constellation)
112
112
—
Hybrid set — 7303S
Hybrid set — 7305S
Hybrid set — 7309H
Hybrid set — 7313H
Hybrid set — 7314H
Hybrid set — 7315H
Hybrid set — 7316H
Hybrid set — 7317H
124
412
124
124
268
364
412
508
124
412
124
124
268
448
412
592
124
412
124
—
—
—
—
—
Station Type
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Allocation of Buttons
Table 50.
231
Allocation of Buttons by Station Type — Continued
Station Type
Digital set — 7401D/7401+
Digital set — 7403D
Digital set — 7404D
Digital set — 7404D w/display
Digital set — 7405D
Digital set — 7405D w/display
Digital set — 7405D w/cov
Digital set — 7406D
Digital set — 7406D w/display
Digital set — 7406+
Digital set — 7406+ w/display
Digital set — 7407D
Digital set — 7407+
Digital set — 7410D
Digital set — 7410+
Digital set — 7434D
Digital set — 7434D w/display
Digital set — 7434D w/call coverage
module
Digital set — 7444D
Typical Button Units
R8csi, si
Minimum Maximum
Typical
Button
Units
R8r
112
124
76
232
412
568
652
340
412
340
412
568
568
124
124
412
568
112
124
76
268
412
652
652
340
436
340
436
652
652
124
124
412
940
112
124
76
232
412
—
—
340
412
340
412
568
568
102
124
412
—
652
568
652
940
652
568
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Allocation of Buttons
232
Table 50. Allocation of Buttons by Station Type — Continued
Typical Button Units
R8csi, si
Minimum Maximum
Typical
Button
Units
R8r
184
64
352
124
352
124
352
676
184
64
376
124
436
124
436
1048
204
124
352
124
124
124
352
676
964
184
352
676
1552
184
436
1048
—
184
124
676
Basic attendant console (302A,
302B)
Enhanced attendant console (302C)
Attendant selector console (26B1)
412
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISDN-BRI
— 7505D
— 7506D
— 7507D
— 8503D
— 8510T w/display
— 8520T w/display
232
304
532
64
232
352
288
444
107
64
372
692
232
304
532
64
232
352
Wireless 9601A2
—
—
—
Station Type
Digital set — 8403B
Digital set — 8405B/B+
Digital set — 8405D/D+
Digital set — 8410B
Digital set — 8410D
Digital set — 8411B
Digital set — 8411D
Digital set — 8434 D
Digital set — 8434 with XM24B
Expansion Module
Digital set — 9403B
Digital set — 9410D
Digital set — 9434D
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Allocation of Buttons
Table 50.
233
Allocation of Buttons by Station Type — Continued
Station Type
Typical Button Units
R8csi, si
Minimum Maximum
Typical
Button
Units
R8r
ADJLK3
ADX8D
ADX16A
ADX16D
ASAI
CP9530
DIG800
K2500
MDC9000
MDW9000
PC
4
568
76
568
4
76
568
76
52
52
482
4
652
76
652
4
—
652
76
64
64
580
4
568
76
568
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
VRU4
VRUFD
VRUSA
WCBRI
105TL
76
62
62
24
28
76
76
76
24
28
—
—
—
—
—
Continued on next page
1.
Includes music-on-hold, recorded announcement, and loudspeaker
paging.
2.
The radio controller supports 24 simultaneous calls and 2 wireless fixed
bases.
3.
Needs ASAI interface and ASAI prop adjunct links turned on in
“sys-param customer options.”
4.
Needs DTFMF turned on in “sys-param customer options.”
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Cabling Distances
234
The following notes apply to the button and data module records in Table 50:
■
Any DCP station (except 8400-series) can add a 7400B, requiring 1 data module
record.
■
A data module can be added to a 7403D or 7405D, requiring 1 data module record.
■
A data module (ADM-T) can be added to a 7505D, 7506D, or 7507D, requiring 1
data module record.
■
An ISDN-BRI endpoint record is required for each distinct ISDN-BRI endpoint.
Thus each voice-only, data-only, or voice-data endpoint uses 1 of these records.
Cabling Distances
When the system layout is being determined, consider the maximum cabling distances to
the system cabinet. Table 51 lists the allowable intra-premises cabling distances. If using
mixed wire sizes, use the table columns for 26 AWG (#4) (0.14 mm2) wire. These
distances are based on a minimum of -42.5 VDC at the equipment connecting to the
system.
Table 51.
Allowable Intra-premises Cabling Distances
Equipment
Enhanced attendant console (302C1)
With selector console
Phantom powered
Locally powered
Without selector console
Phantom powered
Locally powered
510D or 515 terminals
24 AWG Wire
26 AWG Wire
(0.26 mm2)
(0.14 mm2)
Feet
Meters
Feet
Meters
800
5000
244
1524
500
3400
152
1037
1400
5000
427
1524
900
3400
274
1037
3000
914
2200
670
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Cabling Distances
Table 51.
235
Allowable Intra-premises Cabling Distances — Continued
24 AWG Wire
2
26 AWG Wire
(0.14 mm2)
(0.26 mm )
Equipment
Feet
Meters
Feet
Meters
513, 610 BCT, 615 MT, 715, 2900/715,
715 BCS-2, 4410 or 4425 terminals
(see also “data modules” or “EIA interface”). Maximum distance from terminal to data module or ADU
50
15.2
50
15.2
5000
5000
5000
3400
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
1524
1524
1524
1037
1524
1524
1524
1524
1524
4000
4000
4000
2200
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
1219
1219
1219
670
1219
1219
1219
1219
1219
2000
5000
7000
12000
20000
40000
610
1524
2130
3654
6100
12200
2000
4000
6000
10000
16000
30000
610
1219
1827
3050
4875
9150
Data modules:
Z702AL1-DSU data module base
Z703AL1-DSU data module base
7404D data module
DTDM
High-speed data link
MTDM
3270 data module
7400A/B data module
8400B Plus data module
EIA interface (data line circuit pack and
ADU):
19.2 kbps
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
0.3 kbps
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Cabling Distances
Table 51.
236
Allowable Intra-premises Cabling Distances — Continued
24 AWG Wire
2
(0.14 mm2)
(0.26 mm )
Meters
Feet
Meters
6100
4633
4633
13000
10000
10000
3962
3050
3050
3100
945
2000
610
3000
3000
914
914
2000
2000
610
610
16-port circuit pack (TN746B or
TN2183), on-premises or out-of-building, same premises1, 2
500 or 2500 type3
7100 series
8100 series
20000
15200
15200
6100
4633
4633
13000
10000
10000
3962
3050
3050
Hybrid (TN762)
7300 series (Phantom powered)
7300 series (with Local power)
1000
2000
305
610
750
2000
229
610
3500
5000
1067
1524
2200
4000
670
1219
Equipment
Feet
26 AWG Wire
Voice terminals:
Analog
8-port circuit pack (TN742 or TN769),
on-premises or out-of-building — same
premises (notes 1 and 2)
500- or 2500- type (note 3)
20000
7100 series
15200
8100 series on/off premises and out
15200
of building
16-port circuit pack (TN746/B or
TN2183), on-premises only
no out-of-building or bridging1
500 or 2500 type terminals without
adjuncts
8100 series
Digital (TN754B, TN2181, or TN2224)
7400D, 8400, or 9400 Series
Phantom powered
Locally powered (no Digital
Line Protectors)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Cabling Distances
Table 51.
237
Allowable Intra-premises Cabling Distances — Continued
24 AWG Wire
2
(0.14 mm2)
(0.26 mm )
Equipment
26 AWG Wire
Feet
Meters
Feet
Meters
3500
1066
2200
670
3500
3500
5000
1066
1066
1524
2200
2200
4000
670
670
1219
1900
1600
579
488
1600
1300
488
396
1000
305
650
198
Digital (TN2181 and TN2224), 2-wire
6400 series (cabling distance can
increase to 5500 feet/1992 m using
22-AWG/0.32-mm2 wire)
Digital (TN754)
7400D series
On-premises-only
Out-of-building, same premises
Out-of-building, with Digital Line Protectors
ISDN-BRI (TN556)
7500 and 8500 series
Termination resistor (3 feet)
Termination resistor (250 feet)
IDSN-BRI (TN2198)
MET sets (TN735)
Continued on next page
1.
An out-of-building, same-premises, analog terminal requires a carbon block, gas
tube, or equivalent solid state device at each end of the interbuilding cable.
2.
Use only 500- or 2500-type terminals off-premises to a CO.
3.
Point-to-point connections and terminals are within 33 feet (10m) of the jack.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Cabling Distances
238
ISDN-BRI Two-Wire Line Cabling Distances
The TN2198 BRI 2-Wire line circuit pack supports various cabling configurations using
22, 24, and 26 AWG (0.34 mm2, 0.26 mm2, 0.14 mm2, respectively) wire. Up to 18,000
feet (5486m) (maximum) may be used between the TN2198 and the NT1 network
interface. Refer to Table 52 for the cabling distances from the NT1 network interface to
the 7500- and 8500-series voice terminals using 24 AWG (0.26 mm2 and 26 AWG (0.14
mm2) wire. If 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) wire is used, contact your Lucent Technologies
representative. Distances from the power closet to the voice terminal are typically less
than 250 feet (75m).
Table 52.
Cabling Distances from the NT1 to the ISDN-BRI Voice Terminal
24 AWG
(0.26 mm2)
26 AWG
(0.14 mm2)
Feet
Meters
Feet
Meters
Termination resistor
(3 feet) (0.9 m)
1900
579
1600
488
Termination resistor
(250 feet) (75 m)
1600
488
1300
396
Equipment
NT1 to ISDN-BRI
Four-Wire Voice Terminal
(7500 and 8500 Series)
Fiber Optic Cabling Distances
The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single-mode fiber optic cable
is connected to a remote EPN in a direct- or CSS-connected switch. The LASER device
operates within the following parameters:
■
Maximum Power Output: -5 dBm
■
Wavelength: 1310 nm
■
Mode Field Diameter: 8.8 microns
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
IEC 825 1993
! CAUTION:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Cabling Distances
Issue 1
April 2000
239
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information.
For the maximum fiber optic cabling distances for a system, determine:
■
The mean loss and the length of the outside plant fiber cable
■
The mean loss and the length of fiber cable shipped with the cabinet (including any
fiber riser cable)
■
The mean loss of an ST connector and the number of ST connections
■
The mean loss due to the total number of splices
■
Higher-order mode loss
NOTE:
If estimated fiber limits such as loss, length, excessive splices, and so forth are
expected, OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) tests should be made to
ensure a successful installation of a remote EPN fiber link.
Direct-connect or CSS
For multi-mode fiber: The 9823A lightwave transceiver transmits up to 4,900 feet or 0.93
miles (1.5 km). The 9823B lightwave transceiver transmits up to 25,000 feet or 4.73 miles
(7.6 km). Multi-mode fiber optic cable consists of 2 separate 62.5-micron diameter or
50-micron diameter fiber optic cables. The transmission speed across a fiber link
between the PPN and an EPN is 32.768 Mbps.
For single-mode fiber: The 300A lightwave transceivers transmits light up to 115,000 feet
or 22 miles (35 km). Fiber loss must be less than 17dB. Saturation may occur if distances
are short; attenuators may be required if the total loss on the fiber link is less than 10dBm.
Single-mode fiber optic cable consists of 2 separate 8- to 10-micron core cables. The
transmission speed across a fiber link between the PPN and an EPN is 32.768 Mbps.
ATM (Category A only)
For multi-mode fiber: The TN2305 supports a loss budget of 9.5dB. Multi-mode fiber optic
cable consists of 2 separate 62.5-micron diameter or 50-micron diameter fiber optic
cables. The transmission speed across a fiber link is 155.52 Mbps. Transmit power for
the TN2305 ranges from a maximum of –14 dB to a minimum of –19 dB. Receiver
sensitivity ranges from a maximum of –14 dB to a minimum of –30 dB.
For single-mode fiber: The TN2306 supports a loss budget of 17.5dB. Single-mode fiber
optic cable consists of 2 separate 8- to 10-micron core cables. The transmission speed
across a fiber link is 155.52 Mbps. Transmit power for the TN2306 ranges from a
maximum of –8 dB to a minimum of –15 dB. Receiver sensitivity ranges from a maximum
of –8 dB to a minimum of –34 dB.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Initialization and Recovery
240
DS1 Remoting Transmission Distance
When the distance between cabinets is greater than 115,000 feet or 22 miles (35 km), or
if fiber optic cabling right-of-way is not available, use DS1 remoting for greater distances.
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for network engineering guidelines.
Initialization and Recovery
The time needed to initialize a system or for a system to recover from being reset
depends on the line size of the system, active features, trunks, and adjuncts connecting
to the system. The system needs several minutes to initialize or recover automatically
from being reset.
Call Progress Tones
This section details the tones generated by the systems for the United States. See Table
53 for the default call progress tones generated for country code 1.
Table 53.
Default Call Progress Tones
Tone
Frequency
Pattern (ms)
Answerback 3 tone
2225 Hz
3000 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Answerback 5 tone
2225 Hz
5000 on, followed by silence; no repeat
440 Hz
1750 on, 12000 off, 650 on; repeated
480 Hz +
620 Hz
500 on, 500 off; repeated
440 Hz
200 on, followed by silence; no repeat
External or handled by
attendant
440 Hz
200 on, 200 off, 200 on followed by silence;
no repeat
Priority call
440 Hz
200 on, 200 off, 200 on, 200 off, 200 on followed by silence; no repeat
Bridging warning tone
1
Busy tone
Call waiting tones:
Internal
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Table 53.
241
Default Call Progress Tones — Continued
Tone
Frequency
Pattern (ms)
Call waiting ringback tone
440 Hz +
480 Hz;
440 Hz
900 on (440 Hz + 480 Hz),
200 on (400 Hz), 2900 off; repeated
Centralized attendant call:
incoming call identification
480 Hz &
440 Hz &
480 Hz
100 on (480 Hz), 100 on (440 Hz),
100 on (480 Hz), followed by silence;
no repeat
Coverage tone
440 Hz
600 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Confirmation tone
350 Hz +
440 Hz
100 on, 100 off, 100 on, 100 off, 100 on followed by silence; no repeat
Continuous confirmation
tone
350 Hz +
440 Hz
100 on, 100 off; repeated
Dial tone
350 Hz +
440 Hz
continuous
Dial zero, attendant transfer, 440 Hz
and test calls
100 on, 100 off, 100 on followed by silence;
no repeat
Recall on don’t answer, audi- 440 Hz
ble ringing
300 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Hold recall, hold confirmation
440 Hz
50 on, 50 off, 50 on, 50 off, 50 on, 50 off,
50 on, 50 off, 50 on followed by silence; no
repeat
Camp-on recall, camp-on
confirmation
440 Hz
100 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Executive override tone
440 Hz
3000 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Intercept tone
440 Hz &
620 Hz
250 on (440 Hz), 250 on (620 Hz);
repeated
Precedence audible alert
tone
440 Hz +
480 Hz
1600 on, 300 off; repeated
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Table 53.
242
Default Call Progress Tones — Continued
Tone
Frequency
Pattern (ms)
Recall dial tone
350 Hz +
440 Hz
100 on, 100 off, 100 on, 100 off, 100 on,
100 off, followed by continuous dial tone
Reorder tone
480 Hz +
620 Hz
250 on, 250 off; repeated
Remote hold tone
440 Hz
50 on, 50 off; repeated
Ringback tone
440 Hz +
480 Hz
1000 on, 3000 off; repeated
Voice signaling tone
440 Hz
1000 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Zip tone
480 Hz
500 on, followed by silence; no repeat
Continued on next page
1.
Used with the Busy Verification and Executive Override features, and Service
Observing feature when the warning tone is enabled.
Table 54 lists the call progress tones available for customizing the tones. The tones in the
list can be generated only when using a TN780 or TN2182 Tone-Clock circuit pack and
the tone customizing feature is used. Tag tones are available only on the TN2182. The
tones are used to customize from 1 to 20 tones in the 5 administrable tone plans.
In Table 54, Level is the tone amplitude in decibels (dBm). 0 dBm is referenced to 1
milliwatt. To customize these tones, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications
Server R8 Administrator’s Guide.
Table 54. Customizable Call Progress Tones
Frequency
Level (dBm)
Null
None
330 Hz
-8.0 1
330 Hz + 440 Hz
-5.0 + 8.5 1
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Table 54.
Issue 1
April 2000
243
Customizable Call Progress Tones — Continued
Frequency
Level (dBm)
330 Hz + 440 Hz
-8 + -11 1
350 Hz
-17.25
350 Hz + 425 Hz
-4.0 1
350 Hz + 425 Hz
- 4.0
350 Hz + 440 Hz
-13.75
350 Hz + 440 Hz
-13.0 1
350 Hz + 440 Hz
-13.75 1
375 Hz + 425 Hz
-15.0
404 Hz
-11.0
404 Hz
-16.0
404 Hz + 425 Hz
-11.0
404 Hz + 450 Hz
-11.0
425 Hz
-4.0 1
425 Hz
-5.0 1
425 Hz
-8.0 1
425 Hz
-11.0 1
425 Hz
-17.25 1
440 Hz
-11.0 1
440 Hz
-13.0 1
440 Hz
-17.25
440 Hz + 350 Hz
-13.0 1
440 Hz + 480 Hz
-13.0 1
Continued on next page
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Issue 1
April 2000
244
Table 54. Customizable Call Progress Tones — Continued
Frequency
Level (dBm)
440 Hz + 480 Hz
-19.0
480 Hz + 620 Hz
-13.0 1
480 Hz + 620 Hz
-24.0
525 Hz
-11.0
620 Hz
-17.25
697 Hz or 700 Hz
-8.5/-8.0
770 Hz or 900 Hz
-8.5/-8.0
852 Hz or 1100 Hz
-8.5/-8.0
950 Hz
-5.0 1
950 Hz
-10.0 1
Chimes (860 Hz)
- 3.0
941 Hz or 1300 Hz
-8.5/-8.0
DMW (1000 Hz)
0.0
Square (1000 Hz)
+ 3.0
1004 Hz
0.0
1004 Hz
-16.0
1209 Hz or 1500 Hz
-7.5/-8.0
1336 Hz or 1700 Hz
-7.5/-8.0
1400 Hz
-5.0 1
1400 Hz
-10.0 1
1400 Hz
-11.0
1477 Hz or 2600 Hz
-7.5/-8.0
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Table 54.
245
Customizable Call Progress Tones — Continued
Frequency
Level (dBm)
1633 Hz or 1004 Hz
-7.5/ 0.0
1700 Hz
-16.0 1
1800 Hz
-5.0 1
1800 Hz
-10.0 1
2025 Hz
-12.1
2100 Hz
-12.1
2225 Hz
-12.1
2804 Hz
-16.0
Count
None
Continued on next page
1.
Available only with TN2182 Tone-Clock circuit pack.
Audible Ringing Patterns
Table 55 lists the administrable audible ringing patterns that can appear on analog line
circuit pack ports. The times under the columns “0 - 5” are in milliseconds. DEFINITY
Enterprise Communications Server R8 Administrator’s Guide contains ringing pattern
administration.
Table 55.
Ringing Patterns
Bursts
Set Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
One
on
900
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
off
4100
2150
4000
4000
4000
2150
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Table 55.
Bursts
Two
Three
246
Ringing Patterns — Continued
Set Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
on
400
300
600
400
300
400
off
200
300
200
200
300
200
on
300
400
200
400
300
400
off
4100
2150
4000
4000
4100
2150
on
200
100
200
200
200
200
off
100
200
200
200
100
200
on
200
100
200
200
200
200
off
100
200
200
200
100
200
on
300
400
200
200
300
200
off
4100
2150
4000
4000
4100
2150
Continued on next page
The following circuit packs default to the associated ringing pattern sets:
■
TN2180 — Set 1
■
TN2135 — Set 2
■
TN2144 — Set 3
■
TN468B — Set 4
■
TN2149 — Set 4
■
TN2181, TN2183, and TN2224 — Set 0 (administrable ringing cadence)
The following list shows the intended use for administered ringing pattern sets:
■
Set 0 — United States
■
Set 1 — Japan and Spain
■
Set 2 — Italy
■
Set 3 — Netherlands and Sweden
■
Set 4 — Australia, Belgium, and United Kingdom
■
Set 5 — India, Malaysia, New Zealand, and Singapore
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
247
Multi-Frequency Compelled Tones
With Multi-Frequency Compelled (MFC) signaling used on Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
and Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) trunks in countries outside the United States, a system
responds to the frequencies generated by the CO with answering frequencies.
The MFC tones and signaling sequence follows the International Telecommunications
Union (ITU-T) recommendations for MFC signaling defined in Volume VI, Fascicle VI.4 of
the 1989 CCITT blue books.
Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server R8 Administrator’s Guide for
more details.
Indicator Lamp Signals
Table 56 lists the light signals generated by the system for the attendant console and
multi-appearance voice terminals.
Table 56.
Light Signals Generated
Light Signal
Pattern in Milliseconds (ms)
Dark
Off
Lighted
On
Flashing
500 on, 500 off; repeated
Fluttering
50 on, 50 off; repeated
Broken flutter
5 cycles of 50 on, 50 off, followed by 500 off;
repeated
Wink
350 on, 50 off; repeated
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Technical Specifications
Call Progress Tones
Issue 1
April 2000
248
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview
249
A — Wireless Business Solutions
Overview
This appendix briefly describes the DEFINITY wireless business system (DWBS) and the
personal communications manager (PCM).
FreeWorks™ Wireless
Telecommunications
FreeWorks provides a complete global wireless system. The DEFINITY WBS Release 1
personal wireless telephony (PWT) product provides wireless applications within the
United States. The PCM product provides cordless telephone generation 2 (CT2)
technology for countries outside the United States.
The DEFINITY wireless business system - adjunct DECT provides digital (DECT)
technology for countries outside the United States.
Any of the above-mentioned products provide greater mobility to business customers by
integrating wireless capabilities into the DEFINITY ECS.
Each of the 3 systems is ideally suited to personnel associated with building security,
maintenance, and sales and may be added to an existing system while retaining the
same features and quality of service.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
FreeWorks™ Wireless Telecommunications
250
DEFINITY Wireless Business System
Components
The DEFINITY WBS R1-PWT consists of the following main components:
■
Mobility manager software
■
Wireless fixed bases
■
Pocket telephones
■
Cell antenna units
■
Radio controllers
■
Battery chargers
The following sections describe each of the above main components. Contact your
Lucent Technologies representative to help in determining the types and numbers of
components required at each site.
Mobility Manager Software
The mobility manager software provides maintenance and administration functions for
the wireless network. This software also provides the common control and tracking of the
pocket telephones as they change location inside the business premises. The mobility
manager also directs all control and voice information to the appropriate radio controller
for each pocket telephone.
Radio Controllers
The radio controllers are circuit packs inside the DEFINITY ECS. Each radio controller
connects and controls up to 2 wireless fixed bases (WFBs). Radio controllers provide the
interface between the system and the network of WFBs. The controllers connect to the
WFBs by an I2 proprietary interface. The radio controller is responsible for much of the
intelligence needed to maintain the quality of the radio links established between
elements.
The radio controller circuit pack operates in all applicable DEFINITY cabinets over the full
range of temperature and humidity specifications:
■
40 to 120 °F (4.4 to 48.9 °C)
■
10% to 95% relative humidity at 84 °F (28.8 °C)
■
10% to 45% relative humidity at 110 degrees °F (43.3 °C)
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
FreeWorks™ Wireless Telecommunications
251
Wireless Fixed Bases (WFBs)
The WFBs are the radio base stations that change incoming calls from the system into
radio signals used for transmission through the air to the appropriate pocket telephones.
The bases also change the incoming radio signals from the pocket telephones into binary
data before they are sent to the system.
Each base can support up to 12 simultaneous conversations. The base can also support
one internal cell antenna unit (CAU) or up to 4 remote external CAUs. Each base
connects to a radio controller by an I2 interface. Each base connects to 1 to 4 CAUs via
an I3 proprietary interface. Table 57 details the WFB dimensions and weight
Table 57.
WFB Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Heat Dissipation
(Per Hour)
5 inches
(12.7 cm)
7 inches
(17.8 cm)
2 inches
(5.08 cm)
2 Pounds
(0.9 kg)
6.82 to 34.1 BTUs
(1.72 to 8.6 Kilocalories)
The WFB meets the requirements for “Equipment not Normally Customer Carried” and is
intended for use indoors.
■
0 to 120° F (-17.8 to 48.9 °C)
■
0% to 95% relative humidity
Each WFB can be phantom-powered by the I2 interface on the TN789 radio controller
circuit pack or powered from an auxiliary AC power supply (WP-92464).
The TN789 can supply 250 mA of load current if no CAUs are installed. The auxiliary AC
power supply supplies 400 mA of load current.
Each WFB can dissipate from 1.8 Watts to 10 Watts of power (depending on number of
simultaneous calls).
NOTE:
The auxiliary power supply is required if one or more CAUs connect to the WFB.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
FreeWorks™ Wireless Telecommunications
252
Cell Antenna Unit (Optional)
The cell antenna unit (CAU) is an optional remote antenna connecting to a WFB. The
antenna expands a coverage area and can be located as far as 100 cable feet (30.5 m)
from its associated base. Up to four CAUs connect to a WFB. Each antenna connects to
and is powered from the base by an RG59, 75 Ohm coaxial cable. The CAUs use an I3
interface. The frequency bandwidth of the antenna is 1910 MHz to 1930 MHz.
The CAU meets the requirements for “Equipment not Normally Customer Carried” and is
intended for use indoors.
■
0 degrees to 120 °F (-17.8 to 48.9 °C)
■
0% to 95% relative humidity
Each CAU weighs 0.5 pound (0.22 kg) and can dissipate up to 2 Watts of power. The
average heat dissipation is 6.82 BTUs (1.7 gram-calories) per hour.
Wireless Terminals
Wireless terminals (9601-type) are pocket-sized, portable telephones designed to
operate indoors. The telephones provide 2 call appearances: a display that supports
basic business communications needs, and a 12-button dial pad. The telephone may be
used as a supplement to a wired desk telephone, or it may be used in place of a desk
telephone.
Up to 260 telephones can be used throughout the entire coverage area of 3 million
square feet (914,400 square meters). The telephone does not physically connect to the
system or to any system component. Instead, the telephone uses wireless
communications to a network of WFB. Only the bases physically connect to the system.
Battery Chargers
The battery charger can be either wall or desk mounted and can charge a fully
discharged battery in less than 1.5 hours. The charger can simultaneously charge a
pocket telephone battery and a spare battery pack. The battery charger meets the
requirements for “Equipment not Normally Customer Carried” and is intended for use
indoors.
■
32 to 120 °F (0 to 48.9 °C)
■
0% to 95% relative humidity
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
FreeWorks™ Wireless Telecommunications
253
DEFINITY Wireless Business System Books
For more information about installing the DEFINITY wireless business system, refer to
DEFINITY Wireless Business System Installation and Test, 555-232-102.
For information about connecting the wireless fixed base to the DEFINITY system, refer
to DEFINITY ECS Interface Wireless Business System, 555-232-108.
For more information on how to use the wireless telephone handsets, refer to the
DEFINITY Wireless Business System Pocket Phone User Guide, 555-232-105.
For more information about the DEFINITY wireless business system, refer to DEFINITY
Wireless Business System Multi-language User Guide, Comcode 407 648 112.
Personal Communications Manager Books
For more information about planning, installing, and maintaining the Forum personal
communications manager, refer to Personal Communications Manager Release 1.1
Support Guide, 585-232-101SPL.
For information about the personal communicator, refer to Personal Communicator 2055 User Guide, 585-232-702SPL.
For more information on how to use the system, refer to Getting Started with Personal
Communications Manager, 585-232-501SPL.
Wireless Terminals Feature Access
The Class of Restriction (COR) and Class of Service (COS) features can be used to limit
unauthorized access to features or services for a specific handset. Any telephone not
administered on a system displays a “service denied” indication.
A pocket telephone previously administered on a system may be removed from service
because it has been returned to customer inventory or reported as lost or stolen. The
mobility manager provides a “marking” option. If a “marked” telephone attempts to access
the system, a specified referral point is notified. Marked telephones are identified by their
serial numbers so a user’s extension number can be assigned to a different telephone.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
FreeWorks™ Wireless Telecommunications
Issue 1
April 2000
254
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview
255
B — System Capacity Limits
Overview
This appendix provides information on the overall characteristics and capacities of the
DEFINITY Systems.
System Capacity Limits
The maximum parameters for the DEFINITY hardware and software items are listed on
the following pages. These parameters apply to Compact Modular Cabinets,
Single-Carrier Cabinets, and Multi-Carrier Cabinet systems in category A (ECS and
ProLogix Solutions), and category B (DEFINITY BCS, DEFINITY One, and Guestworks).
Terminal and digital station capacities are reduced by such administered items as:
attendant consoles, number of EAS login IDs, and number of ACD agents.
NOTE:
Not all maximum capacities listed in Table 58 can be reached simultaneously with
all versions or all configurations of the system. See Station Button Capacity for
the system button limitations.
NOTE:
In Table 58 a single entry denotes that capacities for category A and category B
are the same. If the capacities are different, a slash (/) separates the entries (for
example, 8/NA). An asterisk, *, indicates that the software capacity limit cannot be
achieved due to hardware capacity limits for this platform.
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
256
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B)
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
AD lists per system
2400*
2400*
2400
5000
AD list entry size
24
24
24
24
12,000*
12,000*
12,000
100,000
Abbreviated Dialing (AD)
AD entries per system
Auto dialing
button1
Entries per system
Note1
Enhanced list (system list)
1
1
1
1
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
100
100
100
1000
Maximum entries
100
100
100
100
Group lists per extension
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
100
100
100
100
2400*
2400*
2400
5000
Maximum entries
100
100
100
100
Personal lists per extension
3
3
3
3
CallVisor ASAI adjuncts
8
82/NA
8/NA
163/NA
Asynchronous links (RS-232)4
NA
5
9
10
CDR output devices
Note5
2
2
2
Journal printers: System
printer
NA
2:1
2:1
2:1
Maximum entries
Group lists
System list
Maximum entries
Personal lists
Applications Adjuncts
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
257
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Property management
systems
NA
1
1
1
Maximum Links6
25
25
25
33
NA
NA
8
16
2
2
2
2
25
25
25
32
C-LAN IP Routes6
270
270
400
650
Application processors
NA
1/NA
1/NA
7
BX.25 physical
links7
C-LAN TCP/IP Ethernet
C-LAN TCP/IP PPP
Links6
Links6
Voice processing adjuncts
NA
Traditional AUDIX
NA
NA
1
8
DEFINITY AUDIX
NA
1
1
1
DEFINITY AUDIX DCP
emulation
NA
1
1
1
DEFINITY AUDIX control link
NA
NA
1
1
INTUITY AUDIX
NA
INTUITY AUDIX
(Via mode code)
NA
1
18
18
INTUITY AUDIX (Via BX.25)
NA
NA
1
8
INTUITY AUDIX (Via TCP/IP)
NA
1
1
8
INTUITY AUDIX (MAPD)
NA
1
1
1
NA
1
18
18
1
NA
NA
NA
Mode code voice mail systems
DEFINITY ONE
coresident AUDIX
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
258
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Other adjuncts
CMS X.25 adjunct
(PI/PGATE)9
NA
CMS C-LAN adjuncts
19
1/NA
1/NA
1/NA
ICM adjuncts (ISDN gateway)
NA
NA
NA
NA
BX.25 Processor channels
NA
NA
64
128
BX.25 Hop channels
NA
NA
64
128
TCP/IP Processor Channels
(includes Gateway Channels)
128
128
256
384
Announcements per split
2
2
2
2
Announcements per system
128
128
128
1000
Splits
99
99
99
600
ACD members per split
200
200
200
999
Maximum administered ACD
members10
1000*
1000*/
150
1000/
150
10,000/150
500
500/150
5200/150
4
4
4
4
NA
3/NA
3/NA
3/NA
4
4/NA
4/NA
4/NA
500*
NA/500
NA/500
NA/5200
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Logged-In splits per agent11
No CMS
R2 or R3V1 CMS
R3V2 or later
CMS9
Maximum Logged-in ACD agents
when each logs into12
1 split
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
259
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
2 splits
500*
500
500
5000
3 splits
333*
333
333
3333
250*
250
250
2500
200
200
200
999
1500
1500
1500
25,000
AAR/ARS patterns (shared)
254
254
254
640
ARS/AAR analysis tables
2000
2000
2000
2000
Choices per RHNPA table
12
12
12
12
Digit conversion entries
400
400
400
400
Digits deleted for ARS/AAR
28
28
28
28
Digits inserted for ARS/AAR
18
18
18
18
Digits deleted for ARS/AAR14
28
28
28
28
Digits inserted for ARS/AAR
36
36
36
36
Entries in each RHNPA table
1000
1000
1000
1000
FRLs
8
8
8
8
1200
1200
1200
3000
20
20
20
25
4 splits
Queue slots per
group13
Queue slots per system
ARS/AAR
AAR/ARS digit conversion
AAR/ARS sub-net trunking
Inserted digit
strings15
Patterns for measurement
Shared patterns for
measurement
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
260
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
RHNPA tables
32
32
32
32
Routing plans
8
8
8
8
ARS toll tables
32
32
32
32
800
800
800
800
Trunk groups in
ARS/AAR pattern
6
6
6
16
UDP (entries)
10,000
10,000
10,000
50,000
TOD charts
8
8
8
8
Toll analysis table entries
1000
1000
1000
1000
Attendant consoles (day:night)16
15:01
15:1
15:1
27:1
Attendant console 100s
groups per attendant
20
20
20
20
Attendant control
restriction groups
96
96
96
96
Release link trunks at branch
99
99/NA
99/NA
255/NA
Release link trunk
groups at branch
1
1/NA
1/NA
1/NA
Release link trunks at main
400
400/NA
400/NA
4000/NA
99
99/NA
99/NA
666/NA
Entries per toll table
Attendant Service
Centralized attendant service
Release link trunk
groups at main17
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
261
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Maximum number of queues
12
12
12
12
Maximum number of
queue slots18
80
80
80
80
Size range of reserved queue
2-75
2-75
2-75
2-75
Reserved queue default size
5
5
5
5
Queue length
80
80
80
300
Switched loops per console
6
6
6
6
Authorization codes
5000
5000
5000
90,000
Station security code length
7
7
7
7
Classes of restriction
96
96
96
96
Classes of service
16
16
16
16
Length of authorization code
4-7
4-7/NA
4-7/NA
4-7/NA
Length of barrier code
4-7
4-7/NA
4-7/NA
4-7/NA
Length of account codes
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
Restricted call list
1
1
1
1
Remote access barrier codes
10
10/NA
10/NA
10/NA
CDR account code list
1
1
1
1
Toll call list
1
1
1
1
Unrestricted/allowed call lists
10
10
10
10
Total call list entries
1000
1000
1000
1000
Other access queues
Authorization
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
262
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Automatic Callback Calls
240
240
240
1500
Simultaneous display requests
10
10
10
30
Wakeup requests per system
2400
2400
2400
15,000
Wakeup requests per extension
2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Wakeup requests per 15-minute
interval
450
450
450
950
Measured agents or Login IDs
25
400/25
400/25
2000/25
Measured agents per split
25
200/25
200/25
999/25
Measured splits
99
99/5
99/5
600/5
Measured trunk groups
32
32
32
32
Measured VDNs
99
99/10
99/10
512/20
Maximum agents displayed by
monitor BCMS split command19
100
100/25
100/25
100/25
Maximum BCMS terminals
3
3
3
4
Maximum active maintenance
commands for the system
1
1
1
5
Maximum simultaneous BCMS
terminals in monitor mode20
1
1
1
3
Intervals
25
25
25
25
Days
7
7
7
7
Automatic Wakeup
Basic CMS (BCMS)
Reporting periods
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
263
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
NA
NA
2
43
Single-carrier cabinet (SCC or NA
CMC)21
NA
8
164
Cabinets
Expansion port network (EPN)
Multicarrier cabinet
(medium-capacity MCC)21
Inter-port network connectivity
Port networks
1
1
3
44
Maximum number
of PNs per cabinet
1
1
1
2
Switch nodes (Simplex)
NA
NA
NA
3
Switch nodes (Duplex)
NA
NA
NA
6
ATM interfaces used for
port network (PN)
connectivity, per system
NA
NA
NA
88
DS1 converter complex
(simplex)
NA
NA
NA
41
DS1 converter complex
(duplex)
NA
NA
NA
82
Multicarrier cabinet (MCC)
NA
NA
1
1
Single-carrier cabinet
(SCC/ESCC)
NA
NA
4
NA
Compact single-carrier
cabinet (CSCC)
NA
NA
NA
NA
Processor port network (PPN)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
264
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
322
322
NA
NA
Bridged images per
appearance23
26
64
64
64
Call appearances per station24
54
54
54
54
Maximum appearances
per extension
10
10
10
10
Minimum appearances
per extension
0
0
0
0
Total bridged appearances
2400*
2400*
2400
25,000
Maximum simultaneous
off-hook per call25
5
5
5
5
Coverage answer groups (CAG)
200
200
200
750
Coverage paths
999
999
999
9999
Coverage paths including in call
coverage report
100
100
100
100
Coverage path per station
4
4
4
4
Coverage points in a path
6
6/3
6/3
6/3
Remote coverage points
999
999
999
999
3500*
3500*
3500
36,065/
3500
Compact modular cabinet
(CMC)
Call Appearances
Call Coverage
Maximum users per coverage
path26
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
265
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Members per coverage
answer group
8
8
8
8
Time of day coverage tables
999
999
999
999
Time of day changes per table
5
5
5
5
Remote administration
Coverage paths
2
2/NA
2/NA
2/NA
Intra-switch call
trackable extensions
1000
1000
1000
5000
Maximum number of CDR
records buffered in switch
Note27
500
500
9614
Number of records buffered for
the primary output device to
cause secondary device to be
busied out for 2 minutes
NA
200
200
1800
Call forwarded digits (off-net)
16
16
16
16
Call forwarded numbers
2400
2400
2400
25,000
Attendant group common shared
extension numbers per system28
80
80
80
80
Number of Parked Calls
723
723
723
10,604
Call Detail Recording
Call Forwarding
Call Park
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
266
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
50
50
50
50
2400*
2400*
2400
25,000
800
800*
800
5000
Maximum skills a call can
simultaneously queue to
3
3
3
3
Priority levels
4
4
4
4
Recorded announcements/audio
sources for vector delay
128
128
128
256
Steps per vector
32
32
32
32
Vector directory numbers
512
512/10
512/10
20,00029/20
CMS measured VDNs30
512
512/NA
512/NA
20,00031/
NA
Vectors per system
256
256/10
256/10
999/20
Number of collected digits for call
prompting or CINFO
16
16
16
16
Number of dial-ahead
digits for call prompting
24
24
24
24
Vector routing tables
NA
10/NA
10/NA
100/NA
BSR Application-Location
Pairs32
NA
1000
1000
1000
Call Pickup Groups
Call pickup members per group
Call pickup members per system
Number of groups
Call Vectoring
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
267
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
1
1/NA
1/NA
1/NA
Active adjunct control
300
associations (simultaneous active
call-controlled calls)
8002/NA
800/NA
700033/NA
Active adjunct route requests
system-wide
300
5002/NA
500/NA
4000/NA
Active adjunct route requests
per link (switch to adjunct
associations)
126
5002/NA
500/NA
4000/NA
Active notifications per call
3
3/NA
3/NA
6/NA
Active notifications per split
domain
3
3/NA
3/NA
6/NA
Active notifications per VDN
domain
3
3/NA
3/NA
6/NA
Call controllers per call
1
12/NA
1/NA
1/NA
28
282/NA
28/NA
28/NA
126
5002/NA
500/NA
4000/NA
Domain-control associations
per call
12
122/NA
12/NA
24/NA
Domain-control station
associations (active station
control associations)
2,000
2000/NA
2000/NA
6000/NA
Domain-control split/skill
associations
300
3002/NA
300/NA
2000/NA
CallVisor ASAI
Adjunct control associations
per call
Call monitors per call
CRVs ECS to adjunct
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
268
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Domain-controls per station
domain
1
22/NA
2/NA
4/NA
Domain-controls per split/skill
domain
1
4/NA
4/NA
8/NA
Notification associations
(requests or monitors)
300
3002/NA
300/NA
10,000/NA
Maximum calls with send DTMF
active
16
162/NA
16/NA
32/NA
Number of CallVisor ASAI links
(open & proprietary)
8
82/NA
8/NA
8/163/NA
Maximum simultaneous calls
being classified
80
802/NA
80/NA
600/NA
Monitors per VDN or split
6
62/NA
6/NA
6/NA
Split/skill domain controls
system-wide
300
3002/NA
300/NA
2000/NA
Simultaneous billing (MultiQuest)
requests
100
1002/NA
100/NA
1000/NA
Station controllers per station
4
42/NA
4/NA
4/NA
75
752/NA
75/NA
300/NA
Messages/second per
ASAI/BRI link
30
20/NA
30/NA
30/NA
Msgs/sec per MAPD
LAN-gateway link
Note34
12035/NA
240/NA
240/NA
Simultaneous selected listening
disconnected paths
ASAI traffic
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
269
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Note34
200/NA
200/NA
200/NA
Lan gateway links per
multifunction circuit pack
4
NA/NA
4/NA
4/NA
LAN gateway links per MAPD
8
8/NA
8/NA
8/NA
6
6
6
6
Simultaneous 3-way conference
calls36
483
483
483
7084
Simultaneous 6-way
conference calls37
240
240
240
3520
128
128
128
128
Maximum entries
200
200
200
1250
Characters per entry
22
22
22
22
PRI endpoints (PE)
8
8
25
50
Access endpoints
(number of trunks)
400
400
400
4000
TN787D MMI boards38
4
4/NA2
4/NA
12/NA
TN788B VC boards38
25
25/NA
25/NA
69/NA
MMI and VC boards in
multiple PNs
NA
NA
Yes/NA
Yes/NA
Msgs/sec per system
LAN gateway board max links
Conference Parties
Data Parameters
Administered connections
Alphanumeric dialing
Multimedia Parameters
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
270
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Multimedia One Number
conferences per system38
800*
800*2/NA
800/NA
2000/NA
Multimedia Dynamic
Conference Records
64
64/NA
64/NA
192/NA
Maximum BRI connections
1000*
842/NA
1000/NA
7000/NA
MASI nodes
15
15/NA
15/NA
15/NA
MASI links
15
15/NA
15/NA
15/NA
MASI trunk groups
96
96/NA
96/NA
120/NA
800
800
800
7500
Direct inward dialing listed
directory numbers
8
8
8
20
Extensions (total)39
3500*
3500*
3500*
36,065
2416*
2416
2416
25,028
Extension number portability41
10,000
10,000
10,000
50,000
Feature dial access codes
77
77
77
77
1-4
1-4
1-4
Digital Data Endpoints
Dial Plan
Station
extensions40
Number of digits in a
feature access code
Integrated directory entries42
2416*
2416*
2416
25,028
Maximum extension size
5
5
5
5
Minimum extension size
1
1
1
1
900
900
900
2317
Miscellaneous
extensions43
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
271
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Number of names44
4215
4215
4215
36,511
Number of characters
in a name
27
27
27
27
Non-DID LDNs
50
50
50
666
Prefix extensions
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
317*
317*
317
884/317
1-4
1-4
1-4
Names
Trunk dial access codes
Number of access codes
Number of digits
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Do not disturb requests
per system
2400*
2400*
2400
25,000
Simultaneous display requests
10
10
10
30
Skill groups
99
99/NA
99/NA
999/NA
VDN skill preferences
3
3/NA
3/NA
3/NA
Maximum skills a call can
simultaneously queue to
3
3/NA
3/NA
3/NA
Maximum administered ACD
members (login ID-skill pairs)45
6000
6000/NA
6000/NA
65,000/NA
Maximum staffed (logged-in)
ACD members46
1000
1000/NA
1000/NA
10,000/NA
Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
272
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
1500
1500/NA
1500/NA
10,000/NA
No CMS
20
20/NA
20/NA
20/NA
R3V2 to R3V4 CMS
4
4/NA
4/NA
4/NA
R3V5 or later CMS
20
20/NA
20/NA
20/NA
Skill levels (preferences)
per agent skill
16
16/NA
16/NA
16/NA
20
500*
50/NA
50/NA
500/NA
10
500*
100/NA
100/NA
1000/NA
4
250*
250/NA
250/NA
2500/NA
2
100*
500/NA
500/NA
5000/NA
1
50
500/NA
500/NA
5200/NA
32
32
32
90
Buttons per tracked resource
100
100
100
500
Number of indicators
(station and trunk groups)
3600*
3600*
3600
10,000
Announcements per group
1
1/2
1/2
1/2
Announcements per system
128
128
128
1000
Maximum agent login IDs
administered47
Maximum skills per agent
Maximum logged-in EAS
(per system) when each has:12
External device alarming
Facility busy indicators
Hunt Groups (Non-ACD)48
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
273
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
99
99
99
999
200
200
200
1500
1000
1000
1000
10,000
Queue slots per group
200
200
200
999
Queue slots per system
1500
1500
1500
25,000
ICOM groups per system
32
32
32
256
Auto/Manual
32
32
32
256
32
32
32
256
Auto
32
32
32
32
Dial
32
32
32
32
1024*
1024*
1024
8,192
Entries per system49
3216*
3216*
3216
32,528
Number of digits
24
24
24
24
Messages stored
2000*
2000*
2000
6000
Messages per user
125
125
125
125
Groups
Group members per group
Group members per
system48
Intercom Translation Table (ICOM)
Auto/manual and Dial
Dial
Members per ICOM group
Members per system
Last Number Dialed
Leave Word Calling (Switch-Based)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
274
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Per extension
80
80/NA
80/NA
80/NA
Per system
240
240/NA
240/NA
1250/NA
Simultaneous message retrievers 60
60
60
400
System-wide message retrievers
10
10
10
10
16
16
16
16
Via direct inward dialing
8
8
8
20
Via direct inward dialing with
tenant partition
20
20/NA
20/NA
100/NA
Via Central Office
99
99
99
666
Group members per system
160
160/NA
160/NA
2016/NA
Number of groups
5
5/NA
5/NA
63/NA
Members per group
32
32/NA
32/NA
32/NA
99
99/NA
99/NA
99/NA
Remote message
waiting indicators
Malicious Call Trace
Maximum simultaneous traces
MLDN
Modem Pool Groups
(Mode-2/Analog)
Networking
Centralized attendants service
(CAS) nodes
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
275
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
BX.25 (Private)
NA
NA
20/NA
20/NA
TCP/IP
20
20/NA
20/NA
20/NA
ISDN PRI
20
20/NA
20/NA
20/NA
Hybrid (combination of
PRI, BX.25, and & TCP/IP)
NA
20/NA
20/NA
20/NA
999
999/NA
999/NA
999/NA
Code calling IDs
125
125
125
125
Loudspeaker zones
9
9
9
9
Attendant groups
15
15/NA
15/NA
27/NA
Extension partition groups
8
8/NA
8/NA
8/NA
Extension partition
8
8/NA
8/NA
8/NA
Tenant partition
20
20/NA
20/NA
100/NA
Multiple music-on-hold sources
20
20/NA
20/NA
100/NA
PCOL appearances
16
16
16
16
PCOL lines (trunk groups)
200
200
200
200
PCOL trunks per trunk group
1
1
1
1
Distributed communications
system (DCS) nodes50
EN nodes51
Paging
Partitions
Personal CO Lines (PCOL)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
276
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Multi-Carrier Cabinet standard NA
reliability
NA
99
99
Single-Carrier Cabinet
standard reliability
NA
NA
71
71
Small cabinet standard
reliability (upgrade only)
NA
NA
39
39
Multi-Carrier Cabinet standard NA
reliability
NA
89
80
Single-Carrier Cabinet
standard reliability
NA
NA
64
NA
Enhanced Single-Carrier
Cabinet standard reliability
NA
NA
70
NA
Compact Single-Carrier
Cabinet standard reliability
NA
NA
NA
NA
Compact Modular Cabinet
28
28
NA
NA
150
150
150
1000
Port Circuit Pack Slots52
Per Expansion Port Network
Per Processor Port Network
Recorded Announcements/Audio
Sources for Vector Delay
Analog and auxiliary trunk
announcements
Analog and auxiliary trunk
queue slots per
announcement
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
277
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Analog and auxiliary trunk
queue slots per system
150
150
150
1000
Trunk calls connected
per announcement
150
150
150
1000
Integrated announcement
circuit packs
5
5
5
10
Channels connected per
integrated announcement
circuit pack
16
16
16
16
Announcement circuit pack
saved
Note53
1
1
1
Calls connected per
integrated announcement
50
50
50
1000
16 kB recording
8:32
8:32
8:32
8:32
32 kB recording
4:16
4:16
4:16
4:16
64 kB recording
2:08
2:08
2:08
2:08
Integrated queue slots
per system
200
200
200
4000
Total recorded announcements
128
128
128
256
Integrated announcements
Integrated announcement
recording time (minutes:
seconds) per circuit pack
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
278
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Number of logins
Note54
15
15
20
Administrable history file entries
500
500
500
1250
Simultaneous administration
commands
1
1
1
5
Simultaneous maintenance
commands
1
1
1
5
Simultaneous system
maintenance sessions
1
5
5
8
Number of scheduled reports
Note55
50
50
50
Access Security Gateway
Session History Log Entries
NA
100
100
250
6
6
6
40
4
4
4
4
TEGs
32
32
32
32
Users that may share a TEG
4
4
4
4
Simultaneous circuit-switched
calls56
241
24157
723
7712
Total time slots
512
51257
1536
22,528
483
48357
1449
21,208
System Administration
Speech Synthesis Circuit Packs
Channels per speech circuit pack
Terminating Extension Groups
(TEG)
Time Slots
Time slots for voice and
data58
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
279
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
512
51257
512
512
Tone receivers (general)59
200
200
200
840
TTR queue size
4
4
4
4
Prompting TTR queue size
80
80
80
80
DS1 circuit packs
30*
30*
30
166
Queue slots for trunks
198
198
198
1332
Measured trunks in system
400*
400*
400
4000
Total PRI interfaces
30
16/8
30
166
PRI interface via TN799 C-LAN
NA
8/8
NA
NA
PRI interface via TN794 NetPkt
NA
NA
30/NA
NA
PRI interface via processor
interface (PI)
NA
NA
NA
NA
PRI LAPD physical links via
PACCON60 (packet controller)
NA
NA
NA
NA
PRI interfaces via TN1655
PackInt
NA
NA
NA
NA
PRI Interfaces via TDM Bus
8
8
NA
NA
Emulated circuits per ATM-CES
interface
8
8
8
8
PRI D-channels per ATM-CES
interface
8
8
8
8
Time slots per port network
Tone Classifiers
Trunks
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
280
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
ATM-CES interfaces used for PRI
circuit-emulation, per system
2
2
6
88
ATM circuit-emulation and port
network-connectivity interfaces,
per system
2
2
6
176
BRI trunks61
NA
8
8
30
240
160
192
720
TSCs in system
656
656
656
4256
Call associated TSCs
400
400
400
4000
Non call associated TSCs
256
256
256
256
Administered TSCs
128
128
128
128
Ringback queue slots
198
198
198
1332
Trunk group hourly
measurements
25
25
25
75
Trunk groups in the system
99
99
99
666
Trunk members in a
trunk group
99
99
99
255
18
18
18
54
BRI trunk circuit packs
BRI trunks total
ISDN temporary signaling
connections
Trunk groups
ISDN services
Incoming call handling
treatment (per trunk group)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
281
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
288
288
288
576
User defined services
24
24
24
60
Usage allocation entries
(per plan)
15
15
15
15
800
50063
800
7500
Point-to-Point
1000*
842
1000
7000
Multipoint (passive bus)
1000*
1682
1000
7000
2400*
50063
2400
25,000
Incoming call handling
treatment (per trunk system)
Voice Terminals62
Associated data modules
(such as DTDMs)
BRI stations64
Digital stations
2400*
50063
2400
10,000
Stations65
2400*
50063
2400
25,00066
Station button capacity
(K Units)67
656.4
656.4
662.4
5260
Station button feature capacity68
15,900
15,900
15,900
15,900
Measured agents or login IDs
400
400/NA
400/NA
2,000/NA
Measured splits
99
99/NA
99/NA
600/NA
Measured trunk groups
32
32/NA
32/NA
32/NA
Measured VDNs
99
99/NA
99/NA
512/NA
Display stations
VuStats
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
282
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
R8csi
R8si
R8r
Intervals
25
25/NA
25/NA
25/NA
Days
1
1/NA
1/NA
1/NA
Display formats
50
50/NA
50/NA
50/NA
Simultaneous updating
displays
100
100/NA
100/NA
500/NA
DEFINITY Wireless Business
System Terminals (9601)
250
250
1000
1500
Radio controller circuit packs69
30
30
30
30
Wireless fixed bases
60
60
60
60
Cell antenna units (CAU)
240
240
240
240
Coverage (million square feet)
3
3
3
3
Button capacity for wireless
700.8
656.4
662.4
5260
Reporting periods
Displays
Radio Hub 9500s
Wireless Fixed Base 9711s
Hard Disk Drive
Total Capacity (Mbytes)
3000
C drive allocation
1500
D drive allocation
1500
Hard Drive Budgets by application
(Mbytes) (D drive only)
Continued on next page
Issue 1
April 2000
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Table 58.
283
Maximum System Parameters (Category A/B) — Continued
DEFINITY
ITEM
One
Station Capacity
20070
R8csi
R8si
R8r
H.323 endpoints
300
300
1000
TN799 circuit packs
10
10
10
TN802B circuit packs
50
50
50
Network regions
10
10
10
30
30
166
Windows NT Client Licenses
Total client licenses in NT
workstation
10
Window NT License Budget
Intuity Message Manager
5
Audix Networking
2
DSA
1
Services Access
1
Call Accounting Access (CAS)
1
IP Solutions
Signaling
groups71
Continued on next page
1
There is no limit on the maximum number of auto dial buttons (other than the system
limit on button capacity). See Station Button Capacity for system button limitations.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Issue 1
April 2000
284
2
BRI stations are supported on R6.2csi and later only with the TN556C. The TN2198 is
not supported on R6.2csi or R6.3csi, but can be used with R7.1csi over C-LAN. ASAI
is available on R6.3.2 and later csi models using the TN801B MAPD. The TN2198
cannot be supported over the TDM bus, thus BRI station capacities are less with
TN2198 (6 circuit packs instead of 7). ASAI via the LAN Gateway R1 (MFB) is not
supported on csi.
3
The capacity for ASAI links is 8 in R6.1 - 6.2. The capacity was increased to 16 links
in R6.3 with the MAPD (BRI link capacity is still limited to 8).
4
For R7 and later releases, the si has eight (8) NetCon channels plus one (1)
direct-connect.
5
CONTRY stores CDR records on a disk file, either on the local disk or on any disk on
the LAN.
6
Each C-LAN circuit pack has one Ethernet connection and 16 PPP connections. A
maximum of 2 C-LAN circuit packs are allowed for each model. The combination of
BX.25 links, the new TCP/IP PPP links, and the new TCP/IP Ethernet links have to be
less than the maximum number of links.
7
In the case of SCC/ESCC/CSCC, only 4 BX.25 physical links are supported in the
configuration.
8
Mode code integration with Intuity AUDIX is only marketed on csi models.
9
ProLogix or CONTRY only connects to R3V6 or later CMS via C-LAN TCP/IP starting
with R7.1 DEFINITY.
10
Number of agent-split combinations supported. Agent-split pairs is the total
combination used by ACD agents, Auto-Available Splits (AAS) ports (e.g., VRUs),
non-ACD hunt groups (hunting groups w/ or w/o queues, Message Center Service,
INTUITY/AUDIX, Remote AUDIX, etc.). Each non-ACD hunt group member, AAS split
member and split assigned to an ACD agent is counted when administered.
11
An agent can be assigned more splits during administration but only this number can
be simultaneously logged into.
12
The number of agents that can log into the same split/skill is limited by the maximum
Members per Group limits. Maximum agent limits are reduced by the number of
non-ACD members and AAS ports administered and, with non-EAS, the additional
splits assigned to agents that are not logged into.
13
Queue slots are shared across non-ACD, ACD (splits/skills) and AAS hunt groups.
14
Plus up to 7 inter-exchange carrier (IXC) digits.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Issue 1
April 2000
285
15
This is the number of available 12 character inserted-digit-strings available for
AAR/ARS preferences.
16
The number of attendant consoles listed is per software limitations. 4 consoles are
supported per vs and 1 per CMC cabinet without supplemental power.
17
The number of release link trunk groups at the Main is the same as the number of trunk
groups in the system.
18
"Maximum number if queue slots" is referred to as "emergency access queue length"
in si.
19
The Monitor Split command will only display status for the first 100 agents logged into
the split regardless of how many additional agents log into the split.
20
BCMS monitoring, being a maintenance command, is limited by the active
maintenance commands limit, reduced by 2 in the "r" system configuration (since 2
active command slots are reserved for the INADS and SMT logins respectively).
21
Only EPNs in r can be DS1-remoted EPNs.
22
R6csi is limited to 3 carriers (28 slots) by the DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions offer. The
A (1st) carrier provides 8 slots in addition to 2 slots that are required by the TN798
Processor and TN2182 Tone Clock circuit packs. The B (2nd) and C (3rd) carriers
provide 10 slots each. The R6csi software and hardware allow a D (4th) carrier. This
capability may be allowed in future offers. In CONTRY R1 limited to 1 cabinet.
23
Twenty-six bridged appearances (principal + 25) are supported on all R6 platforms,
provided that ASAI is not used. The capacity is 16 with ASAI.
24
The number of call appearances is the sum of primary and bridged appearances; at
most 10 can be primary. A maximum of 54 administrable buttons can be supported for
the 7434 terminal without display.The 8434 terminal with display and expansion
module can support up to 52 call appearances.
25
Does not apply to conferencing.
26
Maximum number of users per coverage path equals to the number of extensions.
27
CONTRY stores CDR records on a disk file. The disk can be either the local "office"
disk or a disk on the LAN. The size of the file is disk dependent. DEFINITY, however,
can still buffer 500 records in memory should this disk be unavailable.
28
Shared extensions must be shared among all attendant groups in the system including
Tenant Partition scenarios.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Issue 1
April 2000
286
29
VDNs are counted as part of the miscellaneous extensions capacity. The total of
VDNs, hunt groups, announcements, LDNs, TEGs, PCOL groups, access endpoints,
administered TSCs and Code Calling IDs extensions and common shared extensions
cannot exceed 20,317 for r models. In addition, the total of stations (station extensions
including ACD agent physical set extensions, Logical Agent IDs and AWOH) assigned
and the VDNs assigned can not exceed 25,000 for r models (share message server
space). Also, the total of all extensions assigned for any purpose can not exceed
36,065 for r models. See the Dial Plan section for details.
30
Measured limits depend on the CMS release used.
31
CMS permission checking for VDNs is disabled when more than 2,000 VDNs are to be
measured. Also, interval reporting on CMS for large numbers of VDNs is limited due
to an Informix 2 GB file size limit.
32
BSR application numbers and location numbers are limited to a range of 1 to 255 (i.e.,
each is limited to 255).
33
Requires 2 byte CRVs.
34
This information has not yet been determined.
35
R6.3.2csi and later without the C-LAN board supports 120 messages/sec. R7csi and
later, with C-LAN, supports 240 messages/sec. The system limit is 240 messages/sec.
36
Simultaneous 3-way Conference Call= (483 / 3)* number PNs.
37
Simultaneous 6-way Conference Call= (483 / 6)* number PNs.
38
This feature was introduced in the Release 5.4 load and is not available in previous R5
loads.
39
Total extensions is the count of all extension assignments for any use. Included in this
count are "station extensions," "miscellaneous extensions," data extension groups
(800 for csi/si and 7500 for r), PRI endpoint groups (8 for csi, 25 for si, and 50 for r),
and trunk group extensions (99 for csi/si and 666 for r).
40
"Station extensions" consist of attendant extensions (max. 28 for r), station set
assignments (including ACD agent physical sets), AWOH (admin. without hardware),
and administered Logical Agent IDs extensions.
41
The numbers shown in "Extension Number Portability" are Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP)
entries.
42
Integrated Directory Entries = Stations + Attendant Consoles.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
System Capacity Limits
287
43
Miscellaneous extensions consist of VDNs, hunt groups, announcements, LDNs,
PCOL groups, common shared extensions, access endpoints, administered TSCs,
Code Calling IDs, TEGs and Phantom ACAs.
44
Number of Names = number of stations + attendant consoles + trunk groups + digital
data endpoints + miscellaneous extensions.
45
Total of the administered Login ID skill-pair members (for agents and AAS ports).
46
Number of agent-skill combinations supported. Agent-skill pairs is the total
combination used by ACD agents, Auto-Available Skills (AAS) ports (e.g., VRUs),
non-ACD hunt groups (hunting groups w/ or w/o queues, Message Center Service,
INTUITY/AUDIX, Remote AUDIX, etc.). Each non-ACD hunt group member and AAS
skill member is counted when administered. Each skill assigned to an EAS agent is
counted as an ACD member when the EAS agent logs in, not when administered.
47
This limit can be reached on DEFINITY ECS only if 4 skills or less are assigned per
Login ID due to the ACD Members Administered (Login ID-skill pair) limits. The
following shows the Login ID limits for different number of skills per Login ID
(assumes increased administered Login ID-skill pair capacity provided in R6.3.3):
Max. Login IDs With:
csi/si
r
1 to 4 Skills Each
1,500
10,000
10 Skills Each
600
6,500
20 Skills Each
300
3,250
48
Hunt group members include non-ACD (hunting, Message Center Service,
Intuity/AUDIX, Remote AUDIX, etc.) and ACD uses (splits or skills including
Auto-Available Splits/Skills). Each ACD agent-split/skill assignment counts as a hunt
group member.
49
Last Number Dialed Entries = Stations + Digital Data Endpoints + Attendant Consoles.
50
The actual limit in the software is 63, but due to performance considerations the
recommended number of DCS Nodes is 20.
51
The numbers here are node number addresses.
52
Only port slots are included in this count. For example, there are 100 slots per MCC
EPN cabinet with 99 port slots and one slot dedicated for the Tone Clock board. There
may be other service circuits required which would further reduce the number of port
slots available. In r model and G3i MCC port carriers, the service slots may be
equipped with service boards that do not require tip & ring connections.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
System Capacity Limits
288
53
Saved on TN97C only.
54
CONTRY employs a co-resident DSA module for customer access to administration.
This module uses a single internal hidden login to DEFINITY. DSA supports an
unlimited number of customer logins to DSA, but only one may be active at (saved on
TN79C only).
55
Reports are not produced via DEFINITY, but through DSA. There isn’t the concept of
a limit to this activity in DSA.
56
241 Simultaneous Circuit Switched Calls per port network. DEFINITY r has a total of
7,712 which is limited by the number of call records supported. This is the total number
of simultaneous 2-party calls. Multimedia calls tend to be multi-party calls. See
DEFINITY Hardware and Traffic Guidelines for R6, CID 57864, for further details.
57
Supports PRI D-Channels over the TDM bus. Each D-Channel for PRI uses one
timeslot pair. An R6csi with 8 PRIs utilizes 8 timeslot pairs, allowing a maximum of 233
simultaneous circuit switched calls.
58
483 time slots for Voice & Data per port network.
59
G3V4, R5, and R6 use the TN744 Call Classifier/Detector for basic TTR usage as
well as call prompting/call classification/MFC. In addition the TN2182
Tone/Clock/Detector is used for multiple tone detection functions. The number of
TN748, TN420, or TN744 boards is limited only by the number of available slots. The
number of TN2182 boards is limited only as described in DEFINITY Hardware and
Traffic "Configuration Guidelines for G3V5, CID 49756. There is a single limit on the
total number of tone receiver (classifier) ports for the system. The Configuration
Guidelines have been updated for R6 (CID 57864).
TN748/TN420 have 4 ports for TTR use
TN748/TN420 have 2 ports for GPTD use
TN744 has 8 ports for call prompting/call classification/MFC/TTR/GPTD use
TN2182 has 8 ports for call prompting/call classification/MFC/TTR/GPTD use
60
Only 1 Processor Interface (PI) board is supported in the G3vs (CSCC) and si model
(ESCC) configurations, and therefore a total of 4 physical links (used for BX.25 or PRI
LAPD termination) are available. Two PI interfaces are supported in si with the MCC.
PRI via the PI is not type approved in Germany, France, and Italy. In these countries
PRI over PACCON must be used on vs/si. For csi, PRI over the TDM bus will be type
approved for all countries.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
System Capacity Limits
Issue 1
April 2000
289
61
The TN2185 BRI Trunk circuit pack provides 8 ports. Each port (2B + D) provides 2
BRI trunks.
62
The following items subtract from the total number of available "Stations" on a given
switch:
Analog Music-On-Hold
Attendants
Modem Pool Conversion Resources
TAAS Port
Stations (Digital, display, BRI, etc.)
Analog Announcements
Analog External Alarm Port
Agent Login Ids
ACD Agents
These items constitute all the valid objects within software that limits the number of
available stations on a switch. Customers must be made aware that Attendant
Consoles and Stations are not the only objects that detract from the total number of
available stations on a switch. Also see the Dial Plan section for more details.
63
Up to 900 stations can be assigned in software (AWOH). The physical number of
stations is limited by the hardware capacity of 28 slots (3 CMCs).
64
All BRI stations can be display stations.
65
Including extensions administered without associated hardware. Also see the Dial
Plan section for details.
66
The total of stations (station extensions including ACD agent physical set extensions,
Logical Agent IDs and AWOH) assigned and the VDNs assigned can not exceed
25,000 for r models (share message server space). Dial plan limits also apply, see the
Dial Plan section for details.
67
"Station Button Capacity (units)" replaces "Maximum Button Modules" (from
pre-R1V5.1). See Section 5.3 of the R6 Configuration Guidelines (CID 57864) for
complete information.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
System Capacity Limits
68
290
The following button features share a common resource in memory:
Call Forwarding
Call Forward Busy Don’t Answer
Send Extension Calls (SAC w/extension)
Station Busy Indicators
Trunk Group Status
Hunt Group Status
Loudspeaker Paging Zone Status
PCOL Group Status
Data Module
Terminating Extension Group Status
Announcement Status
Attendant Group Status/DXS
Remote Trunk Group Select
69
For r, TN789 Radio Controller Circuit Packs cannot be used in DS-1 remoted EPNs.
70
Station support is limited by the co-resident capacities for voice messaging.
71
The signaling connections are shared by ISDN and ATM trunk signaling.
*
Software capacity limit cannot be achieved due to hardware capacity limits for this
platform.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Issue 1
April 2000
Overview
291
C — National Type-Approval Labels
Overview
This section contains displays of national type-approval labels. The presence of these
displays in this document makes it unnecessary to apply the labels to the physical
product.
Hong Kong
These are the type-approval labels for the systems that have shown compliance with their
technical specifications. The Telecommunications Authority has granted certificates of
approval to sell these systems in Hong Kong.
Figure 51.
Type-approval label for Lucent DEFINITY G3si
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Overview
Figure 52. Type-approval label for Lucent DEFINITY ProLogix
Figure 53. Type-approval label for Lucent DEFINITY G3r
Issue 1
April 2000
292
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
293
Index
IN
Numerics
2-wire DCP circuit packs
TN2181, 169
TN2224, 176
2-wire U-interfaces (TN2198), 172
4-wire E & M lead signaling tie
trunks, 168
4-wire S/T-NT interfaces, 141
4C3S-75 solid state protectors, 69
105D Isolating Data Interface, 185
1217A, 133
127A Quad Balun box, 186
16-port DCP circuit packs, 169
24-port DCP circuit packs, 176
48-VDC batteries, 55
120A CSUs, 186
122A music on hold interface, 186
300A fiber optic transceivers, 187
315x-series CSUs, 188
507B sneak fuse panels, 69, 70
631DA1/B1 AC power units, 53, 132
644A1 DC power units, 132
645B1 DC power units, 53, 132
649A DC power units, 53, 62, 132
650A AC power units, 53, 133
676B DC power units, 66, 134
700A DS-1 CPE loopback, 188
982LS current limiters, 134
9601-type wireless terminals, 252
9823A/B lightwave transceivers, 190
A
AC power
battery chargers, 54
circuit breakers, 52
converting to DC power, 75
distribution units, 54
grounding , 62
power feeders, 47
receptacle strips, 75
single-phase, 47, 49
supply
WP-91153, 65
WP-92464, 251
three phase, 47, 49
units
631DA1/B1, 53, 132
650A, 133
acoustic noise levels, 45, 47
adjuncts, table, 183
administered ringing patterns, 246
administration, 19
ADUs (TN726/B), 145
air purity, 44
alarm circuit packs, 134, 169
alarm panel information, 165
alarm with ethernet (TN2170), 134
alarm with Ethernet interface, 169
alarms, external, 191
allocation of buttons, 229
altitude and air pressure, 42
analog line circuit packs
TN468B, 140
TN479, 140
TN742, 145
TN746/B, 147, 150, 159, 175, 176
TN769, 153
TN2135, 167
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
294
analog line circuit packs, (continued)
TN2144, 168
TN2149, 169
TN2180, 169
TN2183, 176
announcement circuit packs, 148
applications layers, 11
approved grounds, 62
architecture, 11
ASAI links, 141
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
(ATM), 77, 112, 190
T-1/E-1 splitter, 188
ATM Network Duplication, 110
audible ringing patterns, 245
AUDIX, circuit-pack assembly, 134
Australia
ringing patterns, 246
TN419B tone clock, 136
TN436B DID trunk, 137
TN437 tie trunk, 138
TN439 tie trunk, 138
TN468B analog line, 140
AUX connectors, 74
auxiliary cabinets, 15
auxiliary trunk circuit packs
TN417, 136
B
backup power, 55, 58
batteries
48 VDC, 55
BIUs (BU3200A/B), 190
chargers, 55, 252
small assemblies, 58
BCCs (J58890L), 14, 92, 96
Belgium, 168, 246
BTD08 busy tone disconnect, 190
BU3200A/B BIUs, 190
bus buffers, 122
busy tone disconnect, 190
button allocations, 229
C
cabinets
AC powered , 65
acoustic noise levels, 45
auxiliary (J58886N), 75
cabling distances, 234
CBCs, 64
components, 12
cooling fans, 68
DC powered , 70, 134
dimensions/clearances, 27
earthquake protections, 71
environmental considerations, 41
lightning protection, 70
minimum configurations, 106
power sources, 47
version comparisons, 16
cabling distances, 120, 234, 238
call processing performance, 194
call progress tones, 240, 242
call-classifier circuit packs
TN2182/B, 170, 242
calls per hour, 194
CallVisor ASAI, 136
CallVisor ASAI over DEFINITY LAN
Gateway port assemblies
R1 (ED-1E546), 135
carriers
circuit pack slots, 95
COMSPHERE 3000-series, 188
power control (TN1648), 165
version comparisons, 16
CAUs, 252
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
295
CBCs, 64, 70
CE marks, iii
CFY1B current limiters, 80, 134
circuit breakers, 52, 54, 55
circuit packs, 124 to 132
apparatus code tables, 124
carrier slots, 80, 95
sneak current protection, 70
types, 121
CMCs (J58890T), 12 to 14
configurations, 31
dimensions, 27
fan units, 68
heat dissipation, 41
CO trunk circuit packs
TN438B, 138
TN447, 138
TN465/B/C, 140
TN747B, 148
TN2138, 167
TN2147/C, 168
TN2199, 172
commercial floor loading code, 30
Comminicore mobility manager, 191
COMSPHERE 3000-series carriers, 188
concrete encased grounds, 63
conduit, as ground , 64
configurations, 4, 193
connector blocks, DC, 75
control cabinets
duplicated (J58890M), 92, 97
control carriers, 11, 75, 79
control circuit packs, 121
control LAN Interface (TN799), 164
CONVERSANT connectivity
TN464F, 139, 180
TN2183, 176
converters, AC to DC power, 75
cooling fans, 68
corrosive gas contaminants, 44
coupled bonding conductor (for
grounding), 64
critical reliability systems, 109, 112
cross-connect field , 41, 120
CSS, 3, 10
CSUs
120A units, 186
315x-series, 188
CT2 technology, 191, 249
Current Limiter, 134
current limiters
982LS, 134
CFY1B, 80, 134
customer premises equipment
(315x-series CSUs), 188
D
data line circuit packs, 141, 145
DC power
circuit breakers, 52
connector blocks, 75
distribution units
J58890CF, 60
J58890CG, 66
grounding , 62
relays, 55, 56
requirements, 52, 53
units
644A1/B1, 132
645B1, 132
649A, 62, 132
676B, 66, 134
DCCs, 110
DCS X.25 signaling , 144
DEFINITY AUDIX R3 port assemblies
(ED-1E546), 134, 135
Definity AUDIX slim, 126
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
296
DID trunk circuit packs
TN436B, 137
TN459B, 139
TN753, 149
TN2139, 168
TN2146, 168
DIOD trunk circuit packs
TN429/B, 137
TN2184, 170
disk drives, 135, 167
DLC packs
2-wire DCP (TN2136), 167
2-wire DCP (TN2181), 169
2-wire, 24-port DCP (TN2224), 176
DMIs (TN1655), 166
DS-1 converter circuit packs
TN574, 143
TN1654, 166
DS-1 CPE loopback jacks, 188
DS1 remoting transmission
distances, 240
DS-1 tie trunk circuit packs, 144
DSLACs, 168
Dual port network cabinet
, 78
duplicated control cabinets
(J58890M), 11, 14, 92
duplicated control carriers
(J58890AJ), 75, 79
duplication interfaces
TN772, 155, 158
UN330B, 182
duplication strategy, 18
E
E-1 (32-channel) circuit packs
TN464C/D/E/F, 139, 173
TN1654, 166
earth, 63
earthquake protections, 71
ED-1E546 port assemblies, 134, 135
EIA interface, 141
EIs
TN570/B/C, 106, 143, 155
TN776, 155
electrical components, power
distribution units, 54
electromagnetic compatibility
standards, ii
emergency transfer control circuit
packs, 165
EMI filters, 56
enhanced DC rectifier cabinet, 66
environmental considerations, 41
EPN cabinets (J58890A), 15, 77, 107
EPNs, 3
ESD, 121
ethernet interface (TN2170), 135, 169
expansion control cabinets
C8890AF, 89
J58890AF, 77, 79
SCCs, 14
expansion port carriers (J58890BB), 77
external alarms, 191
F
features
additional hardware
requirements, 195
wireless terminal access, 253
fiber optic cabling distances, 238
fiber optic transceivers, 187
floor area requirements, 27
floor grounds, 64
floor loads, 30
floor plans, 31
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
297
Forum Personal Communications
Manager (PCM), 191
France
50-Hz 8RG power unit slots, 81, 95
122A music on hold , 186
TN2202 ring generator, 173
FreeWorks wireless
telecommunications, 249
fuse panels (J58889AB), 75
fuses
20-amp , 56
sneak current protectors, 70
G
Germany, 170
ground isolation, 61
ground ring , 63
ground wiring , 53
grounding, AC and DC, 62, 63, 64
H
hardware, table of additional
requirements, 195
heat dissipation, 41
high reliability systems, 109, 111, 115
Hong Kong type-approval labels, 291
humidity, 42
Hungary, 168
hybrid line circuit packs, 151
I
IDFs, 120
India, 246
indicator light signals, 247
initialization, 240
international requirements, 26, 52, 53
intra-premises cabling , 234
IP softphones
CentreVu IP Agent, 26
Dual-Connection, 25
VOIP, 25
IP Solutions, 22
modes
MedPro, 23
Trunk, 23
softphones
CentreVu IP Agent, 26
Dual-Connection, 25
general information, 24
options available, 24
VOIP, 25
TN802/TN802B interface
assembly, 23
trunks
H.323, 23
IP, 24
ISDN–BRI line interfaces
2-wire U-LT, 172, 238
4-wire S/T-NT, 141
4-wire S/T-TE, 171
ISDN–PRI
DASS converters, 181
DPNSS converters, 182
Isolating Data Interface, 185
isolator interfaces, 61
Italy
ringing patterns, 246
TN433 speech synthesizer, 137
TN2138 CO trunk, 167
TN2139 DID trunk, 168
TN2140/B tie trunk, 168
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
298
J
K
J58886N auxiliary cabinets, 75
J58889AB fuse panels, 75
J58890A EPN/PPN cabinet, 75, 77
J58890AF expansion control
cabinets, 77, 79
J58890AH control carriers, 75, 79, 82
J58890AJ duplicated control
carriers, 75, 79, 83
J58890AP processor carriers, 75, 79,
85
J58890BB port carriers, 75, 77, 79, 87
J58890CE-2 AC power distribution
units/battery chargers, 54
J58890CF-2 DC power distribution
units, 60
J58890CG DC power distribution
units, 66
J58890CH-1 AC power distribution
units, 57
J58890H port cabinets, 14, 101
J58890L BCCs, 14, 92, 96
J58890M duplicated control
cabinets, 92, 97
J58890MA-1 CallVisor ASAI over
DEFINITY LAN Gateway port
assemblies, 135
J58890R enhanced DC rectifier
cabinets, 66
J58890SA SN carriers, 11, 77, 79, 91
Japan
ringing patterns, 246
TN429/B DIOD trunk, 137
TN439 tie trunk, 138
JC8890AF expansion control
cabinets, 89
KS-21906, L9 48 VDC battery, 55
L
labels, type-approval, 291
LAN Gateway, 136
large battery power backup , 59
LASER devices, 178, 238
light intensity, 44
light signals, 247
lightning protection, 70
lightwave transceivers, 190
lines, representative numbers, 193
Local Area Network (LAN), 164, 169
DEFINITY LAN gateway, 95
CallVisor ASAI, 135
loopback tests, 154
M
main system configurations, 4
maintenance circuit packs
TN771D, 154
TN775/B, 106, 155
TN1648, 165
Malaysia, 246
mass storage (UN332), 183
MCCs (multicarrier cabinets)
AUX connector capacity, 74
auxiliary cabinets, 75
carrier types, 15, 79
configuration guidelines, 35
control carriers, 82
DC power distribution, 61
DC powered layout, 73
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
299
MCCs (multicarrier cabinets),
(continued)
duplicated control carrier, 83
expansion control cabinet, 89
fan units, 68
ground integrity, 70
port carriers, 87
power distribution, 56, 57
power systems, 53
PPN cabinets, 75
SN carriers, 91
MET line circuit packs, 145
MF Espana, 146
microprocessor/external RAM, 122
Mobility Manager, 250, 253
multifunction circuit packs
TN567, 134
TN2208, 135, 174
multimedia interfaces, 157
multimedia voice conditioners, 157
multimode fiber transceivers, 190
music on hold interfaces, 186
N
neon power units, 150, 153
NETCON. See network control circuit
pack.
Netherlands, 246
network control (UN332), 183
network control circuit pack, 158
network control/packet interface
circuit packs
TN794, 162
New Zealand , 246
non-US power requirements, 52, 53
NPEs, 123
O
OPS ports
TN464C/D/E/F, 139, 173, 180
TN767C/D/E, 152
Oryx/Pecos operating system, 11
OTDR tests, 239
overvoltage protections, 69
P
PACCON. See packet control circuit
pack.
packet bus logical links, 9
packet control circuit pack, 156, 158,
172
packet data line circuit packs, 141, 145
packet gateway circuit pack, 144
packet interfaces, 139, 166
peripherals, ground isolation, 61
PGATE. See packet gateway circuit
pack.
pipe grounds, 63
PNs, 8
pocket telephones, 250
POEs, 194
pooled modem circuit packs, 151
port cabinets, 14, 101
port carriers, 75, 77, 79
port circuit logical links, 9
port circuit packs, 121
power
AC to DC converters, 75
backup , 57, 58
control for carriers, 165
current limited , 80
DC requirements, 52, 53
feeders, 47
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
300
power, (continued)
global requirements, 52, 53
single phase 240 VAC, 49
sources, 47
transformers, 64
WFBs, 251
power converters
631DA1/B1, 53, 132
644A1/B1, 132
645B, 53
645B1, 132
649A, 53, 62, 132
650A, 53, 133
Power Supply, AC, 650A, 133
Power Supply, AC, WP-1217A, 133
Power Supply, DC, 644A, 132
Power Supply, DC, 645B, 132
Power Supply, DC, 649A, 132
power units
AC
631DA1/B1, 53, 132
650A, 133
J58890CE-2, 54
DC
644A1/B1, 132
645B1, 132
649A, 62, 132
676B, 66, 134
distribution, 54
distribution (J58890CH-1), 57
electrical components, 54
neon (TN755B), 150, 153
PPNs
alarms (TN1648), 165
cabinets, 15, 75, 106
SPEs, 3
PRI converters
DASS (TNCCSC-1), 181
DPNSS (TNCCSC-2), 182
processors
circuit packs
TN790, 8, 158
TN798, 8, 163
interfaces (TN765), 139, 158
J58890AP carriers, 75, 79, 85
UN331B, 8, 183
PROM (TN790), 158
protections, system, 69
protective grounds, 63
R
radio controller (TN789), 158
radio frequency noise, 44
RC. See radio controller.
RCs (TN789), 250
receptacle strips, 75
recovery (resets), 240
rectifier modules, 190, 192
relays, DC power, 55, 56
reliability systems, 108
representative lines/trunks, 193
requirements
floor areas, 27
international, 26, 52
sites, 27
response times, 195
ring generators, 56, 150, 173
ringing patterns, 245, 246
RISC processors, 8
RM0850HA100 rectifier modules, 190,
192
Russia
MF (TN744B/C/D), 146
MFR (TN2182/B), 170
MFR (TN744B/C/D), 146
TN2199 CO trunk, 172
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
301
S
SAKIs, 122
SCCs (single carrier cabinets)
acoustic noise levels, 47
configurations, 33
DC power supply (676B), 66
duplicated control cabinets, 97
fan units, 69
port cabinets (J58890H), 101
power systems, 65
types, 92
typical stacks, 94
SCSI drives, 167
service circuit packs, 122
Singapore, 246
single mode fiber optics, 187
single phase 240 VAC, 49
single point ground terminals, 64
single-phase 120/240 VAC power, 47
site requirements, 27
small battery power backup , 58
SN carriers, 11, 77, 79, 91
SN clock circuit packs, 91, 143
sneak fuse panels (507B), 70
sneak protectors, 69
SNIs (TN573/B), 9, 91, 143
softphones available with IP Solutions
CentreVu IP Agent, 26
Dual-Connection, 25
list of, 24
VOIP, 25
solid state voltage protection, 69
Spain
MFE (TN744B/C/D), 146
ringing patterns, 246
speech synthesizers
TN433, 137
TN457, 138
TN725B, 144
SPEs, 8
standard reliability, 108, 111, 112
standards
electromagnetic compatibility, ii, 46
general, ix
Sweden, 246
system
access/maintenance, 165
administration, 19
architecture, 11
cabinet components, 12
components, 3
configurations, 4
duplication options, 18
initialization, 240
layout/cabling distances, 234
protections, 69
recovery, 240
reliability configurations
critical, 109, 112
high, 109, 111, 115
standard , 108, 111, 112
response times, 195
version comparisons, 16
T
T-1 (24-channel) circuit packs
TN574, 143
TN1654, 166
T-1 digital network interface, 188
tape drives, data cassettes, 135
tape drives, SCSI, 167
TCP/IP, 164
TDM buses, 8
technical specifications, 193
temperature, 42
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
302
terminals
grounding , 64
supported , 17
wireless, 252
three phase 208 VAC power, 47
three phase 220/380 VAC power, 49
tie trunk circuit packs
TN437, 138
TN439, 138
TN458, 138
TN760B/C/D, 151, 174
TN2140/B, 168
TN2305 ATM-CES trunk/port-network
interface, 178
TN2313 DS1 Interface, 179
TN2499 Net/Pac field upgrade, 179
TN417 auxiliary trunk, 136
TN419B tone clock, 106, 136
TN420 tone detector, 136
TN429/B DIOD trunk, 137
TN433 speech synthesizer, 137
TN436B DID trunk, 137
TN437 tie trunk, 138
TN438B CO trunk, 138
TN439 tie trunk, 138
TN447 CO trunk, 138
TN457 speech synthesizer, 138
TN458 tie trunk, 138
TN459B DID trunk, 139
TN465/B/C CO trunk, 140
TN468B analog line, 140
TN479 analog line, 140
TN553 packet data line, 141, 145
TN556/B/C ISDN–BRI line, 141
TN566/B alarm, 134
TN567 multifunction, 134
TN570/B/C EI, 106, 143, 155
TN572 SN clock, 91, 143
TN573/B SNI, 9, 91, 143
TN574 DS-1 converter, 143
TN577 PGATE, 144
TN722B DS-1 tie trunk, 144
TN725B speech synthesizer, 144
TN726/B DTE, 141, 145
TN735 MET line, 145
TN742 analog line, 145
TN746/B analog line, 147, 150, 159,
175, 176
TN747B CO trunk, 148
TN748/B/C/D tone-detector, 148
TN750/B/C announcement, 148
TN753 DID trunk, 149
TN755B neon power, 150, 153
TN756 tone-detector, 151
TN758 pooled modem, 151
TN760B/C/D tie trunk, 151, 174
TN762B hybrid line, 151
TN765 processor, 139, 158
TN768 tone clock, 153
TN769 analog line, 153
TN771D maintenance/test, 154
TN772 duplication, 155, 158
TN775/B maintenance, 106, 155
TN776 EI, 155
TN777B network control circuit
pack, 156, 158
TN780 tone clock, 156
TN787F/G multimedia, 157
TN788B multimedia, 157
TN789 RC, 158, 250
TN790 processor, 8, 158
TN798 processor, 8, 163
TN1648 system maintenance, 165
TN1654 DS-1 converter, 166
TN1655 packet interface, 139, 166
TN1656 tape drive, 167
TN1657 disk drive, 167
TN2135 analog line, 167
TN2136 DLC 2-wire DCP, 167
TN2138 CO trunk, 167
TN2139 DID trunk, 168
TN2140/B tie trunk, 168
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description 555-233-200
Index
Issue 1
April 2000
303
TN2144 analog line, 168
TN2146 DID trunk, 168
TN2147/C CO trunk, 168
TN2149 analog line, 169
TN2169 alarm, 134, 169
TN2170 alarm/ethernet, 134, 135, 169
TN2180 analog line, 169
TN2181 digital line, 169
TN2182/B tone clock/detector & call
classifier, 170, 242
TN2183 analog line, 176
TN2184 DIOD trunk, 170
TN2185 ISDN–BRI 4-wire, 171
TN2198 ISDN–BRI 2-wire, 172, 238
TN2199 CO trunk, 172
TN2202 ring generator, 56, 150, 173
TN2208 multifunction, 135, 174
TN2224 2-wire, 24-port DCP, 176
TN794, 162
TN794/TN2400, 162
TN794 network control/packet
interface, 162
TN799 control LAN interface, 164
TN801 LAN Gateway interface, 164
TNCCSC-1, 181
TNCCSC-2, 182
tone clock circuit packs
TN419B, 106, 136
TN768, 153
TN780, 156
TN2182/B, 170, 242
tone detector circuit packs
TN420, 136
TN2182/B, 242
TN748/B/C/D, 148
TN756, 151
TN2182/B, 170
trunks, 193
H.323, 23
IP, 24
Type-approval labels, 291
U
UN330B duplication, 182
UN331B processors, 8, 183
UN332 network control, 183
United Kingdom
ringing patterns, 246
TN447 CO trunk, 138
TN457 speech synthesizer, 138
TN458 tie trunk, 138
TN459B DID trunk, 139
TN468B analog line, 140
TN4198B tone clock, 136
UPS, 55, 57, 58
W
WATS trunks, 148
WFB. See wireless fixed base.
WFBs, 251
wireless fixed base, 158
wireless terminals, 252, 253
WP-1217A Power Supply, 133
WP-91153 AC power, 65
WP-92464 AC power, 251
X
X.25 links, 9
We’d like your opinion.
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document. Your comments can be of great value
in helping us improve our documentation.
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2
System Description
555-233-200, Issue 1, April 2000, Comcode 108678673
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:
Excellent
Good
Fair
Poor
Ease of Finding
Information
Clarity
Completeness
Accuracy
Organization
Appearance
Examples
Illustrations
Overall Satisfaction
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document:
❒
Improve the overview/introduction
❒
Make it more concise
❒
Improve the table of contents
❒
Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
❒
Improve the organization
❒
Add more troubleshooting information
❒
Add more figures
❒
Make it less technical
❒
Add more examples
❒
Add more/better quick reference aids
❒
Add more detail
❒
Improve the index
Please add details about your concern.________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
3. What did you like most about this document?_________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.__________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:____________________________________Telephone Number: (
)
Company/Organization_____________________________________Date:_______________
Address:___________________________________________________________________
When you have completed this form, please fax to (303) 538-1741. Thank you.

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project